Chevrolet Trailblazer manual
Unknown · 28 Q&As

Chevrolet Trailblazer

Ask AI

— answers from the official manual

Answers from the official manual.

Common questions

Common Questions

28 total
1

How do I program a new RKE transmitter if I have two already-recognized transmitters?

With the vehicle off, place the two recognized transmitters in the transmitter pocket, then insert the vehicle key of the new transmitter into the key lock cylinder on the outside of the driver door and turn it to the unlock position five times within 10 seconds. The DIC will display READY FOR REMOTE #2, 3, 4, Etc. Place the new transmitter in the transmitter pocket and press ENGINE START/STOP until it is learned, then remove the transmitter and press K or Q. When finished programming all transmitters, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for 12 seconds to exit programming mode. (Page 14)

2

What should I do if the DIC displays 'NO REMOTE DETECTED' when trying to start the vehicle?

If the RKE transmitter battery is depleted or there is signal interference, place the transmitter in the transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the front of the vehicle. With the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP to start the vehicle. Replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible after starting. (Page 16)

3

How do I use the Remote Vehicle Start feature?

Press and release the lock button (Q) on the RKE transmitter, then immediately press and hold the remote start button (/) until the turn signal lamps flash — or hold for at least four seconds if the vehicle's lights cannot be seen. When the vehicle starts, the park lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running, doors will lock, and the climate control system will operate automatically. The engine will automatically shut off after 15 minutes if the vehicle is not entered. (Page 18)

4

How long will the remote start engine run, and can I extend it?

The engine will automatically shut off after 15 minutes when started via remote start. You can extend the run time by an additional 15 minutes (for a total of 30 minutes) by repeating the remote start procedure while the engine is still running, at least 30 seconds after the initial start. A maximum of two remote starts or one remote start with one extension are allowed between ignition cycles; after that, the ignition must be turned on and back off before remote start can be used again. (Page 18)

5

Under what conditions will the Remote Vehicle Start not work?

The remote start feature will not work if the key is in the ignition (Key Access) or a transmitter is inside the vehicle (Keyless Access), the hood is open, the vehicle is already on, the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle is not in P (Park), two remote starts or a start with an extension have already been used, or there is an emission control system malfunction. The engine will also shut off during a remote start if the coolant temperature gets too high or oil pressure gets too low. (Page 19)

6

How do I arm and disarm the vehicle alarm system?

To arm the alarm, close the liftgate and hood, turn off the vehicle, and lock it using the RKE transmitter, the Keyless Access system, or the inside lock button — the alarm will arm after 30 seconds, or immediately if Q is pressed a second time on the RKE transmitter. To disarm the alarm or turn it off if activated, press K on the RKE transmitter, unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Access system, or start the vehicle. Note that unlocking the driver door with the physical key will not disarm the system. (Page 29)

Show 22 more questions

Full Manual

360 pages
Page 1

![image 1](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile1.png)

Trailblazer Owner’s Manual

![image 2](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile2.png)

Contents

Introduction .............................. 1 Keys, Doors, and Windows .... . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Seats and Restraints ..................... 37 Storage ................................. 80 Instruments and Controls .... . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Lighting ................................. 112 Infotainment System .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Climate Controls ........................ 167 Driving and Operating ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. . 173 Vehicle Care ............................ 238 Service and Maintenance .... . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Technical Data .......................... 323 Customer Information .... .. .. .. .. .. ... . 327 Reporting Safety Defects .... . . . . . . . . . . . 335 OnStar ................................. 339 Connected Services ..................... 344 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

#### Introduction California Proposition 65 Warning

![image 3](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile3.png)

Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 84883545 A First Printing ©2022 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

####### Introduction

####### Canadian Vehicle Owners

This manual describes features that may or may not be on the vehicle because of optional equipment that was not purchased on the vehicle, model variants, country specifications, features/applications that may not be available in your region, or changes subsequent to the printing of this owner’s manual, including changes in standard or optional content.

A French language manual can be obtained from your dealer, at www.helminc.com, or from:

![image 4](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile4.png)

########## Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:

The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and TRAILBLAZER are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

Refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm the features.

Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170 USA

Page 2

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

####### Using this Manual

For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Company” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual.

To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.

####### About Driving the Vehicle

########### Vehicle Symbol Chart

|Caution| |---| |Caution indicates a hazard that could result in property or vehicle damage.|

Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. See the features in this manual for information.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a crash. Be sure to read the driving guidelines in this manual in the section called “Driving and Operating” and specifically Driver Behavior 0 174, Driving Environment 0 174, and Vehicle Design 0 174.

![image 5](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile5.png)

u : Air Conditioning System

  • G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil 9 : Airbag Readiness Light ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) $ : Brake System Warning Light 9 : Dispose of Used Components Properly P : Do Not Apply High Pressure Water B : Engine Coolant Temperature _ : Flame/Fire Prohibited
  • H : Flammable [ : Forward Collision Alert R : Fuse Block Cover Lock Location
  • ####### Danger, Warning, and Caution

    A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “Do not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let this happen.”

    Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.

    ####### Symbols

    Page 3

    |{ Danger| |---| |Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death.|

    The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Warning indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death.|

    M : Shown when the owner’s manual has additional instructions or information.

    + : Fuses j : ISOFIX/LATCH System Child Restraints

  • : Shown when the service manual has additional instructions or information.
  • 0 : Shown when there is more information on another page — “see page.”

    Q : Keep Fuse Block Covers Properly Installed

    d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic

    Stability Control (ESC) a : Under Pressure k : Vehicle Ahead Indicator

    | : Lane Change Alert @ : Lane Departure Warning A : Lane Keep Assist

  • : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure X : Park Assist ~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator
  • O : Power 7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert I : Registered Technician / : Remote Vehicle Start
  • h : Risk of Electrical Fire > : Seat Belt Reminders I : Side Blind Zone Alert
  • Page 4

  • h : Stop/Start 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
  • ####### Instrument Panel Overview

    ![image 6](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile6.png)

  • 1. Air Vents 0 172.
  • 2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 115.
  • IntelliBeam System Button (If Equipped). See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 112.

  • 3. Instrument Cluster 0 92.
  • Driver Information Center (DIC) Display. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108.

  • 4. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 86. Rear Window Wiper/Washer 0 87.
  • 5. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System 0 114. Vehicle Alarm System 0 30.
  • 6. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 115.
  • 7. Infotainment Controls. See Overview 0 120.
  • 8. Climate Control Systems 0 167. Automatic Climate Control System 0 169. Heated Front Seats 0 41. (If Equipped).
  • 9. USB Port 0 127. Auxiliary Jack 0 130.
  • 10. Wireless Charging 0 89 (If Equipped).
  • 21. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 99.
  • 22. Instrument Panel Storage 0 80. Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0 273.
  • 23. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 112.
  • 11. Stop/Start Disable Button. See Stop/Start System 0 189 (If Equipped).
  • Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 224 (If Equipped).

    Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 200. Sport Mode (If Equipped). See Driver Mode Control 0 202 All-Wheel Drive 0 197 (If Equipped).

    Page 5

  • 12. Electric Parking Brake 0 198.
  • 13. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission 0 195.
  • 14. Power Outlets 0 88.
  • 15. Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 184 or Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 186 (If Equipped).
  • 16. Steering Wheel Controls 0 121.
  • 17. Horn 0 86.
  • 18. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 86 (Out of View).
  • 19. Cruise Control 0 203.
  • Adaptive Cruise Control (Camera) 0 205 (If Equipped). Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 217 (If Equipped).

  • 20. Hood Release. See Hood 0 240.
  • Keys, Doors, and Windows

    #### Keys and Locks Keys (Key Access)

    ########## Exterior Mirrors

    Convex Mirrors ............... .......... 32 Power Mirrors .......................... 32 Folding Mirrors ......................... 32 Heated Mirrors ............... .......... 32

    |{ Warning| |---| |Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with the ignition key.|

    ########## Keys and Locks

    Keys (Key Access) ........................ 7 Keys (Keyless Access) .................... 9 Remote Key ............................ 10 Remote Key Operation

    ########## Interior Mirrors

    Interior Rearview Mirrors .... . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Manual Rearview Mirror ................ 33 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ... 33

    Page 6

    (Mechanical Key) .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) ... 13 Remote Vehicle Start .... . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . 19 Door Locks ............................. 20 Power Door Locks ....................... 22 Delayed Locking ........................ 22 Automatic Door Locks .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Lockout Protection ...................... 23 Safety Locks ............................ 23

    ########## Windows

    Windows ............................... 33 Power Windows ........................ 33 Sun Visors .............................. 34

    ########## Roof

    Sunroof ................................. 35

    ![image 7](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile7.png)

    ########## Doors

    Liftgate ................................. 24 Vehicle Security

    Vehicle Security ........................ 30 Vehicle Alarm System ....... ..... ..... . 30 Immobilizer ............................. 31 Immobilizer Operation ..... . .. . .. . .. . .. . 31

    moving the key out of the RUN position. Do not add any additional items to the ring attached to the ignition key.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the key is unintentionally rotated while the vehicle is running, the ignition could be moved out of the RUN position.

    This could be caused by heavy items hanging from the key ring, or by large or long items attached to the key ring that could be contacted by the driver or steering wheel. If the ignition moves out of the RUN position, the engine will shut off, braking and steering power assist may be impacted, and airbags may not deploy. To reduce the risk of unintentional rotation of the ignition key, do not change the way the ignition key and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if equipped, are connected to the provided key rings.|

    ![image 8](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile8.png)

    Attach additional items only to the second ring, and limit added items to a few essential keys or small, light items no larger than an RKE transmitter.

    ![image 9](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile9.png)

    The ignition key and key rings, and RKE transmitter, if equipped, are designed to work together as a system to reduce the risk of unintentionally moving the key out of the RUN position. The ignition key has a small hole to allow attachment of the provided key ring.

    It is important that any replacement ignition keys have a small hole. See your dealer if a replacement key is required.

    Interference from radio-frequency identification (RFID) tags may prevent the key from starting the vehicle. Keep RFID tags away from the key when starting the vehicle. The key that is part of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can be used for the ignition and all locks.

    Page 7

    The combination and size of the rings that came with your keys were specifically selected for your vehicle. The rings are connected to the key like two links of a chain to reduce the risk of unintentionally

    Keys (Keyless Access) The key inside the Remote Keyless Entry

    ![image 10](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile10.png)

    (RKE) transmitter is used for the driver door.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Leaving children in a vehicle with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the RKE transmitter in the vehicle, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with an RKE transmitter.|

    ![image 11](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile11.png)

    Press the key release button on the RKE transmitter to extend the key blade. Press the button and the key blade to retract the key.

    To remove the key, press the button on the side of the RKE transmitter and pull the key out. Never pull the key out without pressing the button.

    ![image 12](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile12.png)

    If it becomes difficult to turn the key in the ignition, inspect the key blade for debris. Periodically clean with a brush or pick.

    If it becomes difficult to turn the key, inspect the key blade for debris.

    See your dealer if a new key is needed. Contact Roadside Assistance if locked out of the vehicle. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 330.

    See your dealer if a new key is needed. With an active OnStar or connected service plan, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 339.

    With an active OnStar or connected service plan, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 339.

    Remote Key See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335. If there is a decrease in the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter operating range:

    Pressing Q may also arm the alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 30.

    Page 8

    ![image 13](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile13.png)

    K : Press to unlock the driver door. Press again within five seconds to unlock all doors. The RKE transmitter can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first button press. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start. The hazard warning lamps may flash to indicate unlocking.

    . Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle.

    . Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

    . Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.

    Pressing K will disarm the alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 30.

    The following may be available: Q : Press to lock all doors and, if equipped, the locking fuel door. The hazard warning lamps may flash and/or the horn may sound on the second press to indicate locking. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.

    . If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

    If equipped, pressing K will also unlock the fuel door.

    ####### Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key)

    7 : Press and release one time to initiate vehicle locator. The exterior lamps flash and the horn chirps three times. Press and hold 7 for three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the turn signal lamps flash for 30 seconds, or until 7 is pressed again or the vehicle is started.

    The RKE transmitter may work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

    If the driver door is open when Q is pressed and enabled through vehicle settings, all doors will lock and then the driver door will immediately unlock. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.

    Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Key 0 10.

    / : If equipped, press Q and then press and hold / to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch

  • 5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two more times. After the third time, turn the ignition on; the key is learned and all previously known keys will no longer work with the vehicle.
  • 6. To learn the second key, turn the ignition off, insert the second key to be learned, and turn the ignition on.
  • 5. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn the ignition on within five seconds. The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed.
  • 6. Repeat Steps 1–5 if additional keys are to be programmed.
  • Page 9

    Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start. The RKE transmitter buttons will not operate when the key is in the ignition.

    ########## Programming Keys to the Vehicle

    Only RKE keys programmed to this vehicle will work. If a key is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. When the replacement key is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining keys must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen keys will no longer work once the new key is programmed.

    ########## Programming without Two Recognized Keys

    After two keys are learned, the remaining keys can be learned by following the procedure in “Programming with Two Recognized Keys.”

    Program a new key to the vehicle when a recognized key is not available. Canadian regulations require that owners see their dealer.

    ########## Battery Replacement

    If two currently recognized keys are not available, follow this procedure to program the first key.

    ########## Programming with Two Recognized Keys To program a new key:

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never allow children to play with the RKE transmitter. The transmitter contains a small battery, which can be a choking hazard. If swallowed, internal burns can occur, resulting in severe injury or death. Seek medical attention immediately if a battery is swallowed.|

    This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes to complete for the first key. The vehicle must be off and all of the keys you wish to program must be with you.

  • 1. Insert the original, already programmed key in the ignition and turn the ignition on.
  • 2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
  • 3. Quickly, within five seconds, insert the second original already programmed key in the ignition and turn the ignition on.
  • 4. Turn the ignition off, and remove the key.
  • 1. Insert the new vehicle key into the ignition.
  • 2. Turn the ignition on. The security light will come on.
  • 3. Wait 10 minutes until the security light turns off.
  • Page 10

  • 4. Turn the ignition off.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |To avoid personal injury, do not touch metal surfaces on the RKE transmitter when it has been exposed to extreme heat. These surfaces can be hot to the touch at temperatures above 59 °C (138 °F).|

    |Caution| |---| |If the RKE transmitter is not reassembled properly, liquids could enter the housing and damage the circuitry, resulting in an RKE transmitter malfunction and/or failure. To prevent damage, always follow the steps for RKE transmitter reassembly in this manual to ensure the transmitter is sealed properly whenever the RKE transmitter is opened.|

    ![image 14](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile14.png)

    |Caution| |---| |When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.|

    The battery is not rechargeable. To replace the battery:

  • 2. Remove the battery with a small tool by pushing it toward the top of the transmitter.
  • 3. Insert a new battery, positive side up, pushing it down until it is held in place. Use a CR 2032 or equivalent battery.
  • 4. Ensure that the silicone mat is correctly positioned with no gaps or wrinkles.
  • 5. Set transmitter button side down on a hard surface and press the other half straight down to force the halves together.
  • ![image 15](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile15.png)

    |Caution| |---| |Always replace the battery with the correct type. Replacing the battery with an incorrect type could potentially create a risk of battery explosion. Dispose of used batteries according to instructions and local laws. Do not attempt to burn, crush, or cut the used battery, and avoid exposing the battery to environments with extremely low air pressures or high temperatures.|

  • Separate the two halves of the transmitter by inserting a flat tool into the recess of the transmitter.
  • Page 11

    ####### Remote Key Operation (Remote Key)

    about 30 seconds to light your approach to the vehicle. The turn signal indicators may flash to indicate unlocking.

    Q : Press to lock all doors. The turn signal indicators may flash and/or the horn may sound on the second press to indicate locking. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.

    The Keyless Access system allows for vehicle entry when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See “Keyless Access Operation” following.

    Pressing K will disarm the theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 30.

    / : Press and release Q and then immediately press and hold / for at least four seconds to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 19.

    If the driver door is open when Q is pressed, and Open Door Anti Lockout is enabled through vehicle settings, all doors will lock and then the driver door will immediately unlock. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start. If the passenger door is open when Q is pressed, all doors lock.

    The RKE transmitter functions may work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

    Other conditions can impact the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Key 0 10

    7 : Press and release one time to initiate vehicle locator. The exterior lamps flash and the horn chirps three times. Press and hold 7 for three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the turn signal lamps flash for 30 seconds, or until 7 is pressed again or the vehicle is started.

    ![image 16](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile16.png)

    Pressing Q may also arm the theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 30.

    K : Press to unlock the driver door. Press unlock again within five seconds to unlock all doors. The RKE transmitter can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first button press.To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start. When remotely unlocking the vehicle at night the back-up lamps will come on for

    b : Press twice quickly to open or close the liftgate. Press once to stop the liftgate from moving.

    With Power Liftgate and Remote Start Shown

    ########## Keyless Access Operation

    Keyless Unlocking/Locking from Front Passenger Door

    ![image 17](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile17.png)

    Page 12

    With the Keyless Access system, you can lock and unlock the doors and access the liftgate without removing the RKE transmitter from your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter should be within 1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door being opened. The buttons are on the outside door handles.

    When the doors are locked and the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the front passenger door handle will unlock all doors. Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:

    . The lock/unlock button was used to unlock all doors.

    Keyless Access can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.

    . Any vehicle door has opened and all doors are now closed.

    ########### Driver Shown, Passenger Similar

    Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:

    Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking of Exterior Door Handles and Liftgate

    Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door

    If equipped, keyless unlocking of the exterior door handles and liftgate can be disabled and enabled.

    . It has been more than five seconds since

    the first lock/unlock button press. . Two lock/unlock button presses were

    When the doors are locked and the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the driver door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver door handle will unlock the driver door. If the lock/unlock button is pressed again within five seconds, all passenger doors will unlock.

    Disabling Keyless Unlocking: With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the RKE transmitter at the same time for approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash four times quickly to indicate access is disabled. Using any exterior handle to unlock the doors or open the liftgate will cause the turn signal lamps

    used to unlock all doors.

    . Any vehicle door has opened and all doors are now closed.

    Temporary Disable of Passive Locking Temporarily disable passive locking by pressing and holding K on the interior door switch with a door open for at least four seconds, or until three chimes are heard. Passive locking will then remain disabled until Q on the interior door is pressed, or until the vehicle is turned on. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

    ########### Keyless Liftgate Opening

    Page 13

    to flash four times quickly, indicating access is disabled. If disabled, disarm the alarm system before starting the vehicle.

    Press the touch pad on the liftgate handle to open the liftgate if the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft).

    Enabling Keyless Unlocking: With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the RKE transmitter at the same time for approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash twice quickly to indicate access is enabled. Passive Locking

    ########### Key Access

    To access a vehicle with a weak transmitter battery, see Door Locks 0 20.

    ########## Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle

    Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed so that lost or stolen transmitters no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters matched to it.

    When the vehicle is turned off and an RKE transmitter is left in the vehicle, the horn will chirp three times after all doors are closed. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.

    The vehicle will lock several seconds after all doors are closed if the vehicle is off and at least one RKE transmitter has been removed or none remain in the interior.

    If other electronic devices interfere with the RKE transmitter signal, the vehicle may not detect the RKE transmitter inside the vehicle. If passive locking is enabled, the doors may lock with the RKE transmitter inside the vehicle. Do not leave the RKE transmitter in an unattended vehicle.

    ########### Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

    If the vehicle is on with a door open, and then all doors are closed, the vehicle will check for RKE transmitters inside. If an RKE transmitter is not detected, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display NO REMOTE DETECTED and the horn may chirp three times. This occurs only once each time the vehicle is driven.

    ########### Programming with Recognized Transmitters

    A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle when there are two recognized transmitters.

    To program, the vehicle must be off and all of the transmitters, both currently recognized and new, must be with you.

    To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.

  • Place the two recognized transmitters in the transmitter pocket.
  • door handle and turn the key, counterclockwise, to the unlock position five times within 10 seconds. The DIC displays REMOTE LEARN PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

    Page 14

  • 5. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press the transmitter K or Q button.
  • To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

    When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for 12 seconds to exit programming mode.

  • 6. Put the key back into the transmitter.
  • 7. Replace the key lock cylinder cap. See Door Locks 0 20.
  • 2. Insert the vehicle key of the new transmitter into the key lock cylinder on the outside of the driver door and turn the key to the unlock position five times within 10 seconds.
  • The DIC displays READY FOR REMOTE #2, 3, 4, etc.

    ![image 18](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile18.png)

  • 3. Remove the two recognized transmitters from the transmitter pocket. Place the new transmitter in the transmitter pocket.
  • 4. Press ENGINE START/STOP. When the transmitter is learned, the DIC display will show that it is ready to program the next transmitter.
  • 2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC displays PRESS ENGINE START BUTTON TO LEARN and then press ENGINE START/STOP.
  • The DIC display will again show REMOTE LEARN PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

  • 3. Repeat Step 2, two additional times. After the third time, all previously known transmitters will no longer work with the vehicle. Remaining transmitters can be relearned during the next steps.
  • Programming without Recognized Transmitters

    If two currently recognized transmitters are not available, follow this procedure to program up to eight transmitters. This feature is not available in Canada. This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes to complete. The vehicle must be off and all of the transmitters you wish to program must be with you.

    The DIC display should now show READY FOR REMOTE # 1.

  • Remove the key lock cylinder cap on the driver door handle. See Door Locks 0 20. Insert the vehicle key of the transmitter into the key lock cylinder on the driver
  • Page 15

    or NO REMOTE DETECTED PLACE KEY IN KEY POCKET THEN START YOUR VEHICLE, follow the steps shown below:

    To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

    ![image 19](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile19.png)

    When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for 12 seconds to exit programming mode.

    To start the vehicle:

    ![image 20](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile20.png)

  • 7. Put the key back into the transmitter.
  • 8. Replace the key lock cylinder cap. See Door Locks 0 20.
  • ########## Starting the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Battery

  • 4. Place the new transmitter in the transmitter pocket.
  • 5. Press ENGINE START/STOP. When the transmitter is learned, the DIC display will show that it is ready to program the next transmitter.
  • 6. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press the transmitter K or Q button.
  • For improved vehicle security, the RKE transmitter is equipped with a motion sensor. When starting the vehicle, if the RKE transmitter has been idle for a while, move the transmitter slightly and try starting the vehicle. When starting the vehicle, if the RKE transmitter battery is depleted or there is signal interference, the DIC may display NO REMOTE DETECTED, REPLACE BATTERY IN KEY,

  • 1. Place the transmitter in the transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the front of the vehicle.
  • 2. With the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP.
  • Replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible.

    ########## Battery Replacement

    To replace the battery:

    |Caution|

    Page 16

    |---| |Always replace the battery with the correct type. Replacing the battery with an incorrect type could potentially create a risk of battery explosion. Dispose of used batteries according to instructions and local laws. Do not attempt to burn, crush, or cut the used battery, and avoid exposing the battery to environments with extremely low air pressures or high temperatures.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never allow children to play with the RKE transmitter. The transmitter contains a small battery, which can be a choking hazard. If swallowed, internal burns can occur, resulting in severe injury or death. Seek medical attention immediately if a battery is swallowed.|

    ![image 21](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile21.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |To avoid personal injury, do not touch metal surfaces on the RKE transmitter when it has been exposed to extreme heat. These surfaces can be hot to the touch at temperatures above 59 °C (138 °F).|

    |Caution| |---| |If the RKE transmitter is not reassembled properly, liquids could enter the housing and damage the circuitry, resulting in an RKE transmitter malfunction and/or failure. To prevent damage, always follow the steps for RKE transmitter reassembly in this manual to ensure the transmitter is sealed properly whenever the RKE transmitter is opened.|

  • Press the button on the side of the RKE transmitter to remove the mechanical key. Never pull the key out without pressing the button.
  • |Caution| |---| |When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.|

    Replace the battery in the transmitter soon if the DIC displays REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.

    Do not use the remote start feature if the vehicle is low on fuel. The vehicle could run out of fuel.

  • 3. Remove the battery by pushing on the battery and sliding it toward the bottom of the transmitter.
  • 4. Insert the new battery, positive side facing the back cover. Push the battery down until it is held in place. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
  • 5. Ensure that the silicone mat is correctly positioned with no gaps or wrinkles.
  • 6. Set transmitter button side down on a hard surface and press the other half straight down to force the halves together.
  • Page 17

  • 7. Reinsert the key.
  • ![image 22](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile22.png)

    The RKE transmitter range may be less while the vehicle is running.

    Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Key 0 10.

    ########## Starting the Engine Using Remote Start To start the vehicle:

  • 1. Press and release Q on the RKE transmitter.
  • 2. Immediately after completing Step 1, press and hold / until the turn signal lamps flash. If the vehicle's lights cannot be seen, press and hold / for at least four seconds.
  • Separate the two halves of the transmitter using a flat tool inserted into the area near the key slot.
  • ####### Remote Vehicle Start

    ![image 23](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile23.png)

    The vehicle has a remote starting feature that starts the engine from outside of the vehicle.

    When the vehicle starts, the park lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running. The doors will be locked and the climate control system will operate automatically if the vehicle has the automatic system, or at the same setting as when the vehicle was last turned off.

    / : This button is on the RKE transmitter.

    Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

    ########## Conditions in Which the Remote Start Will Not Work

    If the remote start procedure is used again while the engine is still running, 15 minutes will be added on for a total of 30 minutes. For example, if Q and then / are pressed again while the engine is still running, 15 minutes will be added on for a total of 30 minutes.

    With an automatic climate control system and if equipped with heated seats, the heated seats turn on during colder outside temperatures and shut off when the ignition is turned on.

    The vehicle cannot be started using the remote start feature if the key is in the ignition (Key Access) or if a transmitter is in the vehicle (Keyless Access), the hood is open, the vehicle is on, the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle is not in P (Park), two remote starts or a start with an extension have been used, or there is an emission control system malfunction.

    Page 18

    The rear window defogger and heated mirrors, if equipped, turn on during colder outside temperatures and turn off when the ignition is turned on.

    A maximum of two remote starts or remote start with an extension are allowed between ignition cycles.

    After entering the vehicle during a remote start, press the brake and ENGINE START/ STOP with the transmitter in the vehicle to drive the vehicle.

    After the vehicle's engine has been started two times using the remote start button or a start with an extension, the ignition must be turned on and then back off before the remote start procedure can be used again.

    The engine turns off during a remote start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low.

    If the vehicle is left running, it automatically shuts off after 15 minutes unless a time extension has been done.

    ####### Door Locks

    ########## Canceling a Remote Start

    |{ Warning| |---| |Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

    . Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. The doors can be unlocked and opened while the vehicle is moving. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked.

    (Continued)|

    ########## Extending Engine Run Time

    To manually shut off a remote start: . Press and hold / until the lamps

    To extend the engine run time by 15 minutes, repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still running. An extension can be requested 30 seconds after starting. The engine run time can only be extended if it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven. Remote start can be extended one time.

    turn off.

    . Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

    . Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

    . Push down on the door lock knob to lock a door.

    Page 19

    ########## Driver Door Key Lock Cylinder Access (In Case of Dead Battery)

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |So, all passengers should wear seat belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.

    . Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.

    . Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.|

    . Pull the door handle once to unlock it.

    ![image 24](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile24.png)

    Pull the door handle again to unlatch it. Keyless Access

    ![image 25](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile25.png)

    To access the driver door key lock cylinder:

  • 1. Insert the key into the slot on the bottom of the cap.
  • 2. Lift the key upward to remove the cap.
  • 3. Insert the key into the cylinder and turn to lock or unlock.
  • To lock/unlock the doors from the outside:

    The RKE transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door being opened. Press the button on the door handle to open. See Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13.

    . Press Q or K on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13.

    . Use the key in the driver door. The key lock cylinder is covered with a cap.

    To lock/unlock the doors from the inside: . Press Q or K on the power door lock

    switch.

    ####### Power Door Locks

    Page 20

    To replace the cap:

    ![image 26](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile26.png)

  • 1. Position the bottom edge of the cap under the lower edge of the metal piece (2). The tabs (3) attach to the metal piece (2) at the positions (1).
  • 2. Rotate the cap upward and install into place.
  • 3. Check that the cap is secure. Free-Turning Locks
  • ![image 27](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile27.png)

    The door key lock cylinder turns freely when either the wrong key is used, or the correct key is not fully inserted. The free-turning door lock feature prevents the lock from being forced open. To reset the lock, turn it to the vertical position with the correct key fully inserted. Remove the key and insert it again. If this does not reset the lock, turn the key halfway around in the cylinder and repeat the reset procedure.

    ![image 28](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile28.png)

    Q : Press to lock the doors. K : Press to unlock the doors. Delayed Locking

    Delayed locking can only be turned on when the Open Door Anti Lockout feature has been turned off.

    This feature delays the locking of the doors until five seconds after all doors are closed.

    When Q is pressed on the power door lock switch while the door is open, a chime will sound three times indicating delayed locking is active.

    ####### Lockout Protection

    ####### Safety Locks

    The doors will lock automatically five seconds after all doors are closed. If a door is reopened before that time, the five-second timer will reset when all doors are closed again.

    If the ignition is on or in accessory mode and the power door lock switch is pressed with the driver door open, all the doors will lock and only the driver door will unlock.

    The rear door safety locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

    ########## Manual Safety Locks

    Press Q on the door lock switch again or press Q on the RKE transmitter to lock the doors immediately. This feature can also be programmed. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Power Door Locks. Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). To unlock the doors:

    Page 21

    If the vehicle is off and locking is requested while a door is open, when all doors are closed the vehicle will check for RKE transmitters inside. If an RKE transmitter is detected and the number of RKE transmitters inside has not reduced, the driver door will unlock and the horn will chirp three times.

    ![image 29](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile29.png)

    Lockout Protection can be manually overridden with the driver door open by pressing and holding Q on the power door lock switch. Open Door Anti Lockout

    If equipped, the safety lock is on the inside edge of the rear doors. To use the safety lock:

    . Press K on the power door lock switch.

    If Open Door Anti Lockout has been turned on and the vehicle is off, the driver door is open, and locking is requested, all the doors will lock and the driver door will lock and then immediately unlock. The Open Door Anti Lockout feature can be turned on or off. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Power Door Locks.

    . Shift into P (Park).

  • 1. Move the lever up to the lock position.
  • 2. Close the door.
  • 3. Do the same for the other rear door.
  • Automatic door locking cannot be disabled. Automatic door unlocking can be programmed. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Power Door Locks.

    #### Doors Liftgate

    To open a rear door when the safety lock is on:

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |. If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function.

    See Engine Exhaust 0 194.|

  • 1. Unlock the door by pulling the inside handle, by pressing the power door lock switches, or by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
  • 2. Open the door from the outside.
  • |{ Warning|

    Page 22

    |---| |Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

    If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

    . Close all of the windows.

    . Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.

    . Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See “Climate Control Systems” in the Index.

    (Continued)|

    When the safety lock is enabled, adults and older children will not be able to open the rear door from the inside. Cancel the safety locks to enable the doors to open from the inside.

    |Caution| |---| |To avoid damage to the liftgate or liftgate glass, make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.|

    To cancel the safety lock:

  • 1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
  • 2. Move the lever down to unlock. Do the same for the other door.
  • ########## Manual Liftgate

    To unlock the liftgate, press K on the power door lock switch or press K on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds. See Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13.

    The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged.

    ![image 30](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile30.png)

    ![image 31](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile31.png)

    Always close the liftgate before driving. Power Liftgate Operation

    |{ Warning| |---| |You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing.|

    To open the liftgate, press the touch pad under the liftgate handle and lift up.

    Page 23

    If equipped, the power liftgate switch is on the driver door. The vehicle must be in P (Park).

    With Keyless Access, the liftgate can be opened when locked if the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad. See Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13.

    |Caution| |---| |Driving with an open and unsecured liftgate may result in damage to the power liftgate components.|

    The modes are:

    . MAX: Opens to maximum height.

    . 3/4: Opens to a reduced height that can be set from 3/4 to fully open. Use to prevent the liftgate from opening into overhead obstructions such as a garage door or roof-mounted cargo. The liftgate can be manually opened all the way.

    Use the pull cup to lower and close the liftgate. Do not press the touch pad while closing the liftgate. This may cause the liftgate to be unlatched.

    . OFF: Opens manually only.

    To power open or close the liftgate, select MAX or 3/4 mode.

    . Press b twice quickly on the RKE

    transmitter until the liftgate moves.

    . Press 8 on the driver door. The driver door must either be unlocked or locked without the security armed.

    failure. A repetitive chime will sound while the falling liftgate detection feature is operating. Remove any excess weight. If the liftgate continues to automatically close after opening, see your dealer for service before using the power liftgate.

    the touch pad on the liftgate handle will restart the motion, but only in the opening direction.

    . Press the touch pad on the underside of the liftgate handle after unlocking all doors. A locked vehicle can be opened if the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad.

    |Caution| |---| |Manually forcing the liftgate to open or close during a power cycle can damage the vehicle. Allow the power cycle to complete.|

    Page 24

    Interfering with the power liftgate motion or manually closing the liftgate too quickly after power opening may resemble a support strut failure. This could also activate the falling liftgate detection feature. Allow the liftgate to complete its operation and wait a few seconds before manually closing the liftgate.

    ![image 32](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile32.png)

    The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme low temperatures, or after repeated power cycling over a short period of time. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually.

    ########## Obstacle Detection Features

    If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate will continue to completion. If the vehicle is accelerated before the liftgate has completed moving, the liftgate may stop or reverse direction. Check for Driver Information Center (DIC) messages and make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving.

    If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle, the liftgate will automatically reverse direction and move a short distance away from the obstacle. After removing the obstruction, the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle, the power function will deactivate. After removing the obstructions, manually close the liftgate which will allow normal power operation functions to resume.

    . Press l on the bottom edge of the

    liftgate to the left of the latch to close. Press any liftgate button, the touch pad, or b on the RKE transmitter while the liftgate is moving to stop it. Pressing any liftgate button or pressing b twice quickly on the RKE transmitter restarts the operation in the reverse direction. Pressing

    ########### Falling Liftgate Detection

    If the power liftgate automatically closes after a power opening cycle, it indicates that the system is reacting to excess weight on the liftgate or a possible support strut

    On-Open and Close : The kicking motion is activated to both open and close the liftgate.

    If the vehicle is locked while the liftgate is closing, and an obstacle is encountered that prevents the liftgate from completely closing, the horn will sound as an alert that the liftgate did not close.

    |Caution| |---| |Attempting to move the liftgate too quickly and with excessive force may result in damage to the vehicle.|

    On-Open Only : The kicking motion is activated to only open the liftgate.

    ########## Setting the 3/4 Mode

    Off : The feature is disabled. Kick Zone

    Page 25

    Operate the liftgate manually with a smooth motion and moderate speed. The system includes a feature which limits the manual closing speed to protect the components.

    To change the position the liftgate stops at when opening:

    ![image 33](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile33.png)

  • 1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode and power open the liftgate.
  • 2. Stop the liftgate movement at the desired height by pressing any liftgate switch. Manually adjust the liftgate position if needed.
  • 3. Press and hold l to the left of the latch at the bottom of the liftgate until the turn signals flash and a beep sounds. This indicates the setting has been recorded.
  • ########## Hands-Free Operation

    If equipped, the liftgate may be operated with a kicking motion near the left side of the rear bumper at the location of the projected logo. The RKE transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the rear bumper to operate the power liftgate hands-free.

    The hands-free feature will not work while the liftgate is moving. To stop the liftgate while in motion use one of the liftgate switches.

    To operate, move your foot in a forward kicking motion near the left side of the rear bumper at the location of the projected logo, then pull it back. The kick must come within 14 cm (6 in) of the rear bumper to activate. Then step back.

    The liftgate cannot be set below a minimum programmable height. If there is no light flash or sound, then the height adjustment may be too low.

    The hands-free feature can be customized. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience. Choose from the following:

    ########## Manual Operation

    Select OFF to manually operate the liftgate. See “Manual Liftgate” at the beginning of this section.

    The projected logo will not work under these conditions:

    |Caution| |---| |Splashing water may cause the liftgate to open. Keep the RKE transmitter away from the rear bumper detection area or turn the liftgate mode to OFF when cleaning or working near the rear bumper to avoid accidental opening.|

    ![image 34](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile34.png)

    Page 26

    . The vehicle battery is low.

    . The transmission is not in P (Park).

    . Hands Free Liftgate Control is set to Off in vehicle personalization. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience.

    . Do not sweep your foot side to side.

    . Power liftgate is turned off.

    . Do not keep your foot under the bumper; the liftgate will not activate.

    . The vehicle remains parked for 72 hours or more, with no RKE transmitter use or Keyless Access operation. To re-enable, press any button on the RKE transmitter or open and close a vehicle door.

    . Do not touch the liftgate until it has stopped moving.

  • 1. 1 m (3 ft) Hands-Free Operation Detection Zone
  • 2. 2 m (6 ft) Projected Logo Detection Zone
  • When closing the liftgate using this feature, there will be a short delay. The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound.

    The projected logo will not work for a single RKE transmitter when a transmitter:

    The projected logo shows where the kicking motion is to take place.

    Step away from the liftgate before it starts moving.

    . Has been left within approximately 2 m (6 ft) of the liftgate for several minutes.

    The projected logo will only be available for this RKE transmitter after it has been out of range for at least 20 seconds.

    . Has been left inside the vehicle and all vehicle doors are closed.

    ########## Projected Logo

    Page 27

    If equipped with this feature, a vehicle logo will be projected for one minute onto the ground near the rear bumper when an RKE transmitter is detected within approximately 2 m (6 ft). The projected logo may not be visible under brighter daytime conditions.

    . Has approached the area outside of the liftgate five times within five minutes. If the logo is continuously on for five minutes, then the projected logo will not turn back on for an hour.

    If an RKE transmitter is again detected within approximately 2 m (6 ft) of the liftgate, or another hands-free operation has been detected, the one-minute timer will be reset.

    ########## Hands-Free Liftgate and Projected Logo Availability

    |Action|Hands-Free Liftgate|Projected Logo| |---|---|---| |RKE transmitter entering projected logo detection zone|Operative|On for one minute| |RKE transmitter left inside projected logo detection zone for minimum of five minutes|Operative|Off until RKE transmitter button press or a door is opened and closed| |RKE transmitter brought in and out of projected logo detection zone five times or more within five minutes|Operative|Off for one hour or until RKE transmitter button press or a door is opened and closed| |Vehicle remains parked for more than 72 hours|Operative|Off until RKE transmitter button press or a door is opened and closed| |Vehicle battery is low|Non-operative|Off| |Transmission is not in P (Park)|Non-operative|Off| |Power liftgate is turned off|Non-operative|Off| |Hands-free liftgate is disabled in vehicle personalization|Non-operative|Off| | | | |

    . Use the Keyless Access system.

    ########### Lens Cleaning

    ![image 35](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile35.png)

    . With a door open, press the

    ![image 36](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile36.png)

    inside Q.

  • After 30 seconds the alarm system will arm, and the indicator light will begin to slowly flash indicating the alarm system is operating. Pressing Q on the RKE transmitter a second time will bypass the 30-second delay and immediately arm the alarm system.
  • Page 28

    The vehicle alarm system will not arm if the doors are locked with the key.

    The indicator light, on the instrument panel near the windshield, indicates the status of the system.

    If the driver door is opened without first unlocking with the RKE transmitter, the horn will chirp and the lights will flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started, or the door is not unlocked by pressing K on the RKE transmitter during the 10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will be activated. The alarm will also be activated if a passenger door, the liftgate, or the hood is opened without first disarming the system. When the alarm is activated, the turn signals flash and the horn sounds for about 30 seconds. The alarm system will then re-arm to monitor for the next unauthorized event.

    If equipped, use a cotton swab to clean the lens.

    Off : Alarm system is disarmed. On Solid : Vehicle is secured during the delay to arm the system. Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured. A door, the hood, or the liftgate is open. Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed. Arming the Alarm System

    #### Vehicle Security

    This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make the vehicle impossible to steal.

    Vehicle Alarm System This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm system.

  • 1. Close the liftgate and the hood. Turn off the vehicle.
  • 2. Lock the vehicle in one of three ways:
  • . Use the RKE transmitter.

    ####### Immobilizer Operation

    ########## Disarming the Alarm System

    When trying to start the vehicle, the security light may come on briefly when the ignition is turned on.

    To disarm the alarm system or turn off the alarm if it has been activated:

    This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.

    If the engine does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the ignition off and try again.

    . Press K on the RKE transmitter.

    Page 29

    The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed.

    . Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless

    Access system. . Start the vehicle.

    The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the vehicle is turned off.

    If the vehicle will not change ignition modes, and the RKE transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another transmitter. Or, try placing the transmitter in the transmitter pocket located in the center console. See Starting the Vehicle With a Low Transmitter Battery under Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13. If the ignition mode will not change with the other transmitter or with a transmitter in the transmitter pocket, the vehicle needs service. If the ignition does change modes, the first transmitter may be faulty. See a dealer who can service the theft-deterrent system and have a new RKE transmitter programmed to the vehicle. It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement RKE transmitters. Up to eight transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional transmitters, see Programming

    To avoid setting off the alarm by accident: . Lock the vehicle after all occupants have

    The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition is on or in accessory mode and a valid transmitter is present in the vehicle.

    left the vehicle and all doors are closed.

    . Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter or use the Keyless Access system.

    ![image 37](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile37.png)

    Unlocking the driver door with the key will not disarm the system or turn off the alarm.

    ########## How to Detect a Tamper Condition

    If K is pressed and the horn chirps and the lights flash three times, the alarm was activated while the alarm system was armed.

    The security light in the instrument cluster comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

    The system has one or more RKE transmitters matched to an immobilizer control unit in the vehicle. Only a correctly matched RKE transmitter will start the vehicle. If the transmitter is ever damaged, the vehicle may not start.

    If the alarm system has been activated, a message will appear on the DIC.

    Immobilizer See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335.

    ####### Power Mirrors

    Page 30

    Lane Change Alert (LCA) The vehicle may have LCA. See Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 222. Side Blind Zone Alert

    Transmitters to the Vehicle under Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13.

    ![image 38](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile38.png)

    Do not leave the transmitter or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

    The vehicle may have Side Blind Zone Alert. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 222.

    #### Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors

    ####### Folding Mirrors Manual Folding Mirrors

    |{ Warning| |---| |A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the adjacent lane, you could hit a vehicle that is driving next to you. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.|

    (If equipped), the mirrors can be folded inward by hand to prevent damage when going through tight maneuvers such as an automatic car wash. Afterward, fold the mirror outward by hand to return it to the original position.

    To adjust a mirror:

  • 1. Press } or | to choose the driver or passenger mirror.
  • 2. Press one of the four arrows on the control pad to move the mirror in the desired direction.
  • 3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
  • 4. Press } or | again to deselect the mirror. If you do not deselect the mirror, the mirror adjustment will turn off after about one minute.
  • Heated Mirrors K : Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Automatic Climate Control System 0 169.

    The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat.

    #### Interior Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirrors

    Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle.

    Page 31

    Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |rear seat, use the window lockout switch to prevent operation of the windows. See Keys (Key Access) 0 7 or Keys (Keyless Access) 0 9.|

    ![image 39](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile39.png)

    ####### Manual Rearview Mirror

    If equipped, push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it rearward for nighttime use to avoid glare of the headlamps from behind.

    ![image 40](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile40.png)

    ####### Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

    The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance. This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof, if equipped.

    If equipped, automatic dimming reduces the glare of headlamps from behind. The dimming feature comes on when the vehicle is started.

    #### Windows

    ####### Power Windows

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.|

    The power windows work when the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 192.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Never leave the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the

    (Continued)|

    Page 32

    Using the window switch, press to open or pull to close the window.

    The windows may be temporarily disabled if they are used repeatedly within a short time.

    ########## Window Lockout

    ########## Programming the Power Windows

    Briefly press or pull the window switch in the same direction to stop that window’s express movement.

    Programming may be necessary if the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the window is unable to express-up, program each express-close window:

    ![image 41](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile41.png)

    ########## Window Automatic Reversal System

    The express-close feature will reverse window movement if it comes in contact with an object. Extreme cold or ice could cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will operate normally after the object or condition is removed.

  • 1. Close all doors.
  • 2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.
  • 3. Partially open the window to be programmed. Then close it and continue to pull the switch briefly after the window has fully closed.
  • 4. Open the window and continue to press the switch briefly after the window has fully opened.
  • ########## Automatic Reversal System Override

    |{ Warning| |---| |If automatic reversal system override is active, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before using automatic reversal system override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path.|

    This feature stops the rear passenger window switches from working.

    . Press 2 to engage the rear window lockout feature. The indicator light is on when engaged.

    Page 33

    ####### Sun Visors

    ######### . Press 2 again to disengage. Window Express Movement

    ![image 42](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile42.png)

    All windows can be opened without holding the window switch. Press the switch down fully and quickly release to express open the window.

    When the engine is on, override the automatic reversal system by pulling and holding the window switch if conditions prevent it from closing.

    If equipped, pull the window switch up fully and quickly release to express close the window.

  • 1. Sunroof Switch (SLIDE)
  • 2. Vent Switch (TILT)
  • Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window and, if equipped, extend along the rod.

    When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will automatically raise.

    The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed.

    Sunroof Switch Express-Open/Express-Close : To express-open the sunroof, fully press and release i (1). Press the switch again to stop it. To express-close the sunroof, fully press and release g (1). Press the switch again to stop it. Open/Close (Manual Mode) : To open the sunroof, press to the first position, and hold i (1) until the sunroof reaches the desired position. Press and hold g (1) to close it. Sunshade Switch Express-Open/Express-Close : To express-open the sunshade, fully press and release r. To express-close the sunshade, fully press and release s. Press the switch again to stop it. Open/Close (Manual Mode) : To open the

    #### Roof Sunroof

    ########## Automatic Reversal System

    The sunroof has an automatic reversal system that is only active when the sunroof is operated in express-close mode.

    If equipped, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active to operate the sunroof. See Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 184 or Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 186 and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 192.

    If an object is in the path while express closing, the reversal system will detect an object, stop, and open the sunroof or power sunshade slightly.

    If frost or other conditions prevent closing, override the feature by closing the sunroof in manual mode. To stop movement, release the switch.

    Page 34

    ![image 43](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile43.png)

    In the event of closing difficulties like frost or other conditions, it is possible to override the reversal system. To override the reversal system, close in manual mode. To stop the movement, release the switch.

    sunshade, press to the first position, and hold r until the sunshade reaches the desired position.

    Press and hold s to close the sunshade.

    < Type1 >

    ![image 44](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile44.png)

    Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an issue with sunroof operation or noise. It could also plug the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from the sunroof.

    Seats and Restraints

    #### Head Restraints

    When Should an Airbag Inflate? .... . . . . 55 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ......... 56 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .... . . . . . 56 What Will You See after an Airbag

    |{ Warning| |---| |With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.|

    ########## Head Restraints

    Head Restraints ......................... 37 Front Seats

    Inflates? .............................. 56 Passenger Sensing System .............. 58 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

    Seat Adjustment .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Power Seat Adjustment .... . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Reclining Seatbacks .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Lumbar Adjustment ..................... 41 Heated Front Seats ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 41 Folding Seatback .... .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . 42

    Vehicle ................................ 61 Adding Equipment to the

    Page 35

    Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... . . . . . . . . . . 61 Airbag System Check ................... 62 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a

    Crash ................................. 62 Child Restraints

    ########## Front Seats

    ########## Rear Seats

    The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

    Rear Seats .............................. 43 Rear Seat Armrest ...................... 45

    Older Children .......................... 63 Infants and Young Children .... . . . . . . . . 64 Child Restraint Systems .... . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Where to Put the Restraint .... . . . . . . . . 68 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

    ########## Seat Belts

    ![image 45](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile45.png)

    Seat Belts .............................. 45 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly .... . . 46 Lap-Shoulder Belt ....................... 48 Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy .... . . . . 50 Seat Belt Extender ................ ...... 51 Safety System Check .................... 51 Seat Belt Care ..... . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . 51 Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a

    (LATCH System) .... .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 69 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a

    Crash ................................. 74 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat

    Belt in the Rear Seat) ................. 75 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat

    Belt in the Front Seat) ................ 76

    Crash ................................. 52 Airbag System

    Airbag System .......................... 52 Where Are the Airbags? .... . . .. . . .. . . .. 54

    ########## Rear Seats

    ########## Folding the Rear Head Restraint

    Page 36

    Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chances of a neck injury in a crash.

    The vehicle’s rear seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Try to move the head restraint to make sure it is locked in place.

    The head restraint can be folded rearward to allow for better visibility when the rear seat is unoccupied.

    ![image 46](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile46.png)

    ![image 47](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile47.png)

    ![image 48](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile48.png)

    To fold the head restraint, press the button on the side of the head restraint.

    To raise or lower the head restraint, press the button located on the side of the head restraint, and pull up or push the head restraint down, and release the button. Pull and push on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.

    To lower the head restraint, press the button on the top of the seatback and push the head restraint down. Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure it is locked in place.

    The front seat outboard head restraints are not removable.

    #### Front Seats Seat Adjustment Seat Position

  • Try to move the seat back and forth to
  • ![image 49](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile49.png)

    be sure it is locked in place. Height Adjustment

    ![image 50](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile50.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.|

    The head restraint will fold rearward automatically.

    Page 37

    ![image 51](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile51.png)

    When an occupant or child restraint is in the seat, always return the head restraint to the full upright position. Pull the head restraint up and forward until it locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure that it is locked.

    If equipped, move the lever up or down to manually raise or lower the seat.

    ####### Power Seat Adjustment

    |{ Warning| |---| |You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.|

    Always adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.

    Rear outboard head restraints are not removable.

    To adjust a manual seat:

  • 1. Pull the handle at the front of the seat.
  • 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the handle.
  • To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks 0 40.

    To recline the seatback:

    |{ Warning| |---| |The power seats will work with the ignition off. Children could operate the power seats and be injured. Never leave children alone in the vehicle.|

  • 1. Lift the lever. If necessary, move the seat belt out of the way to access the lever.
  • 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
  • 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
  • Page 38

    To adjust the lumbar support, see Lumbar Adjustment 0 41.

    ####### Reclining Seatbacks

    |{ Warning| |---| |If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.|

    ![image 52](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile52.png)

    To return the seatback to an upright position:

  • 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback returns to the upright position.
  • 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
  • Manual Seat

    ![image 53](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile53.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the seat belts cannot do their job.

    The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

    (Continued)|

    To adjust the seat:

    . Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.

    . Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down.

    . Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.

    Page 39

    ####### Lumbar Adjustment

    ########## Power Seat

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.

    For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the seat belt properly.|

    ![image 54](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile54.png)

    ![image 55](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile55.png)

    ![image 56](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile56.png)

    . Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline.

    Press and hold the control forward to increase or rearward to decrease support.

    . Tilt the top of the control forward to raise.

    ####### Heated Front Seats

    |{ Warning| |---| |If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may

    (Continued)|

    Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

    light the lowest. If the heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 minutes.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.|

    Page 40

    |{ Warning| |---| |If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate. Where Are the Airbags? 0 54. Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.|

    The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.

    ########### Remote Start Heated Seats

    ![image 57](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile57.png)

    When it is cold outside, the heated seats can be turned on automatically during a remote vehicle start. The heated seats will be canceled when the vehicle is turned on. Press the heated seat controls to use the heated seats after the vehicle is started.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Things you put on this seatback can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure all items before driving.|

    The heated seat indicator lights on the control do not turn on during a remote start.

    The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal.

    If equipped, the controls are on the climate control panel. The engine must be running to operate the heated seats.

    To fold the seatback:

    To enable or disable remote start heated seats, select Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start > Remote Start Auto Heat Seats > Select ON or OFF.

  • 1. Lower the head restraint all the way. See Head Restraints 0 37.
  • 2. Move the seat as far back as possible.
  • Press M or L to heat the driver or passenger seat cushion and seatback. Press the control once for the highest setting. With each press of the control, the heated seat will change to the next lower setting, and then the off setting. Three lights indicate the highest setting and one

    See Seat Adjustment 0 39 or Power Seat Adjustment 0 39.

    Page 41

    Folding Seatback The front passenger seatback may fold flat.

    the rear doors. There may be an alert even when there is nothing in the rear seat; for example, if a child entered the vehicle through the rear door and left the vehicle without the vehicle being shut off.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.|

    ![image 58](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile58.png)

    The feature can be turned on or off. Select Settings > Rear Seat Reminder > ON or OFF.

    ########## Folding the Seatback

    #### Rear Seats

    Either side of the seatback can be folded for more cargo space. Fold a seatback only when the vehicle is not moving.

    ########## Rear Seat Reminder

    If equipped, the message REAR SEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEAT displays under certain conditions indicating there may be an item or passenger in the rear seat. Check before exiting the vehicle.

  • 3. Lift the lever fully and fold the seatback forward. If necessary, move the seat belt out of the way to access the lever.
  • 4. Continue lowering the seatback until it is completely folded and locks in place.
  • |Caution| |---| |Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.|

    This feature will activate when a rear door is opened while the vehicle is on or up to 10 minutes before the vehicle is turned on. There will be an alert when the vehicle is turned off. The alert does not directly detect objects in the rear seat; instead, under certain conditions, it detects when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat.

    To raise the seatback:

    Page 42

  • 1. Lift the lever fully to unlock the seatback. Then, raise the seatback and push it rearward until it re-engages.
  • 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.
  • To fold the seatback:

  • Fold the head restraint. See Head Restraints 0 37.
  • The feature is active only once each time the vehicle is turned on and off, and will require reactivation by opening and closing

  • 3. Pull the lever on top of the seatback to unlock the seatback.
  • A red indicator near the seatback lever is exposed when the seatback is unlocked.

  • 4. Fold the seatback down.
  • To raise a seatback:

    ![image 59](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile59.png)

  • 1. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward to lock it in place.
  • The red indicator near the seatback lever retracts when the seatback is locked in place. The center rear seat belt may lock when you raise the seatback. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again.

  • 2. Return the head restraint to the upright position. See Head Restraints 0 37.
  • 3. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it is locked into position.
  • 4. Check if the seat belt is stowed within hook at side. If not, stow seat belt in it appropriately.
  • 5. Repeat the steps to raise the other seatback, if necessary.
  • Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other seatback, if desired.

    Raising the Seatbacks

    Page 43

    |{ Warning| |---| |If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.|

  • Make sure the seat belt is in the retainer hook
  • ![image 60](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile60.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.|

    When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the upright, locked position.

    ####### Rear Seat Armrest

    ########## Why Seat Belts Work

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not let anyone ride where a seat belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing seat belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing seat belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.

    It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

    Always wear a seat belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too.|

    ![image 61](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile61.png)

    ![image 62](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile62.png)

    When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the seat belts!

    If equipped, the rear seat has an armrest in the center of the seatback. Lower the armrest to access the cupholders.

    To fold, lift the armrest up and push it rearward until it is flush with the seatback.

    When you wear a seat belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the seat belts. That is why wearing seat belts makes such good sense.

    Page 44

    #### Seat Belts

    This section describes how to use seat belts properly, and some things not to do.

    This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the seat belts. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 97.

    . Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you (if possible).

    How to Wear Seat Belts Properly Follow these rules for everyone's protection. There are additional things to know about seat belts and children, including smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children 0 63 or Infants and Young Children 0 64. Review and follow the rules for children in addition to the following rules.

    ########## Questions and Answers About Seat Belts

  • Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a seat belt?
  • . Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

    A: You could be — whether you are wearing a seat belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

  • Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear seat belts?
  • . Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

    It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing seat belts.

    A: Airbags are supplemental systems only. They work with seat belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.

    There are important things to know about wearing a seat belt properly.

    |{ Warning| |---| |You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your seat belt properly.|

    Page 45

    Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing seat belts.

    ![image 63](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile63.png)

    ![image 64](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile64.png)

    ![image 65](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile65.png)

    ![image 66](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile66.png)

    ![image 67](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile67.png)

    Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.

    ![image 68](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile68.png)

    Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.

    Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.

    ![image 69](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile69.png)

    Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest.

    ####### Lap-Shoulder Belt

    If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. See Child Restraint Systems 0 66. If this occurs, let the belt go back all the way and start again. If the locking feature stays engaged after letting the belt go back to stowed position on the seat, move the seat rearward or recline the seat until the shoulder belt retractor lock releases. Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the front outboard seating position may affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 58.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The seat belt can be pinched if it is routed under plastic trim on the seat, such as trim around the rear seatback folding handle or side airbag. In a crash, pinched seat belts might not provide adequate protection. Never allow seat belts to be routed under plastic trim pieces.|

    All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt.

    The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.

    Page 46

  • 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
  • ![image 70](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile70.png)

  • 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |You can be seriously injured or killed if the shoulder belt is worn behind your back, under your legs, or wrapped around your neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around you. You may have to cut the seat belt if it is locked and tightened around you.|

    ![image 71](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile71.png)

    The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

    If the webbing locks in the latch plate before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate flat to unlock.

    ![image 72](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile72.png)

    ![image 73](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile73.png)

    ![image 74](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile74.png)

  • 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.
  • 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.
  • To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position.

    Always stow the seat belt slowly. If the seat belt webbing returns quickly to the stowed position, the retractor may lock and cannot be pulled out. If this happens, pull the seat belt straight out firmly to unlock the webbing, and then release it. If the webbing is still locked in the retractor, see your dealer.

  • Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Seat Belt Extender 0 51. Position the release button on the buckle so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
  • It may be necessary to pull stitching on the seat belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

    Page 47

    Before a door is closed, be sure the seat belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a seat belt, damage can occur to both the seat belt and the vehicle.

    ########## Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

    Do not sit on the outboard seat belt while entering or exiting the vehicle or at any time while sitting in the seat. Sitting on the seat belt can damage the webbing and hardware.

    position. You can move the height adjuster up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide.

    The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.

    After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pushing the release button to make sure it has locked into position.

    Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash. See How to Wear Seat Belts Properly 0 46.

    ########## Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

    Rear seat belt comfort guides may provide added seat belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.

    ########## Seat Belt Pretensioners

    This vehicle has seat belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although the seat belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the seat belt assembly. They can help tighten the seat belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. Seat belt pretensioners can also help tighten the seat belts in a side crash or a rollover event.

    ![image 75](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile75.png)

    Comfort guides are available through your dealer for the rear outboard seating positions. Instructions are included with the guides.

    ####### Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy

    Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear seat belts.

    Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and probably other parts of the vehicle’s seat belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash 0 52.

    To move the shoulder belt height adjuster down, push up on the release button and move the height adjuster to the desired

    reversing the latch plate on the webbing. If the twist cannot be corrected, ask your dealer to fix it.

    Page 48

    But if a seat belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. Only a GM dealer issued extender should be used. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child restraints. For more information on the proper use and fit of seat belt extenders see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

    ![image 76](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile76.png)

    Make sure the seat belt reminder light is working. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 97.

    Keep seat belts clean and dry. See Seat Belt Care 0 51.

    Seat Belt Care Keep belts clean and dry. Seat belts should be properly cared for and maintained. Seat belt hardware should be kept dry and free of dust or debris. As necessary, exterior hard surfaces and seat belt webbing may be lightly cleaned with mild soap and water. Ensure there is not excessive dust or debris in the mechanism. If dust or debris exists in the system please see the dealer. Parts may need to be replaced to ensure proper functionality of the system.

    A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

    ####### Safety System Check

    Periodically check the seat belt reminder, seat belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), and seat belt anchorages to make sure they are all in working order. Look for any other loose or damaged seat belt system parts that might keep a seat belt system from performing properly. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn, frayed, or twisted seat belts may not protect you in a crash. Torn or frayed seat belts can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, have it replaced immediately. If a belt is twisted, it may be possible to untwist by

    The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a seat belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making seat belts effective is wearing them properly.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to

    (Continued)|

    ####### Seat Belt Extender

    If the vehicle's seat belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

    . A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the rear passengers seated directly behind the front outboard passenger

    New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the seat belt system was not being used at the time of the crash.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.|

    Page 49

    Have the seat belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 97.

    All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on a label near the deployment opening.

    ####### Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash

    For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger.

    #### Airbag System

    |{ Warning| |---| |A crash can damage the seat belt system in the vehicle. A damaged seat belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the seat belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.|

    The vehicle has the following airbags:

    For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the lower part of the instrument panel.

    . A frontal airbag for the driver

    . A frontal airbag for the front outboard passenger

    For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the side of the seatback or side of the seat closest to the door.

    . A knee airbag for the driver

    . A knee airbag for the front outboard passenger

    For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

    . A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver

    Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by seat belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

    Page 50

    . A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the front outboard passenger

    After a minor crash, replacement of seat belts may not be necessary. But the seat belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the seat belt assemblies inspected or replaced.

    . Seat-mounted side impact airbags for the second row outboard passengers

    . A roof-rail airbag for the driver and for the rear passengers seated directly behind the driver

    Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

    |{ Warning| |---| |Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Seat belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a seat belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The seat belts and the front outboard passenger airbags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor.

    Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children 0 63 or Infants and Young Children 0 64.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your seat belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with seat belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes seat belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 55.

    Wearing your seat belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the seat belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a seat belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person.|

    ![image 77](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile77.png)

    There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.

    The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 97.

    ####### Where Are the Airbags?

    The driver and front outboard passenger seat-mounted side impact airbags are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

    ![image 78](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile78.png)

    Page 51

    ![image 79](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile79.png)

    ![image 80](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile80.png)

    The driver knee airbag is below the steering column. The front outboard passenger knee airbag is below the glove box.

    The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel.

    ![image 81](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile81.png)

    On vehicles with second row seat-mounted side impact airbags, they are in the sides of the seatback closest to the door.

    The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.

    Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

    Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's head and chest.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.

    Do not use seat or console accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.

    Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie-down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.|

    ![image 82](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile82.png)

    Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.

    Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.

    ########### Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

    The roof-rail airbags for the driver, front outboard passenger, and rear outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. When Should an Airbag Inflate?

    Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

    Page 52

    This vehicle is equipped with airbags. See Airbag System 0 52. Airbags are designed to inflate if the impact exceeds the specific airbag system's deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. The vehicle has electronic sensors that help the airbag system determine the severity of the impact. Deployment thresholds can vary with specific vehicle design.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and

    (Continued)|

    In addition, the vehicle has advanced technology frontal airbags. Advanced technology frontal airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity.

    Knee airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal impacts. Knee airbags are not designed to inflate during vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

    ####### What Makes an Airbag Inflate?

    designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.

    Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. These airbags may also inflate in some moderate to severe frontal impacts. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in rollovers or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

    In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.

    But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 55.

    Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to seat belts.

    For airbag locations, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 54.

    Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags may inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags may inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact.

    ####### How Does an Airbag Restrain?

    ####### What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?

    In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

    After frontal, knee, and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbags inflated.

    Airbags supplement the protection provided by seat belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's body.

    Page 53

    Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate.

    In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or repair costs.

    Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 54.

    Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are

    airbags inflate. The feature may also activate, without airbag inflation, after an event that exceeds a predetermined threshold. After turning the ignition off and then on again, the fuel system will return to normal operation; the doors can be locked, the interior lamps can be turned off, and the hazard warning flashers can be turned off using the controls for those features. If any of these systems are damaged in the crash they may not operate as normal.

    In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag.

    The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

    . Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

    |{ Warning| |---| |When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.

    Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred.|

    . The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 0 336 and Event Data Recorders 0 337.

    . Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.

    The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the

    ####### Passenger Sensing System

    The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system.

    Page 54

    |{ Warning| |---| |A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.

    Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger airbag(s), no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.

    Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the airbag is off. If securing a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure child restraints in the rear seat. Consider using another vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available.|

    The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started.

    The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag should be allowed to inflate or not.

    ![image 83](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile83.png)

    United States

    According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.

    ![image 84](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile84.png)

    Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.

    Canada

    Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag inflates.

    The words ON and OFF, or the symbols for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 98.

    ########## If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint

    When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag(s) to be enabled, the ON indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag(s) are active.

    The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag if:

    The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag if the system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint. If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit:

    . The front outboard passenger seat is unoccupied.

    Page 55

    For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a seat belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

    . The system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint.

    . A front outboard passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.

  • 1. Turn the vehicle off.
  • 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
  • 3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
  • 4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 75 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 76.
  • . There is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system.

    When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, the OFF indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbags are off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 98.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 97 for more information, including important safety information.|

    The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front outboard passenger seat.

    Make sure the seat belt retractor is locked by pulling the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor when installing the child restraint, even if the child restraint is equipped with a seat

    ########## If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Adult-Sized Occupant

  • 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
  • 4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
  • 5. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult-sized occupants. If this happens, unbuckle the belt, let the belt go back all the way, and then buckle the belt again without pulling the belt out all the way.
  • 6. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the ON indicator is lit.
  • belt lock-off. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.

    ![image 85](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile85.png)

    Page 56

  • 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
  • Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints 0 37.

  • 6. Restart the vehicle.
  • If a person of adult size is sitting in the front outboard passenger seat, but the OFF indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat or that the child restraint locking feature is engaged. Use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag:

    The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbags for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child’s size. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the ON indicator is not lit.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the front outboard passenger airbag is turned off for an adult-sized occupant, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect that person in a crash, resulting in an increased risk of serious injury or even death. An adult-sized

    (Continued)|

  • 1. Turn the vehicle off.
  • 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
  • The ON indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |occupant should not ride in the front outboard passenger seat, if the passenger airbag OFF indicator is lit.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Stowing articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.|

    Page 57

    ########## Additional Factors Affecting System Operation

    Seat belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Seat Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.

    ####### Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

    ####### Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

    Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 335.

    A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.

    Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end, or side sheet metal may keep the airbag system from working properly.

    The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing, including improperly repairing or replacing, any parts of the following:

    . Airbag system, including airbag modules, front or side impact sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, or airbag wiring

    . Front seats, including stitching, seams or

    system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System 0 58.

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 54. See your dealer for service.|

    zippers . Seat belts

    . Steering wheel, instrument panel, overhead console, ceiling trim, or pillar garnish trim

    If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 290 for additional important information.

    . Inner door seals, including speakers

    Page 58

    If the vehicle must be modified because you have a disability and you have questions about whether the modifications will affect the vehicle's airbag system, or if you have questions about whether the airbag system will be affected if the vehicle is modified for any other reason, call Customer Assistance. See Customer Assistance Offices 0 329.

    ####### Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash

    Your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag modules and sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, and airbag wiring along with the proper replacement procedures.

    |{ Warning| |---| |A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not properly protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.|

    In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger's seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery, or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery, or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing

    ####### Airbag System Check

    The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 97.

    |Caution| |---| |If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag coverings, have the airbag

    (Continued)|

    If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service.

    The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

    If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 97.

    The manufacturer instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below:

    . Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

    #### Child Restraints Older Children

    Also see “Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 48.

    Page 59

    . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear seat belt comfort guide, if available. See “Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 48. If a comfort guide is not available, or if the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.

    According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in a rear seating position.

    ![image 86](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile86.png)

    In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use seat belts properly.

    . Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never allow more than one child to wear the same seat belt. The seat belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, they can be crushed together and seriously injured. A seat belt must be used by only one person at a time.|

    . Can proper seat belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

    Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s seat belts. Refer to How to Wear Seat Belts Properly 0 46.

    Q: What is the proper way to wear seat belts?

    A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Children can be seriously injured or killed if the shoulder belt is worn behind their back, under their legs, or wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around the child. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to improperly wear, or play with, the seat belts.|

    ![image 87](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile87.png)

    ![image 88](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile88.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never allow a child to wear the seat belt shoulder belt under both arms or behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.|

    Page 60

    ####### Infants and Young Children

    Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

    Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Neither the vehicle's seat belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them.

    Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

    There are three basic types of child restraints:

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms. An infant or child should be secured in an appropriate child restraint.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.|

    . Forward-facing child restraints

    . Rear-facing child restraints

    . Belt-positioning booster seats

    The proper child restraint for your child depends on their size, weight, and age, and also on whether the child restraint is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

    For each type of child restraint, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle and is designed by a genuine child restraint manufacturer. If it is, the child restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

    ![image 89](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile89.png)

    ![image 90](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile90.png)

    Page 61

    The instruction manual that is provided with the child restraint states the weight and height limitations for that particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of child restraints available for children with special needs.

    Child restraints are devices used to restrain, seat, or position children in the vehicle and are sometimes called child seats or car seats.

    ####### Child Restraint Systems

    |{ Warning| |---| |To reduce the risk of neck and head injury in a crash, infants and toddlers should be secured in a rear-facing child restraint until age two, or until they reach the maximum height and weight limits of their child restraint.|

    ![image 91](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile91.png)

    ![image 92](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile92.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle seat belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in an appropriate child restraint.|

    ########### Forward-Facing Child Restraint

    ########### Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

    A forward-facing child restraint provides restraint for the child's body with the harness.

    A rear-facing child restraint provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant.

    The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

    ########## Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

    When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the following:

    ![image 93](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile93.png)

    Page 62

  • 1. Instruction labels provided on the child restraint
  • 2. Instruction manual provided with the child restraint
  • 3. This vehicle owner's manual
  • |{ Warning| |---| |A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle seat belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual.|

    The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

    ########### Booster Seats

    Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is in it.

    To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraints must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 69 for more information. Never use a seat belt extender when installing a child restraint. Never use non-regulated aftermarket anchors or attachments to secure a child restraint. Children can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

    A belt-positioning booster seat is used for children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint. Boosters are designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system until the child is large enough for the vehicle seat belts to fit properly without a booster seat. See the seat belt fit test in Older Children 0 63.

    In some areas Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints. In the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station. For CPST availability in Canada, check with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office.

    Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint

    When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

    |{ Warning| |---| |A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.

    Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.

    Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

    See Passenger Sensing System 0 58 for additional information.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.|

    Page 63

    Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others. Do not install a child restraint in any rear seating position where it cannot be installed securely.

    ####### Where to Put the Restraint

    Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent seat belts or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the seat belt.

    According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint secured in a rear seating position.

    Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.

    The seat in front of an installed child restraint should be adjusted to ensure proper installation according to the child restraint manual.

    Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.

    When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the seat belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether.

    In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. LATCH-compatible rear-facing and forward-facing child seats can be properly installed using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belts. Do not use both the seat belts and the LATCH anchorage system to secure a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.

    Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and secure the child restraint properly.

    Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is in it.

    For a forward-facing 5-pt harness child restraint where the combined weight of the child and restraint are up to 29.5 kg (65 lb), use either the lower LATCH anchorages with the top tether anchorage, or the seat belt with the top tether anchorage. Where the combined weight of the child and restraint are greater than 29.5 kg (65 lb), use the seat belt with the top tether anchorage only.

    Booster seats use the vehicle’s seat belts to secure the child and the booster seat. If the manufacturer recommends that the booster seat be secured with the LATCH system, this can be done as long as the booster seat can be positioned properly and there is no interference with the proper positioning of the lap-shoulder belt on the child.

    ####### Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System)

    The LATCH system secures a child restraint during driving or in a crash. LATCH attachments on the child restraint are used to attach the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier.

    Make sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

    |Reco|Reco|mended Methods for Attaching Child Rest|mended Methods for Attaching Child Rest|aints|aints| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |Restraint Type|Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint|Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Show|Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Show|with an X|with an X| |Restraint Type|Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint|LATCH – Lower Anchors Only|Seat Belt Only|LATCH – Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor|Seat Belt and Top Tether Anchor|

    Page 64

    |Rear-Facing Child Restraint|Up to 29.5 kg (65 lb)|X|X| | | |Rear-Facing Child Restraint|Greater than 29.5 kg (65 lb)| |X| | | |Forward-Facing Child Restraint|Up to 29.5 kg (65 lb)| | |X|X| |Forward-Facing Child Restraint|Greater than 29.5 kg (65 lb)| | | |X| | | | | | | | |See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 75 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 76.|See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 75 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 76.|Child restraints built after March 2014 are labeled with the maximum child weight, with which the LATCH system can be used for installing the child restraint.

    The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in the vehicle.|Child restraints built after March 2014 are labeled with the maximum child weight, with which the LATCH system can be used for installing the child restraint.

    The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in the vehicle.|Not all vehicle seating positions have lower anchors. In this case, the seat belt must be used (with top tether where available) to secure the child restraint. See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 75 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 76.|Not all vehicle seating positions have lower anchors. In this case, the seat belt must be used (with top tether where available) to secure the child restraint. See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 75 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 76.|

    ########## Lower Anchors

    ########## Top Tether Anchor

    top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.

    ![image 94](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile94.png)

    ![image 95](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile95.png)

    ########## Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Rear Seat

    ![image 96](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile96.png)

    Lower anchors (1) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (2).

    A top tether (3, 4) is used to secure the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment hook (2) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in the event of a crash.

    The child restraint may have a single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Either will have a single attachment hook (2) to secure the top tether to the anchor.

    } : Seating positions with top tether anchors.

    H : Seating positions with two lower anchors.

    Some child restraints with a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the

    use an anchor on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

    Page 65

    ![image 97](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile97.png)

    ![image 98](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile98.png)

    Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.

    To assist in locating the lower anchors, each row anchor position has a label, near the crease on the seat cushion.

    To assist in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is near the top tether anchors. Top Tether Anchors

    According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 68 for additional information.

    ![image 99](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile99.png)

    ![image 100](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile100.png)

    ########## Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System

    |{ Warning| |---| |A child could be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly attached to the vehicle using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle seat belt. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual.|

    The lower anchors are behind the vertical openings in the seat cushion trim located below the anchor label.

    The top tether anchors for each rear seating position are on the back of the rear seatback. For models with a cargo cover, remove the cargo cover before installing the top tether. The cargo cover should remain off while the top tether is in use. Be sure to

  • 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the seat belts. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.
  • 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
  • 1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
  • 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
  • 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, adjust the top tether to its full length and attach it to the anchor. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps:
  • Page 66

    |{ Warning| |---| |To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured.|

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |Buckle any unused seat belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, and tighten the belt behind the child restraint after the child restraint has been installed.|

    |Caution| |---| |Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle’s seat belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled seat belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments. Do not fold the rear seatback when the seat is occupied. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a seat belt buckled. This could damage the seat belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the seat belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child’s neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and tightened around a child’s neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.

    (Continued)|

  • 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
  • 2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:
  • If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint 0 68.

    using a dual tether, route the tether around the headrest or head restraint posts. If the child restraint is installed next to a center seat, make sure the top tether does not interfere with the center seating position shoulder belt/retractor. If it does, find another suitable seating position to install the child restraint.

    ![image 101](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile101.png)

    ![image 102](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile102.png)

    If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.

    If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint, adjust it accordingly to allow proper fitment. If you are using a single tether, route the tether in between the headrest or head restraint posts.

    Page 67

  • Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement, for proper installation.
  • ![image 103](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile103.png)

    ![image 104](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile104.png)

    ####### Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash

    |{ Warning| |---| |A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly

    (Continued)|

    If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback.

    If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint, adjust it accordingly to allow proper fitment. If you are

    Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |after a crash, see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.|

    ![image 105](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile105.png)

    If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed.

    In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.

    New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash.

    If the child restraint or vehicle seat position does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the seat belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.

  • Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. There must not be direct contact of the child restraint to the push button.
  • Page 68

    Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

    If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint 0 68.

  • 1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
  • 2. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s seat belt through or around the child restraint. Ensure the seat belt webbing is routed as directly as possible and is not caught on seat handles or plastic trim. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
  • If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 69 for how and where to

    install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a seat belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 69 for top tether anchor locations.

  • 6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 69.
  • 7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
  • ![image 106](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile106.png)

    ![image 107](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile107.png)

  • Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
  • To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
  • To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

    ####### Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat)

    This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 68.

    In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag under certain conditions.

    See Passenger Sensing System 0 58 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 98 for more information, including important safety information.

    When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:

    Page 69

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

    See Passenger Sensing System 0 58 for additional information.|

  • 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint. There must be finger clearance between the push button and the child restraint.
  • When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, the OFF indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 98.

  • 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
  • 3. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s seat belt through or around the restraint. Ensure the seat belt webbing is routed as direct as possible and is not caught on seat handles or plastic trim. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
  • Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

    |{ Warning| |---| |A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.

    Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger airbag(s), no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.

    (Continued)|

    If the child restraint uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 69 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.

    Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

    ![image 108](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile108.png)

    ![image 109](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile109.png)

    ![image 110](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile110.png)

    Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

  • To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
  • ![image 111](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile111.png)

    Page 70

  • Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
  • There must be finger clearance between the push button and the child restraint. If there is not clearance between the buckle push button and the child restraint, move the seat upward and repeat prior installation steps. Otherwise secure the child restraint in a rear seat. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

  • Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
  • Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.

  • Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
  • If the airbags are off, the OFF indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started.

    If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System 0 58.

    To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position.

    Storage

    #### Storage Compartments

    ![image 112](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile112.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not store heavy or sharp objects in storage compartments. In a crash, these objects may cause the cover to open and could result in injury.|

    ########## Storage Compartments

    Storage Compartments ................. 80 Instrument Panel Storage .... . . . . . . . . . . 80 Glove Box .............................. 80 Cupholders ..... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 81 Center Console Storage ....... .... ... ... 81

    ####### Instrument Panel Storage

    ########## Additional Storage Features

    Page 71

    Rear Compartment/Storage Panel

    ![image 113](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile113.png)

    Cover ................................. 82 Cargo Tie-Downs .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Cargo Management System .... . . . . . . . . 83

    There is also a storage compartment in the instrument panel above the glove box.

    ########## Roof Rack System

    Glove Box Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.

    Roof Rack System .... .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. 83

    There is storage in the instrument panel next to the steering wheel. The storage compartment can be removed to access the fuse block behind. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0 273.

    ####### Cupholders

    ![image 114](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile114.png)

    ![image 115](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile115.png)

    ![image 116](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile116.png)

    There is also a storage area in the center console in front of the armrest.

    ####### Center Console Storage

    Two cupholders are in the center console. Cupholders may be located in the rear seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down.

    ![image 117](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile117.png)

    ![image 118](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile118.png)

    There is a storage area in the center console in front of the shift lever.

    Page 72

    #### Additional Storage Features

    ####### Cargo Tie-Downs

    The center console has storage under the armrest. Push the latch, and lift to open. There may be a removable bin inside.

    ![image 119](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile119.png)

    ####### Rear Compartment/Storage Panel Cover

    ![image 120](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile120.png)

    ########## Quarter Lower Storage Panel

    ![image 121](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile121.png)

    The vehicle may be equipped with four cargo tie-downs in the rear compartment.

    There may also be a storage area in the center console for passengers in the rear.

    ########### Passenger Side Shown, Driver Side Similar

    The quarter lower storage panel can be removed on the driver and passenger side. Lift the load floor to access and pull the panel to remove.

    ####### Cargo Management System

    If equipped, the roof rack can be used to load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM certified crossrails can be purchased as an accessory. See your dealer.

    The cargo management system has a height adjustment. Place the load floor on the holders.

    ![image 122](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile122.png)

    To access the spare tire, lift the load floor and place it into the load floor holding slots. See Tire Changing 0 294.

    |Caution| |---|

    Page 73

    |Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 75 kg (165 lb) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Do not load cargo exceeding 75 kg (165 lbs) and always load cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails and does not block the vehicle lamps or windows. Fasten the cargo securely.|

    #### Roof Rack System

    |{ Warning| |---| |If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack — like paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle unless using a GM certified accessory carrier.|

    Lift the load floor to access the cargo management system.

    After storing items, make sure to properly secure the load floor.

    ![image 123](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile123.png)

    ![image 124](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile124.png)

    To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicle’s center of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking, or abrupt maneuvers; otherwise it may result in loss of control. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the cargo remains in its place. Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    Instruments and Controls

    ########## Vehicle Messages

    Electric Parking Brake Light .... . . . . . . . . 101 Service Electric Parking Brake Light .... 101 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning

    Vehicle Messages ...................... 110 Engine Power Messages .... . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Vehicle Speed Messages ................ 111

    ########## Controls

    Light ................................. 101 All-Wheel-Drive Light .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Sport Mode Light ...................... 102 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light ...... .... . 102 Vehicle Ahead Indicator .... . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Pedestrian Ahead Indicator .... . . . . . . . . 103 Traction Off Light ...................... 103 StabiliTrak OFF Light ................... 103 Traction Control System (TCS)/

    Steering Wheel Adjustment .... . . . . . . . . 86 Heated Steering Wheel ................. 86 Horn ................................... 86 Windshield Wiper/Washer .... . . . . . . . . . 86 Rear Window Wiper/Washer .... . . . . . . . 87 Compass ............................... 88 Clock ................................... 88 Power Outlets .......................... 88 Wireless Charging ...................... 89

    StabiliTrak Light .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Tire Pressure Light .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Engine Oil Pressure Light .... ... ... ... . 104 Low Fuel Warning Light .... . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Security Light .......................... 105 High-Beam On Light ................ ... 105 Front Fog Lamp Light .................. 105 Lamps On Reminder ................... 105 Cruise Control Light .... . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. 106 Door Ajar Light ........................ 106

    Page 74

    ########## Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators

    Warning Lights, Gauges, and

    Indicators ............................. 92 Instrument Cluster .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Speedometer ........................... 95 Odometer .............................. 95 Trip Odometer .... . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . 95 Tachometer .... ... .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. .. 95 Fuel Gauge ............................. 95 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .... 96 Seat Belt Reminders .................... 97 Airbag Readiness Light .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .... . . 98 Charging System Light .... . . . . . .. . . . . . . 99 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check

    ########## Information Displays

    Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base

    Level) ................................ 106 Driver Information Center (DIC)

    (Uplevel) ............................. 108

    Engine Light) ......................... 99 Brake System Warning Light .... . . . . . . 100

    #### Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment

    ####### Heated Steering Wheel

    If equipped with auto heated seats, the heated steering wheel will turn on when the auto heated seat is activated. The heated steering wheel indicator will display the state of the steering wheel heat.

    ![image 125](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile125.png)

    ![image 126](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile126.png)

    ####### Horn

    Press a on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn.

    ####### Windshield Wiper/Washer

    |{ Warning| |---| |In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.|

    Page 75

    ( : If equipped with a heated steering wheel, press to turn on or off. A light near the button displays when the feature is turned on.

    To adjust the steering wheel:

  • 1. Pull the lever down.
  • 2. Move the steering wheel up or down.
  • 3. If equipped, pull or push the steering wheel closer or away from you.
  • 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
  • The steering wheel takes about three minutes to reach maximum heat.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Before driving the vehicle, always clear snow and ice from the hood, windshield, washer nozzles, roof, and rear of the vehicle, including all lamps and windows. Reduced visibility from snow and ice buildup could lead to a crash.|

    ########### Automatic Heated Steering Wheel

    If equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel will turn on automatically during a remote start along with the heated seats when it is cold outside. The heated steering wheel indicator light may come on.

    Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

    Windshield Washer e : Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to spray windshield washer fluid and activate the windshield wipers. The wipers will continue until the lever is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the windshield wiper lever is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer had been activated. See Washer Fluid 0 255 for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Rear Window Wiper/Washer

    1X : For a single wipe, briefly move the wiper lever down. For several wipes, hold the wiper lever down.

    ![image 127](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile127.png)

    Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 260. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.

    With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, move the windshield wiper lever to select the wiper speed.

    ########### Wiper Parking

    Page 76

    If the ignition is turned off while the wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they will immediately stop.

    HI : Use for fast wipes. LO : Use for slow wipes.

    If the windshield wiper lever is then moved to OFF before the driver door is opened or within 10 minutes, the wipers will restart and move to the base of the windshield.

    The ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the rear window wiper/washer.

    ![image 128](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile128.png)

    ![image 129](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile129.png)

    If the ignition is turned off while the wipers are performing wipes due to windshield washing, the wipers continue to run until they reach the base of the windshield.

    ########### Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

    INT : Use for intermittent wipes. To adjust wipe frequency, turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.

    When using an automatic car wash, move the windshield wiper lever to OFF.

    The wiper operations return to normal when the transmission is no longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased.

    Turn the end of the windshield wiper lever to operate the rear window wiper/washer.

    OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

    ####### Compass

    OFF : Turns the wiper off. INT : Intermittent wipes. ON : Slow wipes.

    ![image 130](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile130.png)

    The vehicle may have a compass display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The compass receives its heading and other information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and vehicle speed information.

  • f : Push the windshield wiper lever forward to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The lever automatically returns to its original position when released. Reverse Gear Wipes
  • Page 77

    The compass system is designed to operate for a certain number of miles or degrees of turn before needing a signal from the GPS satellites. When the compass display shows CAL, drive the vehicle for a short distance in an open area where it can receive a GPS signal. The compass system will automatically determine when a GPS signal is restored and provide a heading again.

    If the rear wiper control is off, the rear wiper will automatically operate continuously when the vehicle is in

    |{ Warning| |---| |Power is always supplied to the rear cargo power outlet. Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death.|

  • R (Reverse) and the front windshield wiper is performing low or high speed wipes. If the rear wiper control is off, the vehicle is in
  • R (Reverse), and the front windshield wiper is performing interval wipes, then the rear wiper automatically performs interval wipes.
  • ####### Clock

    This feature can be turned on or off. Go to Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience > Reverse Gear Wipes > Select ON or OFF.

    Set the time and date using the infotainment system. See "Time/Date" under Settings 0 153.

    |Caution| |---| |Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the ignition is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when

    (Continued)|

    Power Outlets Power Outlets 12-Volt Direct Current

    The windshield washer reservoir is used for the windshield and the rear window. Check the fluid level in the reservoir if either washer is not working. See Washer Fluid

    The vehicle has 12-volt outlets that can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

  • 0 255.
  • Page 78

    (RAP) off and then back on. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 192. The power

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 15 amp rating.|

    ![image 131](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile131.png)

    restarts when equipment using 150 watts or less is plugged into the outlet and a system fault is not detected.

    The power outlet is not designed for and may not work properly, if the following are plugged in:

    Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle and adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer.

    . Equipment with high initial peak wattage, such as compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools

    When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 237.

    . Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets and touch sensor lamps

    The power outlet is on the rear of the center console.

    An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in use. The light comes on when the ignition is on, equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.

    |Caution| |---| |Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.|

    ####### . Medical equipment Wireless Charging

    If equipped and enabled, the vehicle has wireless charging in the storage bin at the front of the floor console . The system operates at 145 kHz and wirelessly charges one Qi compatible smartphone. The power output of the system is capable of charging at a rate up to 3 amp (15 W), as requested by the compatible smartphone. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335.

    The indicator light does not come on when the ignition is off or if the equipment is not fully seated into the outlet.

    Page 79

    If equipment is connected using more than 150 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it back in or turn the Retained Accessory Power

    ########## Power Outlet 110V/120V Alternating Current

    If equipped with this power outlet it can be used to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum limit of 150 watts.

    To charge a compatible smartphone:

    |{ Warning| |---| |Wireless charging may affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Remove all objects from the charger before charging your compatible smartphone. Objects, such as coins, keys, rings, paper clips, or cards, between the smartphone and charger may become very hot.

    On the rare occasion that the charging system does not detect an object, and the object gets wedged between the smartphone and charger, remove the smartphone and allow the object to cool before removing it from the charger, to prevent burns.|

  • 1. Confirm the smartphone is capable of wireless charging.
  • 2. Remove all objects from the charging pad. The system may not charge if there are any objects between the smartphone and charger.
  • 3. Place the smartphone face up against the rear of the charger.
  • To maximize the charge rate, ensure the smartphone is fully seated and centered in the holder with nothing under it.

    A thick smartphone case may prevent the charger from working, or reduce the charging performance. See your dealer for additional information.

  • 4. A green ] will appear on the infotainment display, next to the phone icon. This indicates that the smartphone is detected.
  • 5. If a smartphone is placed on the charger and ] turns off or turns yellow, remove the smartphone and any objects from the pad. Turn the smartphone 180 degrees and wait a few seconds before placing/aligning it on the pad again.
  • The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. The wireless charging feature may not correctly indicate charging when the vehicle is in RAP, during a Bluetooth phone call, or when phone projection (e.g. Apple CarPlay / Android Auto) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 192.

    ![image 132](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile132.png)

    The operating temperature is −40 °C (−40 °F) to 85 °C (185 °F) for the charging system and

    Page 80

  • 0 °C (32 °F) to 35 °C (95 °F) for the phone. A charging stopped alert may be displayed on the infotainment screen, if the wireless charger or smartphone are outside of normal operating temperature. Charging will automatically resume when a normal operating temperature is reached.
  • disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

    ########### OSS Notice Information

  • If a smartphone is placed on the charger and ] turns red, the charger and/or the smartphone is overheated. Remove the smartphone and any objects from the charger in order to cool the system.
  • To obtain the source code that is contained in this product, please visit https://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download. LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email request to opensource@lge.com. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date on which you purchased the product.

  • Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
  • The smartphone may become warm during charging. This is normal. In warmer temperatures, the speed of charging may be reduced.

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

    For vehicles with wireless phone projection, the smartphone may overheat during wireless charging. The smartphone may slow down, stop charging, or shut down to protect the battery. The phone may need to be removed from its case to prevent overheating. The ] may flash while the phone is cooling down enough for wireless charging to automatically resume. This is normal. Individual phone performance may vary. Software Acknowledgements

    ########### Freescale-WCT library

    Copyright (c) 2012-2014 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.. All rights reserved.

    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

  • 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
  • 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
  • Certain Wireless Charging Module product from LG Electronics, Inc. ("LGE") contains the open source software detailed below. Refer to the indicated open source licenses (as are included following this notice) for the terms and conditions of their use.

    #### Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators

    ####### Instrument Cluster

    ![image 133](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile133.png)

    Page 81

    Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.

    Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

    ########### English Base Level Shown, Metric Similar

  • 1. Tachometer 0 95
  • 2. Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108
  • 3. Speedometer 0 95
  • 4. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 96
  • 5. Fuel Gauge 0 95
  • ########## Cluster Menu

    | | | |---|---| |English Uplevel Sh

    1. Tachometer 0 95
    2. Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108
    |![image 134](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile134.png)

    wn, Metric Similar

    3. Speedometer 0 95
    4. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 96
    5. Fuel Gauge 0 95
    |

    There is an interactive display area in the center of the instrument cluster.

    ########### Selecting menu and functions

    ![image 135](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile135.png)

    Use the right steering wheel control to open and scroll through the different items and displays.

    Press o or p to access the cluster applications. Use the thumbwheel to scroll through the list of available features within the applications. Not all applications or features will be available on all vehicles.

    ########### Audio

    ![image 136](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile136.png)

    Page 82

    ![image 137](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile137.png)

    In the Audio menu browse for music, select from the favorites, or change the audio source. Use the thumbwheel to change the station or go to the next or previous track.

    Navigation If there is an active route, press the thumbwheel to cancel or resume route guidance or turn the voice prompts on or off. Phone In the Phone menu, if there is no active phone call, view recent calls, or scroll through contacts. If there is an active call, mute the phone or switch to handset operation. Options

    ########### Base Level Cluster

    ########### Uplevel Cluster

    The list of available applications;

    The list of available applications;

    . TRIP

    . Home Page

    . VEHICLE

    . Info App. This is where the selected Driver Information Center (DIC) displays can be viewed. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108.

    . ECO

    Not all applications will be available on all vehicles.

    Use the thumbwheel to scroll through items in the Options menu.

    See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)

    Units : Choose US, Imperial, or metric units by pressing the thumbwheel while the desired item is highlighted.

    . Audio

    . Navigation

    Page 83

  • 0 108.
  • . Phone

    . Options

    Not all applications will be available on all vehicles.

    ####### Speedometer

    vehicle is on and can move. The engine could auto start at any time. When the indicator points to OFF, the vehicle is off.

    ![image 138](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile138.png)

    The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

    When the engine is on, the tachometer will indicate the engine’s revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer may vary by several hundred rpm, during Auto Stop mode, when the engine is shutting off and restarting.

    ####### Odometer

    The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles.

    ####### Fuel Gauge

    ####### Trip Odometer

    ![image 139](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile139.png)

    The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset.

    English Base Level

    ![image 140](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile140.png)

    Page 84

    The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108.

    ####### Tachometer

    Metric Base Level

    The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

    For vehicles with the Stop/Start system, when the ignition is on, the tachometer indicates the vehicle status. When pointing to AUTO STOP, the engine is off but the

    Metric Uplevel

    but it actually will take a little more, or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.

    ![image 141](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile141.png)

    ![image 142](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile142.png)

    . Moves a little while turning a corner, speeding up, or braking.

    . Take a few seconds to stabilize after the ignition is turned on and goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off.

    These are normal conditions, none of which indicate a problem with the fuel gauge.

    ####### Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

    ########### English Uplevel

    English Base Level

    When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel left in the tank.

    ![image 143](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile143.png)

    ![image 144](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile144.png)

    Page 85

    There is an arrow near the fuel gauge pointing to the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.

    When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light comes on. There still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle should be refueled soon.

    The fuel gauge may:

    . Take a little more, or less fuel to fill up than it indicates. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank is half full,

    Metric Uplevel

    Metric Base Level

    ####### Seat Belt Reminders Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light

    ![image 145](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile145.png)

    ![image 146](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile146.png)

    There is a driver seat belt reminder light on the instrument cluster.

    ![image 147](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile147.png)

    When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind passengers to fasten their seat belt.

    Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the front passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.

    When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt.

    ########### English Uplevel

    This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.

    If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.

    Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.

    Page 86

    If the pointer moves toward the warning area at the high end of the gauge, the engine is too hot.

    The front passenger seat belt reminder light and chime may come on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the seat belt.

    If the engine coolant has overheated and the vehicle has been operating under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating 0 254.

    If the driver seat belt is buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on.

    ########## Front Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light

    ####### Airbag Readiness Light

    The vehicle may have a front passenger seat belt reminder light near the passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System 0 58.

    This light shows if there is an electrical problem with the airbag system. It is located in the instrument cluster. The system check includes the airbag sensor(s),

    If there is a problem with the airbag system, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.

    the passenger sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring, and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System 0 52.

    several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag.

    ####### Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

    The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 58. The overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator.

    If the word ON, or the on symbol, is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag are allowed to inflate.

    ![image 148](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile148.png)

    ![image 149](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile149.png)

    If the word OFF, or the off symbol is lit, on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag.

    The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.

    Page 87

    United States

    If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.|

    ![image 150](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile150.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right

    (Continued)|

    Canada

    When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after

    If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. Find a safe place to stop the vehicle.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 97 for more information, including important safety information.|

    |Caution| |---| |If the vehicle is driven continually with this light on, the emission control system may not work as well, the fuel economy may be lower, and the vehicle may not run smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    ####### Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light)

    ####### Charging System Light

    Page 88

    This light is part of the vehicle’s emission control on-board diagnostic system. If this light is on while the engine is running, a malfunction has been detected and the vehicle may require service. The light should come on to show that it is working when the ignition is in Service Mode. See Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 184 or Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 186.

    ![image 151](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile151.png)

    |Caution| |---| |Modifications to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system, or the use of replacement tires that do not meet the original tire specifications, can cause this light to come on. This could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also affect the vehicle’s ability to pass an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications 0 239.|

    The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. It should go out when the engine is started.

    ![image 152](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile152.png)

    If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery.

    Malfunctions are often indicated by the system before any problem is noticeable. Being aware of the light and seeking service promptly when it comes on may prevent damage.

    If the light is flashing : A malfunction has been detected that could damage the emission control system and increase vehicle emissions. Diagnosis and service may be required.

    When this light comes on, or is flashing, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays a message.

    . The light does not come on when the ignition is in Service Mode.

    brand. It may require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Recommended Fuel 0 226.

    To help prevent damage, reduce vehicle speed and avoid hard accelerations and uphill grades. If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as possible.

    . Critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed. If this happens, the vehicle would not be ready for inspection and might require several days of routine driving before the system is ready for inspection. This can happen if the 12-volt battery has recently been replaced or run down, or if the vehicle has been recently serviced.

    If the light remains on, see your dealer.

    ########## Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

    If the light continues to flash, find a safe place to park. Turn the vehicle off and wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous guidelines and see your dealer for service as soon as possible.

    If the vehicle requires an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test, the test equipment will likely connect to the vehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).

    Page 89

    See your dealer if the vehicle will not pass or cannot be made ready for the test.

    If the light is on steady : A malfunction has been detected. Diagnosis and service may be required.

    ![image 153](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile153.png)

    ####### Brake System Warning Light

    Check the following:

    ![image 154](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile154.png)

    ![image 155](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile155.png)

    . A loose or missing fuel cap may cause the light to come on. The diagnostic system can detect if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Filling the Tank 0 227 A few driving trips with the cap properly installed may turn the light off.

    The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. Connecting devices that are not used to perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service the vehicle may affect vehicle operation. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 237. See your dealer if assistance is needed. The vehicle may not pass inspection if:

    ########### Metric English

    This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

    . Poor fuel quality can cause inefficient engine operation and poor driveability, which may go away once the engine is warmed up. If this occurs, change the fuel

    . The light is on when the engine is running.

    ####### Electric Parking Brake Light

    If the light comes on and stays on, there is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away. This light may come on if the brake fluid is low. See Brake Fluid 0 256.

    This light should come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.

    ![image 156](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile156.png)

    ![image 157](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile157.png)

    Page 90

    If this light stays on or comes on while driving, there is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB). Take the vehicle to a dealer as soon as possible. In addition to the parking brake, other safety functions that utilize the EPB may also be degraded. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Electric Parking Brake 0 198.

    If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The brake system has electric brake boost. Vehicle speed may be limited when the brake system warning light comes on. The brake pedal might be harder to push, or the brake pedal may go closer to the floor. It could take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Transporting a Disabled Vehicle 0 301.

    ########### Metric English

    This light comes on when the parking brake is applied. If the light continues flashing after the parking brake is released, or while driving, there is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake system. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC).

    ####### Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

    |{ Warning| |---| |The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.|

    If the light does not come on, or remains flashing, see your dealer.

    ![image 158](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile158.png)

    Service Electric Parking Brake Light

    ![image 159](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile159.png)

    This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

    . Green: Appears when LKA is turned on and ready to assist. LKA will gently turn the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking.

    If the light turns amber, there may be a malfunction. See your dealer.

    If the ABS warning light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light stays on.

    ####### Sport Mode Light

    . Amber: Appears when LKA is active. The light flashes amber as a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert to indicate that the lane marking has been unintentionally crossed. If the system detects you are steering intentionally (to pass or change lanes), the LDW alert may not display.

    Page 91

    If the ABS warning light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but ABS is not functioning.

    ![image 160](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile160.png)

    If both the ABS warning light and the brake system warning light are on, ABS is not functioning and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See your dealer for service.

    This light comes on when Sport Mode is selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 202.

    LKA will not assist or alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if LKA detects that you are accelerating, braking, or actively steering. See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 224.

    See Brake System Warning Light 0 100. All-Wheel-Drive Light

    ####### Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light

    ![image 161](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile161.png)

    ![image 162](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile162.png)

    ![image 163](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile163.png)

    ####### Vehicle Ahead Indicator

    ![image 164](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile164.png)

    ########### All-Wheel-Drive Light Front-Wheel-Drive Light

    If equipped, the Lane Keep Assist Light may display the following colors:

    . Blank: LKA is disabled.

    If equipped, the corresponding light comes on when an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mode or Front-Wheel-Drive mode is selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 202.

    . White: Appears when the vehicle starts. A steady white light indicates that LKA is not ready to assist.

    If equipped, this indicator will display green when a vehicle is detected ahead and amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.

    Page 92

    See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 217.

    This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

    This light comes on when the StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is turned off. If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off. To turn ESC off and on, see Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 200.

    ####### Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

    ![image 165](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile165.png)

    The traction off light comes on when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off. If StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is turned off, TCS is also turned off. To turn TCS and ESC off and on, see Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 200.

    If ESC and TCS are off, the systems do not assist in controlling the vehicle. Adjust driving accordingly.

    ####### Traction Control System (TCS)/ StabiliTrak Light

    If equipped, this indicator will display amber on the uplevel instrument cluster and white on the base level instrument cluster when a nearby pedestrian is detected in front of the vehicle.

    If TCS is off, wheel slip during acceleration is not limited unless necessary to help protect the driveline from damage. Adjust driving accordingly.

    ![image 166](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile166.png)

    See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System 0 220.

    ####### StabiliTrak OFF Light

    Traction Off Light

    ![image 167](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile167.png)

    This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

    ![image 168](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile168.png)

    If the light is on and not flashing, the TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system are not fully operational and may not assist in maintaining control. Adjust driving accordingly. If the condition persists, see

    Page 93

    This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

    pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure 0 282.

    your dealer as soon as possible. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message may display.

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |3. Add oil if the oil level is below the normal operating range.
    4. Restart the vehicle. If the engine oil pressure light stays on for more than 10 seconds, turn the vehicle back off. Do not restart the vehicle. See your dealer for service.
    |

    When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady

    The light flashes when the TCS and/or the StabiliTrak/ESC system is actively working.

    If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on every time the vehicle is started. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 284.

    See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 200.

    ####### Tire Pressure Light

    ![image 169](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile169.png)

    ![image 170](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile170.png)

    ####### Engine Oil Pressure Light

    |Caution| |---| |Driving the vehicle with low engine oil pressure can damage the engine and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

    If the engine oil pressure light comes on while driving:

    1. Stop in a safe location and turn off the engine.
    2. Check the oil level. See Engine Oil 0 245.


    (Continued)|

    This light should come on briefly when the engine starts. When the engine is off and the vehicle is on, the light should remain illuminated. If it does not come on under either condition, contact your dealer.

    If equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the vehicle is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS.

    Page 94

    If the light comes on and stays on when the engine is running, it may not have adequate oil pressure. The oil level may be low or there may be some other oil system problem. Turn the engine off when it is safe to do so and contact your dealer.

    ########### When the Light Is On Steady

    This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated.

    A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the

    ####### Low Fuel Warning Light

    ####### Front Fog Lamp Light

    If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation 0 31.

    ![image 171](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile171.png)

    ![image 172](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile172.png)

    ####### High-Beam On Light

    ![image 173](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile173.png)

    A Low Fuel Warning Light near the fuel gauge comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a check to show it is working.

    For vehicles with fog lamps, this light comes on when the fog lamps are turned on.

    The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps 0 115.

    It also comes on when the fuel gauge indicator nears empty. The light turns off when fuel is added. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced.

    This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/ Low-Beam Changer 0 113.

    ####### Lamps On Reminder

    ![image 174](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile174.png)

    Page 95

    ####### Security Light

    ########## IntelliBeam Light

    ![image 175](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile175.png)

    ![image 176](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile176.png)

    This light comes on when the exterior lamps are in use, except when only the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are active. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 112.

    This light comes on when the IntelliBeam system, if equipped, is enabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 112.

    The security light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.

    ####### Cruise Control Light

    ####### Door Ajar Light

    ![image 177](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile177.png)

    ![image 178](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile178.png)

    ![image 179](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile179.png)

    The cruise control light is white when the cruise control is on and ready, and turns green when the cruise control is set and active.

    This light comes on when a door is open or not securely latched. Before driving, check that all doors are properly closed.

    #### Information Displays

    ########## See Cruise Control 0 203. Adaptive Cruise Control Light

    w or x : Move thumbwheel up (w) or down (x) in a list.

    ####### Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level)

    Page 96

    o or p : Press to move between the interactive display zones in the cluster.

    ![image 180](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile180.png)

    The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected. See Vehicle Messages 0 110. All messages appear in the DIC display in the center of the instrument cluster.

    Thumbwheel : Press to open a menu or select a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens.

    ########## Trip/Fuel Menu (TRIP) Items

    This light is white when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is on and ready, and turns green when the ACC is set and active.

    Use the thumbwheel to scroll through the menu items. Not all items are available on every vehicle. The following is a list of all possible menu items:

    ########## DIC Operation and Displays

    Some of the displayed functions differ between vehicle driving and standstill and some functions are only active when the vehicle is driving.

    See Adaptive Cruise Control (Camera) 0 205.

    Speed : Shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

    ########## Vehicle Information Menu (VEHICLE) Items

    95% means 95% of the current air filter life remains. Messages will display based on the engine air filter life and the state of the system. When the REPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGE message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the time of the next oil change. When the REPLACE SOON message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the earliest convenience.

    Trip 1/2 or A/B : Shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset.

    Use the thumbwheel to scroll through the menu items. Not all items are available on every vehicle. The following is a list of all possible menu items:

    This also shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number reflects only the approximate average fuel economy that the vehicle has right now, and will change as driving conditions change.

    Remaining Oil Life : Shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains.

    The Air Filter Life display must be reset after the engine air filter replacement. To reset, see Engine Air Filter Life System 0 248. Tire Pressure : Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 283 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 284. Following Distance : When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not engaged, the current follow time to the vehicle ahead is displayed as a time value on this page. If equipped and when ACC has been engaged, the display switches to the gap setting page. This page shows the current gap setting along with the vehicle ahead indicator.

    Page 97

    When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil 0 245. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended. See Maintenance Schedule 0 315.

    Fuel Range : Shows the approximate distance the vehicle can be driven without refueling. LOW will be displayed when the vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

    The Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life display at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset, see Engine Oil Life System 0 247.

    Instantaneous Fuel Economy : Displays the current fuel economy in liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number reflects only the approximate fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and changes frequently as driving conditions change. This display cannot be reset.

    Air Filter Life : Shows an estimate of the engine air filter’s remaining useful life and the state of the system. Engine Air Filter Life

    Economy Trend : Shows history of the Average Fuel Economy from the last 50 km (30 mi). Each bar represents about 5 km (3 mi) of driving. During driving the bars will shift to always reflect the most recent distance on the right side. Press and hold the thumbwheel to clear the graph.

    Units : Choose US, Imperial, or metric units by pressing the thumbwheel while the desired item is highlighted.

    ![image 181](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile181.png)

    ########## ECO Drive Assist Menu (ECO) Items

    This menu is only available on some vehicles. Use the thumbwheel to scroll through the menu items. Not all items are available on every vehicle. The following is a list of all possible menu items:

    ECO Index : Provides feedback on the efficiency of current driving behavior. The bar graph shows a value that is based on current fuel consumption compared to what is expected from the vehicle with good and bad driving habits.

    Fuel Economy : The center displays the approximate instantaneous fuel economy as a number and bar graph. Displayed above the bar graph is a running average of fuel economy for the most recently traveled selected distance. Displayed below the bar graph is the best average fuel economy that has been achieved for the selected distance. The selected distance is displayed at the top of the page as “last xxx mi/km.”

    w or x : Move thumbwheel up (w) or down (x) in a list.

    ####### Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)

    o or p : Press to move between the interactive display zones in the cluster.

    The DIC displays are shown in the center of the instrument cluster in the Info app. See Instrument Cluster 0 92. The displays show the status of many vehicle systems. The controls for the DIC are on the right steering wheel control.

    Thumbwheel : Press to open a menu or select a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens.

    Top Consumers : List of top comfort consumers currently switched on is displayed in descending order. Fuel saving potential is indicated.

    Page 98

    ########## DIC Info Pages

    The following is the list of all possible DIC info page displays. Some may not be available for your particular vehicle. Some items may not be turned on by default but can be turned on through the Options app. See “DIC Info Page Options” earlier in this section.

    During sporadic driving conditions, the engine will activate the heated rear window automatically. In this event, the heated rear window is indicated as one of the top consumers, without activation by the driver.

    amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 283 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 284.

    number reflects only the approximate fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and changes frequently as driving conditions change.

    Speed : Shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). The vehicle odometer is also shown on this page.

    Air Filter Life : Shows an estimate of the engine air filter’s remaining useful life and the state of the system. Engine Air Filter Life 95% means 95% of the current air filter life remains. Messages will display based on the engine air filter life and the state of the system. When the REPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGE message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the time of the next oil change. When the REPLACE SOON message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the earliest convenience.

    Oil Life : Shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains.

    Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel Economy : Shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset.

    When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil 0 245. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended. See Maintenance Schedule 0 315.

    The Average Fuel Economy display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number reflects only the approximate average fuel economy that the vehicle has right now, and will change as driving conditions change.

    The Air Filter Life display must be reset after the engine air filter replacement. To reset, see Engine Air Filter Life System 0 248.

    The Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life display at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset, see Engine Oil Life System 0 247.

    Fuel Information : Shows the approximate distance the vehicle can be driven without refueling. LOW will be displayed when the vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The Instantaneous Fuel Economy display shows the current fuel economy in either liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This

    Average Speed : Displays the average vehicle speed of the vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). This average is based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset. Reset the average speed by pressing the thumbwheel while this display is active to show a confirmation window to select yes or no.

    Tire Pressure : Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in

    Follow the instructions given in the messages. The system displays messages regarding the following topics:

    Follow Distance : When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not engaged, the current follow time to the vehicle ahead is displayed as a time value on this page.

    Page 99

    ECO Index : Provides feedback on the efficiency of current driving behavior. The bar graph shows a value that is based on current fuel consumption compared to what is expected from the vehicle with good and bad driving habits.

    . Service Messages

    . Fluid Levels

    If equipped and when ACC has been engaged, the display switches to the gap setting page.

    . Vehicle Security

    . Brakes

    #### Vehicle Messages

    This page shows the current gap setting along with the vehicle ahead indicator.

    . Steering

    Messages displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) indicate the status of the vehicle or some action that may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another.

    . Ride Control Systems

    Driver Assistance : Displays the states of all active safety systems.

    . Driver Assistance Systems

    . Cruise Control

    . Lighting and Bulb Replacement

    Top Consumers : List of top comfort consumers currently switched on is displayed in descending order. Fuel saving potential is indicated. During sporadic driving conditions, the engine will activate the heated rear window automatically. In this event, the heated rear window is indicated as one of the top consumers, without activation by the driver.

    . Wiper/Washer Systems

    The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by pressing the thumbwheel. The messages that require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed.

    Page 100

    . Doors and Windows

    . Seat Belts

    . Airbag Systems

    . Engine and Transmission

    . Tire Pressure

    All messages should be taken seriously; clearing the message does not correct the problem.

    ####### . Battery Engine Power Messages ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

    Economy Trend : Shows history of the Average Fuel Economy from the last 50 km (30 mi). Each bar represents about 5 km (3 mi) of driving. During driving the bars will shift to always reflect the most recent distance on the right side. Press and hold the center toggle switch to clear the graph or press p to reset through the menu.

    If a SERVICE message appears, see your dealer.

    This message displays when the vehicle's propulsion power is reduced. A reduction in propulsion power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on,

    but there is no observed reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. Under certain conditions the performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven while this message is on, but maximum acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, or displays repeatedly, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.

    Under certain operating conditions, propulsion will be disabled. Try restarting after the ignition has been off for 30 seconds.

    ####### Vehicle Speed Messages SPEED LIMITED TO XXX KM/H (MPH)

    This message shows that the vehicle speed has been limited to the speed displayed. The limited speed is a protection for various propulsion and vehicle systems, such as lubrication, thermal, brakes, suspension, Teen Driver if equipped, or tires.

    Lighting

    #### Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls

    AUTO : Turns the exterior lamps on and off automatically depending on outside lighting.

    ; : Turns on the parking lamps including all lamps, except the headlamps.

    Page 101

    ########## Exterior Lighting

    Exterior Lamp Controls ................. 112 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .... 113 Flash-to-Pass ........................... 114 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .... . . . . . 114 Automatic Headlamp System .... . . . . . . 114 Hazard Warning Flashers ............... 115 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......... 115 Fog Lamps ............................. 115

    ![image 182](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile182.png)

    5 : Turns on the headlamps together with the parking lamps and instrument panel lights.

    ########## IntelliBeam® System

    If equipped, this system turns the vehicle's high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions.

    ########## Interior Lighting

    Instrument Panel Illumination

    The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present.

    Control ............................... 116 Courtesy Lamps ........................ 116 Dome Lamps ........................... 116 Reading Lamps ......................... 116

    The exterior lamp control is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column.

    ![image 183](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile183.png)

    ########## Lighting Features

    Entry Lighting .......................... 117 Exit Lighting ..... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . 117 Battery Load Management ............. 118 Battery Power Protection .... . . . . . . . . . . 118 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......... 118

    There are four positions.

  • O : Turns the exterior lamps off and deactivates the AUTO mode. Turn O again to reactivate the AUTO mode.
  • In Canada, the headlamps will automatically reactivate when the vehicle is shifted out of

  • P (Park).
  • Page 102

    This light comes on in the instrument cluster when the IntelliBeam system is enabled.

    . The other vehicle's lamps cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.

    The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:

    ########### Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam

    ![image 184](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile184.png)

    . The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps.

    . The vehicle's windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor.

    . The system detects a preceding vehicle's taillamps.

    . The vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps.

    . The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required.

    . The vehicle's speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph).

    . The vehicle is being driven on winding or hilly roads.

    . The IntelliBeam system is disabled by the button on the turn signal lever. If this happens, press b on the turn signal lever when the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO or 5 position to reactivate the IntelliBeam system. The instrument cluster light will come on to indicate the IntelliBeam system is reactivated.

    The IntelliBeam system may need to be disabled if any of the above conditions exist.

    To enable the IntelliBeam system, press b on the turn signal lever when it is

    dark outside and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO or 5. The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on.

    ####### Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

    Push the turn signal lever away from you and release, to turn the high beams on. To return to low beams, push the lever again or pull it toward you and release.

    Page 103

    The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect another vehicle's lamps because of any of the following:

    ########### Driving with IntelliBeam

    The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph).

    There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield that automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.

    . The other vehicle's lamps are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.

    . The other vehicle's lamps are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray.

    There is a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor; otherwise the headlamps will come on when they are not needed.

    When the DRL are on, the taillamps, sidemarker lamps, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on.

    ![image 185](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile185.png)

    The DRL turn off when the headlamps are turned to O or the ignition is off. For vehicles sold in Canada, this control only works when the vehicle is parked. The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed. Automatic Headlamp System

    The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel.

    This indicator light turns on in the instrument cluster when the high-beam headlamps are on.

    When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off or may change to DRL.

    ####### Flash-to-Pass

    The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp control is turned to

    The flash-to-pass feature works with the low beams or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on or off.

    When the exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically.

    O or the ignition is off. Lights On with Wipers If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the engine on, and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are not operating, these lamps turn off. Move the exterior lamp control to O or ; to disable this feature.

    Page 104

    To flash the high beams, pull the turn signal lever toward you momentarily and then release it.

    ![image 186](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile186.png)

    ####### Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

    DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

    The DRL system comes on in daylight when the following conditions are met:

    . The ignition is on.

    . The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.

    . The light sensor determines it is daytime.

    ####### Hazard Warning Flashers

    ####### Turn and Lane-Change Signals

    Have any burned out bulbs replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0 273.

    ![image 187](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile187.png)

    ![image 188](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile188.png)

    ####### Fog Lamps

    ![image 189](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile189.png)

    Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

    An arrow on the instrument cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

    | : Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble.

    Page 105

    Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is complete. If the lever is moved momentarily to the lane change position, the arrow will flash three times. It will flash six times if Tow/ Haul Mode is active.

    Press | again to turn the flashers off.

    The fog lamps button is on the instrument panel beside the steering wheel.

    To turn on the fog lamps, the ignition and the headlamps or parking lamps must be on.

    : If equipped, press to turn on or off. An indicator light on the instrument cluster comes on when the fog lamps are on.

    The lever returns to its starting position when it is released.

    Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

    If after signaling a turn or lane change, the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be burned out.

    1 : When the button is returned to the middle position, the lamps turn on automatically when any door is opened, K on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off

    #### Interior Lighting

    Courtesy Lamps The courtesy lamps come on when any door

    ####### Instrument Panel Illumination Control

    is opened, K on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off. See Dome Lamps 0 116.

    ![image 190](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile190.png)

    + : Press to turn on the dome lamps.

    ####### Dome Lamps

    ![image 191](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile191.png)

    ![image 192](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile192.png)

    Page 106

    This feature adjusts the brightness of all illuminated controls. The instrument panel illumination control is next to the exterior lamp control.

    Push the knob in all the way until it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lights. Push the knob back in when finished. The knob is functional at night, or when the headlamps or parking lamps are ON.

    If equipped, the rear dome lamp controls are in the headliner above the rear seats.

    The front dome lamp controls are in the overhead console.

    ####### Reading Lamps

    E : Press to turn the lamps off, even when any door is opened, K on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off.

    There are reading lamps on the overhead console and over the rear seats. These lamps come on when any door is opened, K on the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off.

    To operate, the vehicle must be on, in accessory mode, or using Retained Accessory Power (RAP).

    Some exterior lamps also turn on when pressing K on the remote key or opening any doors. Low-beam lamps will only turn on briefly at night, or in areas with limited lighting.

    ![image 193](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile193.png)

    ![image 194](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile194.png)

    All lamps will gradually fade out after about 30 seconds.

    Entry lighting can be disabled manually by closing all doors, pressing Q on the remote key, or starting the vehicle. This feature can be changed. On the infotainment home screen, select the Settings icon T Vehicle T Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

    ########### Rear Reading Lamps

    If equipped with dual sunroof, the rear reading lamps are over the rear seats.

    ########### Front Reading Lamps

    Press the lamp lens to turn the rear passenger reading lamps on or off.

    The front reading lamps are in the overhead console.

    Page 107

    Some exterior lamps and interior lamps turn on when the driver door is opened after the vehicle is turned off.

    #### Lighting Features Entry Lighting

    Press the lamp lenses to turn the front reading lamps on or off.

    The exterior and interior lamps remain on for a set amount of time, then automatically turn off.

    The interior lamps turn on when pressing K on the remote key or opening any doors, and the dome lamp control is in the DOOR position.

    The interior lights turn on when the vehicle is turned off.

    The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamp control off.

    A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

    if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs:

    This feature can be changed. On the infotainment home screen, select the Settings icon T Vehicle T Exit Lighting.

    . The ignition is turned on.

    ####### Battery Load Management

    . The doors are closed and then re-opened. Exterior Lighting Battery Saver The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the vehicle is turned off, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been manually left on. This protects against draining the battery. To restart the 10-minute timer, turn the exterior lamp control to the O position and then back to the ; or 2 position. To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the vehicle must be on or in accessory mode.

    The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.

    EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.

    When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

    Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DIC message might be displayed and it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.

    The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all of the power needed for very high electrical loads.

    Page 108

    ####### Battery Power Protection

    This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps or reading lamps are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they automatically turn off after 10 minutes,

    Infotainment System

    #### Introduction

    If the System Needs Service .... . . . . . . . 141 Map Data Updates .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Database Coverage Explanations .... . . . 142

    Read the following pages to become familiar with the features.

    ########## Introduction

    ########## Voice Recognition

    Introduction .... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 119 Overview .............................. 120 Steering Wheel Controls .... . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Using the System ...................... 121 Software Updates ...................... 123

    |{ Warning| |---| |Taking your eyes off the road for too long or too often while using any infotainment feature can cause a crash. You or others could be injured or killed. Do not give extended attention to infotainment tasks while driving. Limit your glances at the vehicle displays and focus your attention on driving. Use voice commands whenever possible.|

    Voice Recognition ...................... 142

    Phone Bluetooth (Overview) ..... ... .. .. .. ... . 147 Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a

    ########## Radio

    Phone) ............................... 148

    Apple CarPlay and Android Auto .... . . . 151 Settings

    AM-FM Radio .......................... 124 HD Radio Technology .................. 125 Radio Data System (RDS) .... . . . . . . . . . . 126 Satellite Radio ......................... 126 Radio Reception ........................ 127 Multi-Band Antenna .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

    Page 109

    Settings ................................ 153 Teen Driver ............................ 156

    ########## Trademarks and License Agreements

    Trademarks and License Agreements .......................... 159

    The infotainment system has built-in features intended to help avoid distraction by disabling some features when driving. These features may gray out when they are unavailable. Many infotainment features are also available through the instrument cluster and steering wheel controls.

    ########## Audio Players

    Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices .... . 127 USB Port ............................... 127 Auxiliary Jack .......................... 130 Bluetooth Audio ....................... 130

    ########## Navigation

    Using the Navigation System .... . . . . . . 131 Maps .................................. 134 Navigation Symbols .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Destination ............................ 135 Global Positioning System (GPS) ....... 140 Vehicle Positioning ..................... 141 Problems with Route Guidance .... . . . . 141

    Before driving:

    Overview Infotainment System The infotainment system is controlled by using the infotainment display, the controls on the center stack, steering wheel controls.

    . Become familiar with the operation, center stack controls, steering wheel controls, and infotainment display.

    . Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.

    ![image 195](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile195.png)

    . Set up phone numbers in advance so they can be called easily by pressing a single control or by using a single voice command.

    See Distracted Driving 0 175. Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

    If equipped, ANC reduces engine noise in the vehicle’s interior. ANC requires the factory-installed audio system, radio, speakers, amplifier (if equipped), induction system, and exhaust system to work properly. Deactivation is required by your dealer if related aftermarket equipment is installed.

  • 1. {:
  • . Press to go to the Home Page.

    Page 110

  • 2. g:
  • . USB/Bluetooth: Press to seek to the beginning of the current or previous track. Press and hold to quickly reverse through a track. Release to return to playing speed.

    . Radio: Press and release to fast seek the previous strongest station or channel. Press and hold to go to the previous station or channel.

  • O:
  • . When off, press O to turn the

    system on. Press and hold to turn off.

    . When on, press O to mute the system and display a status pane. Press O again to unmute the system.

    ####### Steering Wheel Controls

    ![image 196](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile196.png)

    ![image 197](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile197.png)

    . Turn to decrease or increase the volume.

  • 4. d:
  • . Radio: Press and release to fast seek the next strongest station or channel. Press and hold to go to the next station or channel.

    . USB/Bluetooth: Press to seek the next

    track. Press and hold to fast forward through a track. Release to return to playing speed.

  • 5. BACK:
  • The favorite and volume switches are on the back of the steering wheel.

    Page 111

    If equipped, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.

  • 1. Favorite: When on a radio source, press to select the next or previous favorite. When on a media source, press to select the next or previous track.
  • 2. Volume: Press to increase or decrease the volume.
  • . Press to return to the previous screen in a menu.

    g : Press to answer an incoming call or

    start voice recognition. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) 0 148 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 147.

    c : Press to reject an incoming call or end a current call. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call.

    ####### Using the System Infotainment Display Icons

    Infotainment display icons show when available. When a function is unavailable, the icon may gray out. When a function is selected, the icon may highlight.

    ########## Audio

    ########## Apple CarPlay

    ########## Shortcut Tray

    Touch the Audio icon to display the active audio source page. Examples of available sources are AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), USB, AUX, and Bluetooth.

    Touch the Apple CarPlay icon to activate Apple CarPlay if equipped, after a supported device is connected. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto 0 151.

    The shortcut tray is near the bottom of the display. It shows up to four applications.

    ########## Infotainment Display Features

    Infotainment display features show on the display when available. When a feature is unavailable, it may gray out. When a feature is touched, it may highlight.

    ########## Phone

    Page 112

    ########## Android Auto

    Phone icon to display the Phone main page. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)

    Touch the Android Auto icon to activate Android Auto if equipped, after a supported device is connected. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto 0 151.

  • 0 148 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 147. Nav
  • ########## Infotainment Gestures

    Use the following finger gestures to control the infotainment system.

    ########## OnStar Services

    If equipped, touch the Nav icon to display the embedded navigation map. See Using the Navigation System 0 131.

    If equipped, touch the OnStar icon to display the OnStar Services and Account pages.

    ########### Touch/Tap

    ![image 198](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile198.png)

    ########## Climate

    ########## Wi-Fi

    If equipped, touch the Climate icon to display the Climate main page.

    If equipped, touch the Wi–Fi icon to display the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

    ########## Camera

    ########## Settings

    If equipped, touch the Camera icon to access the camera application.

    Page 113

    Touch the Settings icon to display the Settings menu. See Settings 0 153.

    ########## SiriusXM

    Touch/Tap is used to select an icon or option, activate an application, or change the location inside a map.

    If equipped, touch the SiriusXM icon to display the SiriusXM radio service.

    done up, down, right, or left. This feature is only available when vehicle is parked and not in motion.

    ########### Touch and Hold

    Fling or swipe is used to scroll through a list, pan the map, or change page views. Do this by placing a finger on the display then moving it rapidly up and down or right and left.

    ![image 199](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile199.png)

    ########### Nudge

    ![image 200](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile200.png)

    ########## Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays

    For vehicles with high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays, use a microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Before wiping the surface with the microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that could scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to clean. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.

    Touch and hold can be used to start another gesture, or to move or delete an application.

    ########### Drag

    Nudge is used to move items a short distance on a list or a map. To nudge, hold and move the selected item up or down to a new location.

    ![image 201](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile201.png)

    Fling or Swipe

    ![image 202](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile202.png)

    Page 114

    Software Updates Over-the-Air Software Updates If equipped, see “Updates” under Settings 0 153 for details on software updates.

    Drag is used to move applications on the Home Page, or to pan the map. To drag the item, it must be held and moved along the display to the new location. This can be

    #### Radio AM-FM Radio Playing the Radio

    ########## Finding a Station Seeking a Station

    ########### Direct Tune

    ![image 203](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile203.png)

    ![image 204](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile204.png)

    From the Home Page, touch the Audio icon to display the active audio source page. Choose from the three most recently used sources listed at the left side of the display or touch the More icon to display a list of available sources. Examples of available sources are AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), MyMedia (if available), USB, AUX (if equipped), and Bluetooth.

    Access Direct Tune by touching the Tune icon on the infotainment display to bring up the keypad. Navigate through all frequencies using 7 or 6 on the right side of the Direct Tune display. Directly enter a station or channel using the keypad. When a new station or channel is entered, the information about that station or channel displays on the right side. This information will update with each new valid frequency. Touch H to save the station or channel as a favorite. The keypad will gray out entries that do not contribute to a valid frequency and will automatically place a decimal point within the frequency number.

    From the AM, FM, or SXM (if equipped) display, touch 7 or 6 on the infotainment display to search for the previous or next strong station or channel. Browsing Stations From the AM, FM, or SXM (if equipped) display, touch Browse to list all available stations or channels. Navigate up and down through all stations by scrolling the list. Touch the station or channel you want to listen to. Touch H to save the station or channel as a favorite. If equipped, touch Update Station List to update the active stations in your area.

    ########## Infotainment System Sound Menu

    From any of the audio source main pages, touch Sound to display the following:

    Equalizer : Touch to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, and Surround (if equipped) using the options on the infotainment display.

    Fade/Balance : Touch to adjust by using the controls on the infotainment display or by tapping/dragging the crosshair.

    Favorites can also be stored by touching H in a station or channel list. This will highlight indicating that it is now saved as a favorite.

    ########## AM, FM, and SXM Categories

    Touch (X) to delete one number at a time. Touch and hold (X) to delete all numbers.

    ![image 205](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile205.png)

    Page 115

    A valid AM or FM station will automatically tune to the new frequency but not close the Direct Tune display. When listening to SXM (if equipped), touch Go after entering the channel. Touch S on the infotainment display or touch z to exit out of Direct Tune. The tune arrows on the right side of the Direct Tune display 7 or 6 will tune through the complete station or channel list one station step at a time per touch. A touch and hold advances through stations or channels quickly. If equipped, HD Radio multicast stations cannot be tuned directly through the Direct Tune feature. Only the analog or HD1 station can use that feature. Use the display arrows to adjust to the multicast stations.

    The number of favorites displayed is automatically adjusted by default, but can be manually adjusted in Settings in the System tab under Favorites and then Set Number of Audio Favorites. It can also be adjusted in Settings in the Apps tab under Audio and then Set Number of Audio Favorites.

    From the AM stations, if equipped with HD Radio, FM, or SXM (if equipped) display, touch Categories at the top of the Browse menu to access the categories list. The list contains names associated with the AM or FM stations, or SXM channels. Touch a category name to display a list of stations or channels for that category. Touching a station or channel from the list will tune the radio to that station or channel. Storing Radio Station Presets Favorites show in the area at the top of the display.

    ####### HD Radio Technology

    If equipped, HD Radio is a free service with features such as digital quality sound, more stations available on a single frequency such as HD2 and HD3, and display information such as artist and song title.

    From the Now Playing display, touch the HD Radio icon to turn HD on or off.

    Station Access To access HD Radio stations:

    AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), and HD Radio Stations (if equipped) : Touch and hold a preset to store the current station or channel as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite station.

  • Tune the radio to the station. If HD Radio is turned on and the station is broadcasting in HD Radio, the radio will automatically tune to the HD version of the current channel (HD1) after several
  • If the HD Radio signal loses reception while listening to stations HD2 to HD8, the radio mutes until the signal can be recovered or until the station is changed.

    When information is broadcast from a RDS station, the station name or call letters display on the audio screen. Radio text supporting the currently playing broadcast may also appear.

    seconds. The radio will also display icons representing additional channels (HD2, ...HD8), that may be available. When the radio successfully tunes to a HD station, the HD logo will display and digital audio will play.

    HD Radio can be disabled if driving in a weak signal area. Touch HD Radio On/Off to toggle HD Radio reception on and off.

    ####### Satellite Radio SiriusXM Radio Service

  • Touch the display arrows to tune to the previous or next HD Radio station.
  • ####### Radio Data System (RDS)

    There may be a delay before the station starts playing.

    If equipped, vehicles with a valid SiriusXM radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming.

    Page 116

    If equipped, RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. When supported, the radio may:

    The HD Radio station number is indicated next to the HD logo.

    SiriusXM radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, in digital-quality sound. In the U.S., see www.siriusxm.com or call 1-888-601-6296. In Canada, see www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

    HD Radio stations can be saved as favorites. For a list of all stations, see www.hdradio.com. HD Radio Troubleshooting Digital Audio Delay : Wait for the signal to process. This can take several seconds.

    . Group stations by Category (i.e., Program Type) such as Rock, Jazz, Classical, etc.

    . Display text from radio stations that include station name and messages.

    This system relies on receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. It is possible that a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

    When SiriusXM is active, the channel name, number, song title, and artist appear on the display.

    Volume Change, Audio Skip, Echo, Digital Audio Lost : Station signal strength may be

    ########## SiriusXM with 360L

    weak, the station is out of range, or the station may be out of alignment. Verify proper reception on another station.

    SiriusXM with 360L interface has enhanced in-vehicle listening experience for subscribers. The experience now offers more categories and system learned recommendations toward discovering more personalized content.

    If the HD Radio signal weakens while listening to HD1, the radio will automatically switch to the analog version of the radio station.

    #### Audio Players Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices

    lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

    To use the full SiriusXM 360L program, including streaming content and listening recommendations, OnStar Connected Access is required. Connected vehicle services vary by model and require a complete working electrical system, cell reception, and GPS signal. An active connected plan is required.

    ########## SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service

    When using media devices such as USB and mobile devices, consider the source. Untrusted media devices could contain files that affect system operation or performance and should be avoided.

    Page 117

    If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service provides digital radio reception. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the SiriusXM signal for a period of time. Some cellular services may interfere with SXM reception causing loss of signal.

    Reference the SiriusXM user guide for use and subscription information.

    ####### USB Port

    ####### Radio Reception

    Audio stored on a USB device may be listened to.

    Unplug electronic devices from the accessory power outlets if there is interference or static in the radio.

    Depending on your vehicle, it may be equipped with two USB ports in the center console under the armrest and another two on the center stack. These ports are for data and charging. There may also be two USB ports at the rear of the center console and a USB port on each side of the third row seats for charging only.

    ########## FM

    ########## Mobile Device Usage

    FM signals only reach about 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.

    Mobile device usage, such as making or receiving calls, charging, or just having the mobile device on may cause static interference in the radio. Unplug the mobile device or turn it off if this happens.

    |Caution| |---| |To avoid vehicle damage, unplug all accessories and disconnect all accessory cables from the vehicle when not in use. Accessory cables left plugged into the vehicle, unconnected to a device, could be

    (Continued)|

    ####### Multi-Band Antenna

    ########## AM

    The roof antenna may be used for radio, navigation, and OnStar, depending on the equipped options. Keep clear of obstructions for clear reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it is open, reception can also be affected.

    The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static can also occur when things like storms and power

    Page 118

    To play a USB device:

    ########### USB Sound Menu

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |damaged or cause an electrical short if the unconnected end comes in contact with liquids or another power source such as the accessory power outlet.|

  • 1. Connect the USB.
  • 2. Touch Audio from the Home Page.
  • 3. Select USB device.
  • See “Infotainment System Sound Menu” under AM-FM Radio 0 124.

    ########### USB Browse Menu

    Use the following when playing an active USB source:

    When a list of songs, albums, artists, or other types of media displays, the up and down arrows and A-Z appear on the left side. Select A-Z to view a display that will show all letters of the alphabet and select the letter to go to.

    ########## Playing from a USB

    p : Touch to play the current media source. j : Touch to pause playback of the current media source. 7 :

    A USB mass storage device can be connected to the USB port.

    Audio extensions supported by the USB may include:

    Touch the up and down arrows to move the list up and down.

    . MP3 . AAC . OGG . 3GP

    . Touch to seek the beginning of the current or previous track.

    Page 119

    Touch Browse and the following may display:

    . Touch and hold to reverse quickly through playback. Release to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays.

    ########### Playlists:

  • 1. Touch to view the playlists stored on the USB.
  • 2. Touch a playlist to view the list of all songs in that playlist.
  • 3. Touch a song from the list to begin playback.
  • My Media Library

    6 :

    MyMedia is only available when more than one indexed device is connected. It allows access to content from all indexed media sources. MyMedia will show as an available source in the Source page.

    . Touch to seek the next track.

    . Touch and hold to advance quickly through playback. Release to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays.

    Supported playlist extensions are m3u and pls.

    ########### USB MP3 Player and USB Devices

    Shuffle : Touch the shuffle icon to play music in random order.

    The USB MP3 players and USB devices connected must comply with the USB Mass Storage Class specification (USB MSC).

    ########### File System and Naming

  • Touch a song to start playback. Composers:
  • ########### Artists:

  • 1. Touch to view the list of artists stored on the USB.
  • Page 120

  • 2. Touch an artist name to view a list of all albums by the artist.
  • 3. To select a song, touch All Songs or touch an album and then touch a song from the list.
  • File systems supported by the USB may include:

  • 1. Touch to view the composers on the USB.
  • 2. Touch a Composer to view a list of albums by that composer.
  • 3. Touch an album or All Songs to view a list of songs.
  • 4. Touch a song from the list to begin playback.
  • . FAT32

    . NTFS . HFS+ The songs, artists, albums, and genres are taken from the file’s song information and are only displayed if present. The radio displays the file name as the track name if the song information is not available. Storing and Recalling Media Favorites

    ########### Songs:

  • 1. Touch to display a list of all songs on the USB.
  • 2. To begin playback, touch a song from
  • ########### Folders:

  • 1. Touch to view the directories on the USB.
  • 2. Touch a folder to view a list of all files.
  • 3. Touch a file from the list to begin playback.
  • the list. Albums:

    To store media favorites, touch Browse to display a list of media types.

  • 1. Touch to view the albums on the USB.
  • 2. Touch the album to view a list of all songs on the album.
  • 3. Touch a song from the list to begin playback.
  • Page 121

    Touch one of the following Browse options to save a favorite:

    Playlists : Touch H next to any playlist to store the playlist as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite playlist. The first song in the playlist begins to play.

    Podcasts : Touch to view the podcasts on the connected Apple device and get a list of podcast episodes.

    ########### Genres:

    ########### Audiobooks:

    Artists : Touch H next to any artist to store the artist as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite artist. The first song in the artist list begins to play.

  • 1. Touch to view the genres on the USB.
  • 2. Touch a genre to view a list of artists.
  • 3. Touch an artist to view albums by that artist.
  • 4. Touch an album to view songs on the album.
  • 1. Touch to view the audiobooks stored on the Apple device.
  • 2. Touch an audiobook to get a list of chapters.
  • 3. Touch the chapter from the list to begin playback.
  • Songs : Touch H next to any song to store the song as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite song.

    ####### Auxiliary Jack

    Volume and song selection may be controlled by using the infotainment controls or the mobile device. If Bluetooth is selected and no volume is present, check the volume setting on the infotainment system.

    This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack. Possible auxiliary audio sources include:

    Albums : Touch H next to any album to store the album as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite album. The first song in the album list begins to play.

    . Laptop computer

    Page 122

    . Audio music player

    Music can be launched by touching Bluetooth from the recent sources list on the left of the display or by touching the More option and then touching the Bluetooth device.

    This jack is not an audio output. Do not plug headphones into the auxiliary input jack. Set up an auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park).

    Genres : Touch H next to any genre to store the genre as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite genre. The first song of the genre begins to play.

    To play music via Bluetooth:

    Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable from the auxiliary device to the auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, the system can play audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

  • 1. Power on the device, and pair to connect the device.
  • 2. Once paired, touch Audio from the Home Page, then touch Bluetooth from the recent sources list on the left of the display.
  • Podcasts : Touch H next to any podcast to store the podcast as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite podcast. The podcast begins to play.

    If an auxiliary device has already been connected, but a different source is currently active, touch More and then touch AUX to make the source active.

    Audiobooks : Touch H next to any audiobook to store the audiobook as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite audiobook. The first chapter in the audiobook begins to play.

    Bluetooth Sound Menu See “Infotainment System Sound Menu” under AM-FM Radio 0 124. Manage Bluetooth Devices From the Home Page:

    Shuffle and Browse are not available in the AUX source menu.

    ####### Bluetooth Audio

    ########## Media Playback and Mute

    USB playback will be paused if the system is muted. If the steering wheel mute control is pressed again, playback will resume.

    Music may be played from a paired Bluetooth device. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) 0 148 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 147 for help pairing a device.

  • 1. Touch Audio.
  • Page 123

  • 2. Touch Devices to add or delete devices.
  • If the source is changed while in mute, playback resumes and audio will unmute.

    . Local map content updating. Predictive Navigation can also be enabled or disabled at a later time by touching A (Options). While in Options, touch Settings, then Map and Navigation Settings, and then Predictive Navigation. See Settings 0 153. Navigation Map View

    #### Navigation Using the Navigation System

    When touching Bluetooth, the radio may not be able to launch the audio player on the connected device to start playing. When the vehicle is not moving, use the mobile device to begin playback.

    If equipped, launch the Nav application by touching the Nav icon on the Home Page or on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the infotainment display.

    All devices launch audio differently. When selecting Bluetooth as a source, the radio may show as paused on the display. Press play on the device or touch p on the vehicle display to begin playback. Browse functionality will be provided where supported by the Bluetooth device. This media content will not be part of the MyMedia source mode. Some smartphones support sending Bluetooth music information to display on the radio. When the radio receives this information, it will check to see if any is available and display it. For more information about supported Bluetooth features, visit your brand website. See Online Account 0 329 for details. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335.

    When the Nav application is launched for the first time, a product walkthrough is available. Use of the feature requires the Terms and Conditions and the Privacy statement to be confirmed. If available and signed into a profile, it is also suggested to enable and confirm Predictive Navigation.

    ![image 206](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile206.png)

    ########### Predictive Navigation (If Equipped)

    If Predictive Navigation is available and confirmed, this feature learns preferences by remembering where the vehicle has been. It uses the locations and navigation history to personalize routes and results.

    After opening the Nav application for the first time, the application will always open in full map view displaying the vehicle’s current location. When the vehicle is stopped, the search bar will appear along the top of the navigation map view. Manually close the search bar by touching z. When the vehicle is moving, the } (Search) icon will replace the search bar to maximize the full map view.

    Predictive Navigation may learn elements such as:

    . Personalized routes based on preferred streets.

    . Search results that provide best matches at the top of the list.

    . Predictive traffic.

    ########### Map and Navigation Settings

    Destination Card Preferences From the Nav application, set up Home and Work addresses to enable one-touch navigation. To set up Home and Work addresses, touch A and select Settings, then Map and Navigation Settings, and then Destination Card Preferences. Show My Places on Map should be on by default. Select and enter Home and/or Work address and save.

    Page 124

    Make sure to set up preferences before setting a destination and starting active guidance.

    Touch A while in the map view to display options. The following may display:

    ########### Map Preferences

    . 3D Heading Up, 2D Heading Up, 2D North

    Touch to choose between basic map feature configurations:

    . Show on Map

    . Traffic Events (available with OnStar Connected Navigation)

    ########### Map Colors

    . Settings

    . Auto – Touch to automatically change modes based on lighting conditions.

    . Edit Destination (if a route has been set) . Avoid on Route (if a route has been set) Touch Settings to view Map and Navigation Settings. The following may display:

    . Day (Light)

    ![image 207](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile207.png)

    ########### . Night (Dark) 3D Landmark (Default is On) : Touch On or

    Off. When turned on, the system will display all 3D Landmarks on the map depending on the zoom level.

    . Destination Card Preferences

    . Map Preferences

    . Route Preferences

    Page 125

    3D Building (Default is Off) : Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display all of the possible 3D building shapes on the map depending on the zoom level.

    . Navigation Voice Control

    . Traffic Preferences

    . Alert Preferences

    If the vehicle’s system is not signed into a customized profile, the current location icon uses a generic symbol. Once signed into a customized profile, the current location symbol will show a customized icon. See Navigation Symbols 0 134.

    . Fuel Grade Preferences

    Show Terrain in 3D (Default is Off) : If equipped, touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display terrain information on the map in 3D view.

    . Manage History

    . Predictive Navigation: See “Predictive Navigation (If Equipped)” previously in this section.

    Auto-Zoom (Default is On) : Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will automatically adjust the zoom level when the vehicle is approaching a turn. After the

    . About

    To exit a list, touch z in the top right corner to return to the main map view.

    ########### Navigation Voice Control

    provides an overview of the traffic flow using different coded colors. The following options are available for rerouting:

    turn is completed, the system automatically brings the zoom back to the originally set level. If the vehicle is approaching a turn with the next turn occurring shortly after, the Auto-Zoom will remain on until both turns are completed.

    Touch to access the voice control setting display.

    . Auto Reroute to Better Route – The system will automatically reroute if the system detects there is a traffic issue ahead.

    . Navigation Volume – To adjust the volume level, touch the up and down arrows. If the voice guidance prompt is being heard, volume can also be adjusted using the knob on the center stack or the volume switch on the steering wheel. . Navigation Voice Prompt Level during a

    Page 126

    ########### Route Preferences

    . Ask Before Rerouting (Default) – If the system detects there is a traffic issue ahead, it will display a pop-up with details about the issue. Choose to reroute or cancel the alert.

    Touch to access the Route Preferences. The choices are:

    . Preferred Route – Choose from two different route options: Fastest or Eco-Friendly.

    Call. Options available are:

    ‐ Full Prompt (Selected by default)

    . Never Search for Better Route – The system will not check for a better route until one of the above options is selected.

    ‐ Fastest would be the route with the shortest drive time.

    ‐ Tone Only

    ‐ None Traffic Events (If Equipped) This feature provides a list of events that are on the route or nearby. Touch A and

    ‐ Eco-Friendly would be the most fuel-efficient route.

    ########### Alert Preferences

    Set alerts on or off during both inactive and active guidance views. The following alerts may be available:

    . Avoid on Current Route – Choose any of the road features to avoid while on route:

    then select Traffic Events. An OnStar connected Navigation service plan is required.

    ‐ Highways

    . Road Safety Alerts – Touch to display upcoming School Zones.

    ‐ Unpaved Roads

    Page 127

    ‐ Ferries

    . Traffic Camera Alerts Manage History

    ########### Traffic Preferences (If Equipped)

    ‐ Carpool Lanes

    While in Map View, touch A, then Settings and then Map and Navigation Settings to access Traffic Preferences. When Show Traffic on Map is turned on, the feature

    ‐ Toll Roads

    Touch Manage History to access the History options:

    ‐ Tunnels

    ‐ Country Borders

    . Clear Recent Destinations – Touch \ to

    clear the recent destinations.

    ####### Navigation Symbols

    . Clear Search History – Touch \ to clear

    Potential error scenarios and messages include:

    the search history. About

    Following are the most common symbols that may appear in the Nav application.

    . The SD card has initialized for the first time: “Once initialized, this SD card can only be used for navigation in this vehicle.”

    Touch to display software information, such as:

    Page 128

    ![image 208](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile208.png)

    . Telenav Terms and Conditions

    . The SD card is not working properly: “SD card is not functioning properly. (Error Code).” See your dealer if this message appears.

    . Telenav Privacy Statement

    . Navigation Version Maps

    This indicates the vehicle’s current location and direction on the map.

    . The SD card is not paired with the existing system: “This SD card is not valid in this vehicle for navigation. See Owner’s Manual for more detail or visit your dealer. (Error Code).”

    The Navigation application requires a map database to run. It is stored on an SD card that is connected to the infotainment system. If the map database is not available, a missing SD card error message will be displayed.

    ![image 209](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile209.png)

    . The SD card has been removed from the slot: “SD card has been removed. (Error Code).” Make sure the SD card is in the slot. If it was removed and inserted and you still receive an error code, see your dealer.

    ########### SD Card Error Messages

    This is the vehicle’s current location icon during inactive guidance mode. Once a user profile is created, the current location icon can be customized.

    The SD card only works for one unique vehicle. The SD card must pass authentication verification to be used for that specific vehicle. If the SD card has a switch that can be set to read-only mode, ensure that it is in the upward position and not in read-only.

    Touch Confirm to resume after the initialization error message. For the other messages, touch OK to return to the Home Page.

    This icon indicates the vehicle’s current location and direction on the map.

    ########## Waypoints

    The progress bar provides an overview of the route progress and may show traffic and incidents along the way. As the route proceeds, the vehicle icon moves up the bar. Touch the icon to zoom out on the map and view the entire route. Touch it again to return to the previous view. View the drive time by touching the estimated time of arrival (ETA). Current Location

    ![image 210](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile210.png)

    Page 129

    Add up to five waypoints, which are additional destinations, along the route. To add an additional stop or waypoint:

  • 1. From active guidance, touch }.
  • 2. Search for the destination using One-Box, Voice search, or the Quick Category icons.
  • 3. Choose search results Along Route, Nearby, or Near Destination.
  • 4. Choose the desired waypoint and touch Add to Trip or replace the current destination by touching New Destination.
  • The destination pin marks the location of the final destination. Touch the pin to view the destination address or to add it or remove it from the Favorites list. Hide the information by touching the pin one more time. It will automatically time out if no action is taken.

    When the vehicle is parked and not in a Navigation session, the user icon is centered on the map view, highlighting the current location.

    ![image 211](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile211.png)

    Route options are not available for waypoints.

    ####### Destination

    ########### Arriving at a Waypoint

    Receiving Destination Directions from Different Sources

    When approaching a waypoint, the system will display a Destination Arrival view. To continue on to the next destination touch the Drive to message on the infotainment display.

    If equipped, smart Points of Interest (POIs) are places of interest for parking and gas stations.

    Destinations can be received or transferred from different sources to the Nav application for route guidance. If equipped, some of these sources may include:

    ![image 212](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile212.png)

    If the vehicle passes the waypoint or gets out of the current route, the system will automatically reroute back to this waypoint. At the same time, it will show a Drive to icon along with the next waypoint address

    . Navigation from search results.

    . An address from the Contacts list.

    Page 130

    . An application on the smartphone that can send destinations to the vehicle.

    . Use the index finger and thumb to zoom out by pinching and then zoom in by spreading those two fingers on the map.

    ########## Map Information

    so the current waypoint can be skipped and guidance can resume to the next waypoint or destination.

    Road network attributes are contained in the map database for map information. Attributes include information such as street names, street addresses, and turn restrictions. A detailed area includes all major highways, service roads, and residential roads. The detailed areas include Places of Interest (POIs) such as restaurants, airports, banks, hospitals, police stations, gas stations, tourist attractions, and historical monuments.

    ########### Editing a Waypoint

    ########## Map Gestures and Map Scale

    When waypoints are added during active guidance, the system allows a stop to be deleted or the order to be changed. To edit a waypoint:

    Use the following gestures on the infotainment display to adjust the map scale and display options.

    . Pinch to zoom in or out.

  • 1. Touch A.
  • 2. Touch Edit Destinations.
  • . Pan the map.

    . Use two fingers to tilt down and change from 2D to 3D. Tilt up to change back to 2D.

    . Modify destination order by touching and holding the arrow until it is highlighted. Drag to move the waypoint up or down the list.

    If the vehicle does not have an applicable service plan, the map database may not include data for newly constructed areas or map database corrections that are completed after production. The navigation system provides full route guidance in the detailed map areas.

    . Rotate the map. See Using the System 0 121. Mute

    . Delete a waypoint by touching Y. A pop-up will appear to confirm waypoint removal. Once the request is confirmed, the system will remove the address from the destinations list. Touch z on the top right corner so the system can recalculate the route. If there is only one address in the destinations list, the system will disable the move and delete functions. The system will not allow the final destination to be deleted.

    Page 131

    When in active guidance, the audio prompts while using navigation can be muted. Touch the speaker icon on the right side of the upper bar. A slash will appear on the speaker to indicate voice guidance is muted.

    ########## Zoom Control

    The zoom control display is shown on the map view. A few ways to zoom in or out are:

    ########## Active Guidance View

    . Touch + or – to zoom in or out on the map.

    When a destination is chosen and a navigation session is active, the navigation system enters into an Active Guidance View (AGV).

    . Double tap with one finger to zoom in or single tap with two fingers to zoom out on the map.

    2D North Up Route View, the Recenter icon will appear in the middle of the display. Touch either the Recenter icon or the traffic bar again to return to the previous view, either 2D or 3D.

    ########### Map Orientation

    When the vehicle is approaching a turn with the next turn following in quick succession, a quick-turn list appears below the primary turn indicator. An audio prompt will announce the quick turn.

    Touch A on the map to access map orientation settings. Map orientation is 3D Heading Up by default.

    Available settings are:

    ########### Lane Guidance

    Auto-Zoom When approaching a maneuver, the map will automatically zoom in to show both the vehicle icon and the upcoming maneuver to give a better view of the maneuver. Once the maneuver is complete, the system will zoom back to the previous zoom level. Touch A on the map to access Settings, then touch Map Preferences to access Auto-Zoom. This feature can be enabled or disabled. Directions

    . 3D Heading Up (Default): 3D map with

    The map will display the lane information for the upcoming maneuver if it is available.

    the vehicle pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will always head up and the map will rotate around it.

    ########### Junction View

    Page 132

    . 2D Heading Up: 2D map with the vehicle pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will always head up and the map will rotate around it.

    When a vehicle is on the highway and approaching the exit, an image displays the lane that the vehicle must stay in to complete the next maneuver.

    . 2D North Up: 2D map with North pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will shift as the vehicle turns left and right.

    Quick-Turn View

    ![image 213](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile213.png)

    Touch the menu option next to the next turn street name to display Directions.

    Touch the icon to change the map type. The icon and label will also update accordingly.

    Directions displays the turns and directions from the current location to the final destination.

    Depending on the zoom level of the 2D Heading Up and 3D Heading Up maps, the system may automatically switch to the 2D North Up map.

    ########### Editing Directions

    When in AGV, the entire route can be viewed in 2D North Up by touching the traffic bar. The map will zoom out and readjust to display the full route. When in

    Directions can be edited by choosing y, which expands the list to fill the display and enters the Edit Mode. While in Edit Mode, an unwanted route segment can be

    removed from the route by touching Y next to the segment. A pop-up appears to confirm segment removal.

    exit from the current vehicle position, and convenience stops that may be available, such as gas, coffee, food, and lodging.

    This symbol indicates the next guidance maneuver. Touch it to repeat the last spoken guidance instruction.

    ########### Next Maneuver Menu

    ########### Incident Alert (If Equipped)

    When the route segment has been removed, all segments are replaced by an activity indicator while the new route is recalculated. When the recalculation is complete, the activity indicator is replaced with the new route segments.

    Page 133

    When in Active Guidance, the Next Maneuver Turn Arrow, Street Name, and Maneuver Distance are shown in the Next Maneuver at the top of the display overlaying the map. ETA, Distance to Destination, and Traffic Indicator are displayed in a panel pinned on the right of the display.

    During active guidance, if the system determines that there is an incident ahead but there is not a better route, the system will play a tone and show a Quick Notice. This will only show once per incident.

    ########### Highway Exits List

    ########### Incident Reports (If Equipped)

    ![image 214](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile214.png)

    Incident report icons, along with traffic flow data, display on the map during both active and inactive guidance.

    Navigation Next Turn Maneuver Alert If the Navigation application is not open when a near maneuver prompt is given, it is shown as an alert. Touch the alert to go to the main navigation view or touch z to dismiss the alert. Repeat Voice Guidance

    ########### End Route

    Touch Cancel at the top right corner to end active guidance and return to inactive guidance. If active guidance is canceled before the destination has been reached, a pop-up option to Resume Trip will appear.

    Touch C to open the Exit list. This icon displays next to the current street name near the bottom of the display. The icon only appears when on a highway with defined exits.

    ![image 215](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile215.png)

    ########### Resume Trip

    The trip can be resumed if it was canceled by touching the Resume Trip pop-up option.

    While traveling on roads with designated exits, an Exit list may be available. The Exit list displays the exit number, distance to the

    ########## Show POI Icons

  • 3. Touch a saved Navigation favorite to access the edit icon. Touch the edit icon to rename the favorite.
  • 4. Touch Save to store the renamed favorite.
  • If the system has determined that the destination has been reached, either because the arrival view displayed or the destination has been passed, the Resume Trip option will not appear.

    Page 134

    To see the POI categories, touch Options, then touch Show on Map. Up to eight categories of icons can be selected.

    ########### Smart POI Icons on Map (If Equipped)

    ########## Favorites

    ########## Recents

    ![image 216](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile216.png)

    The navigation favorites can have contacts, addresses, or POIs that have been saved through the favorite icon on the details view.

    Touch H to access a list of recent destinations.

    Recenter Position Icon Touch the Recenter Position arrow in the middle of the map view to reset the map to the current location. Last Parked Location The Last Parked Location is the last location the vehicle engine was turned off. That location is displayed in the first row of the Recents list. Touching the last Parked Location shows the Address Details view to either save the address or drive to it. The Last Parked Location can be deleted by entering the Edit display. Once the Last Parked Location is deleted, it no longer appears in the Recents list, unless the vehicle is started at that location again.

    Accessing Favorites In the Nav application, view the Favorites list by touching H in the search bar along the top of the Nav map view. If the search bar is closed, touch } and select H. Saving Favorites

    The smart POI icons such as fuel stations and parking may appear based on time, location, driver search behavior, driving conditions, and vehicle conditions.

    Favorites can be added from a number of the system’s applications. Touch the favorites icon to save content as a favorite.

    Touch a smart POI icon to open the corresponding details:

    . Left side: Name and address of the POI.

    ########### Renaming Navigation Favorites

    . Right side: E + ETE (Estimated Time

  • 1. Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page and touch the System tab.
  • 2. Touch Favorites to access the Manage Favorites option.
  • Enroute.)

    Page 135

    ########### Smart Fuel Station Icons

    Fuel station prices are shown if available for nearby stations when the vehicle is low on fuel.

    ########### Auto Complete

    Navigation capabilities. The system will show an alert when the subscription is expiring and will ask to renew the plan.

    ########### Smart Parking Icons

    Enter a partial location in the field entry box on the search display. Auto complete will attempt to complete the destination based on what is being entered. Touch the suggested item to search.

    When reaching a densely populated destination and the system determines that parking may be limited, the system will attempt to display nearby parking destinations with pricing information, if available.

    Global Positioning System (GPS) If equipped, the position of the vehicle is determined by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals, and map data. At times, other interference such as the satellite condition, road configuration, condition of the vehicle, and/or other circumstances can affect the navigation system's ability to determine the accurate position of the vehicle. The GPS shows the current position of the vehicle using signals sent by GPS satellites. When the vehicle is not receiving signals from the satellites, a symbol appears in the status bar. This system might not be available or interference can occur if any of the following are true:

    Search While in Motion with No Front Seat Passenger Present

    Report an Issue Using POI Details (If Equipped)

    The search display will not allow changes or text input with the keyboard when the vehicle is in motion. As a result, a display showing three rows of the most commonly used categories appears. Touching the search box will activate speech recognition.

    In the POI details page, a POI issue can be reported if the data is not accurate or the address is incorrect. Touch Report an Issue near the bottom of the display to access the issue selection page. Touch one of the predefined issues on the selection page, then touch Send. The system will send the information for analysis.

    Search While in Motion with Front Seat Passenger Present

    If the system detects that the front seat passenger is present with both driver and passenger seat belts buckled, touching the search icon will display an alert message that allows the passenger to search for a destination as if the vehicle were stopped.

    ########### Search

    Touch Search on the infotainment display to open the search display. It has a search field entry box, quick category icon shortcuts, recents icon, favorites icon, and keyboard.

    . Signals are obstructed by tall buildings, trees, large trucks, or a tunnel.

    ########## Connected Navigation

    Page 136

    . Satellites are being repaired or improved.

    Connected Navigation is a subscription service that enables certain capabilities within the navigation system, such as Traffic, Smart Search/Routing, and Predictive

    . The GPS signal is not received.

    . It could take a long time to operate automatic rerouting during high-speed driving.

    For more information if the GPS is not functioning properly, see Problems with Route Guidance 0 141 and If the System Needs Service 0 141.

    . A roof carrier is installed on the vehicle.

    . Tire chains are installed on the vehicle.

    . Automatic rerouting might display a route returning to the set waypoint if heading for a destination without passing through a set waypoint.

    . The tires are replaced or worn.

    ####### Vehicle Positioning

    . The tire pressure for the tires is incorrect.

    . This is the first navigation use after the map data is updated.

    At times, the position of the vehicle on the map could be inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:

    . The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a regulation by time or season or any other regulation which may be given.

    . The 12-volt battery has been disconnected for several days.

    . The road system has changed.

    . The vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is at low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and started repeatedly.

    . Some routes might not be searched.

    Page 137

    . The vehicle is driving on slippery road

    surfaces such as sand, gravel, or snow. . The vehicle is traveling on winding roads

    . The route to the destination might not be shown if there are new roads, if roads have recently changed, or if certain roads are not listed in the map data. See Maps 0 134.

    ####### Problems with Route Guidance

    or long, straight roads.

    . The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large vehicle.

    Inappropriate route guidance can occur under one or more of the following conditions:

    To recalibrate the vehicle's position on the map, park with the vehicle running for two to five minutes, until the vehicle position updates. Make sure the vehicle is parked in a location that is safe and has a clear view of the sky and away from large obstructions.

    . The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.

    . The turn was not made on the road indicated.

    . The vehicle has been transferred by a vehicle carrier or a ferry.

    . Route guidance might not be available when using automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn.

    . The current position calibration is set incorrectly.

    . The vehicle is traveling at high speed.

    . The route might not be changed when using automatic rerouting.

    ####### If the System Needs Service

    . The vehicle changes directions more than once, or the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a parking lot.

    . There is no route guidance when turning at an intersection.

    Page 138

    If the navigation system needs service, see your dealer.

    . The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot, garage, or a lot with a roof.

    . Plural names of places might be announced occasionally.

    ####### Map Data Updates

    If your language supports it, try stating a one-shot command, such as “Directions to address .” Do not include the ZIP code while stating the address during the command. Another example of a one-shot Destination Entry command is, “Directions to Place of Interest at .” If these commands do not work, try saying, “Take me to Place of Interest” or “Find address” and the system will walk you through by asking additional questions.

    detail can become available for areas that previously had limited detail. See Map Data Updates 0 142.

    The map data in the vehicle is the most up-to-date information available when the vehicle was produced. The map data is updated periodically, provided that the map information has changed and the vehicle has a relevant service plan.

    Voice Recognition If equipped, voice recognition allows for hands-free operation within the navigation, audio, phone, and weather applications. This feature can be started by pressing g on the steering wheel or touching g on the infotainment display. However, not all features within these areas are supported by voice commands. Generally, only complex tasks that require multiple manual interactions to complete are supported by voice commands. For example, tasks that take more than one or two touches, such as a song or artist to play from a media device, would be supported by voice commands. Other tasks, like adjusting the volume or seeking up or down, are audio features that are easily performed by touching one or two options, and are not supported by voice commands. In general there are flexible ways to speak commands for completing the tasks.

    See www.gmnavdisc.com for details on ordering, purchasing, and installing a new or replacement SD card. Features are subject to change. For more information on this feature, visit your brand website. See Online Account 0 329 for details.

    ########## Hybrid Speech Recognition

    If equipped, this feature helps distinguish words by using Internet-based information along with the system’s voice recognition database. This allows you to speak more naturally when using voice recognition.

    If the vehicle is equipped with Connected Navigation, which is a subscription service that enables certain features of the navigation system, such as Traffic, Smart Search/Routing, and Predictive Navigation, then the system will download the latest map data from the cloud.

    ########## Using Voice Recognition

    Voice recognition becomes available once the system has been initialized. This begins when the ignition is turned on. Initialization may take a few moments.

    ####### Database Coverage Explanations

    Coverage areas vary with respect to the level of map detail available for any given area. Some areas feature greater levels of detail than others. If this happens, it does not mean there is a problem with the system. As the map data is updated, more

  • 1. Press g on the steering wheel controls to activate voice recognition.
  • 2. The audio system mutes and the system plays a prompt.
  • Page 139

    . Press i on the steering wheel controls to terminate the voice recognition session and show the display where voice recognition was initiated.

    ########### Prompts and Infotainment Displays

  • Clearly speak one of the commands described in this section. A voice recognition system prompt can be interrupted while it is playing by pressing g again.
  • While a voice recognition session is active, there may be corresponding options showing on the displays. A selection can be made by manually touching the option, or by speaking the number for the option to select. Manual interaction in the voice recognition session is permitted. Interaction during a voice session may be completed entirely using voice commands while some manual commands may expedite a task. If a selection is made using a manual control, the voice recognition dialog will progress in the same way as if the selection were made using a voice command. Once the system completes the task, or the session is terminated, the voice recognition dialog stops.

    ########### Natural Language Commands

    Once voice recognition is started, both the infotainment display and instrument cluster show the selections and visual dialog content. These displays can be turned on or off in the Tutorial Mode under Settings 0 153.

    Most languages do not support natural language commands in sentence form. For those languages, use direct commands like the examples shown on the display.

    ########## Helpful Hints for Speaking Commands

    Voice recognition can understand commands that are naturally stated in sentence form or direct commands that state the application and the task.

    There are three voice prompt modes supported:

    . Informative verbal prompts: This type of prompt will provide more information regarding the supported actions.

    For best results:

    . Listen for the prompt before saying a command or reply.

    . Short prompts: This type of prompt will provide simple instructions about what can be stated.

    An example of this type of manual intervention is touching an entry of a displayed number list instead of speaking the number associated with the entry desired.

    . Speak the command naturally, not too fast, not too slow.

    . Auto informative prompts: This type of prompt plays during the first few speech sessions, then automatically switches to the short prompt after some experience has been gained through using the system.

    . Use direct commands without a lot of extra words. For example, “Call at work,” “Play” followed by the artist or song name, or “Tune” followed by the radio station number.

    Page 140

    ########## Canceling Voice Recognition

    . Touch or say “Cancel” or “Exit” to terminate the voice recognition session and show the display where voice recognition was initiated.

    If a command is not spoken, the voice recognition system says a help prompt.

    . Navigation destinations can be made in a single command using keywords. A few examples are: “I want directions to an address,” “I need to find a place of interest or (POI),” or “Find contact.”

    understands that a phone call is requested and will respond with questions until enough details are gathered to make a call. If a cell phone number has been saved with a name and a place, the direct command should include both, for example “Call at work.” Using Voice Recognition for List Options

    If manual selection takes more than 15 seconds, the session terminates and prompts that it has timed out. The display returns to the display where voice recognition was initiated.

    The system responds by requesting more details. For other POIs, say the name of a category like “Restaurants,” “Shopping Malls,” or “Hospitals.”

    ########### The Back Command

    Say “Back” or touch the Back icon on the infotainment display to go to the previous menu.

    . Navigating to a destination outside of the current country takes more than one command. The first command is to tell the system where the navigation will take place, such as an Address, Intersection, POI, or Contact. If Address or Intersection is selected, the second command is to say, “Change Country.” Once the system responds, say the country before saying the rest of the address and/or intersection. If POI is asked for, say “Change Location,” then “Change Country.”

    When a list is displayed, a voice prompt will ask to confirm or select an option from that list.

    If in voice recognition, and “Back” is spoken all the way back to the starting display, and then “Back” is spoken one more time, the voice recognition session will cancel.

    When a display contains a list, there may be options that are available but not displayed. The list on a voice recognition screen functions the same as a list on other displays. Scrolling or flinging can be used to help display other entries from the list.

    ########### Help

    Say “Help” on any voice recognition display and the help prompt for the display is played.

    Manually scrolling or paging the list on a display during a voice recognition session suspends the current voice recognition event and plays the prompt “Please select manually or touch the Back icon on the infotainment display to try again.”

    ########## Voice Recognition for the Radio

    If browsing the audio sources when voice is touched, the voice recognition commands for AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if equipped) are available.

    Page 141

    Direct commands might be more clearly understood by the system. An example of a direct command would be “Call .” Examples of these direct commands are displayed on most of the screens while a voice session is active. If “Phone” or “Phone Commands,” is spoken, the system

    “Switch to AM” : Switch bands to AM and tune to the last AM radio station.

    “Switch to FM” : Switch bands to FM and tune to the last FM radio station.

    Voice Recognition for Audio MyMedia The available voice recognition commands for [browsing] MyMedia are:

    “Play ” : Play music from a specific device identified by name. The device name is the name displayed on the display when the device is first selected as an audio source.

    “Switch to SXM” : Switch bands to SiriusXM and tune to the last SiriusXM channel.

    “Tune to AM” : Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like “nine fifty”). “Tune to FM” : Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like “one oh one point one”). “Tune to AM HD” : Tune to the HD Radio station (if equipped) whose frequency is identified in the command. “Tune to FM HD” : Tune to the HD Radio station (if equipped) whose frequency is identified in the command. “Tune to FM HD

    “Play Artist” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific artist name.

    “Play Chapter” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.

    “Play Artist ” : Begin playback of a specific artist.

    “Play Chapter ” : Begin playback of a specific chapter.

    “Play Album” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific album name.

    “Play Audiobook” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific audiobook.

    “Play Album ” : Begin playback of a specific album.

    “Play Audiobook ” : Begin playback of a specific audiobook.

    “Play Song” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific song name.

    “Play Episode” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.

    “Play Song ” : Begin playback of a specific song, if available.

    Page 142

    “Play Episode ” : Begin playback of a specific episode.

    channel number>” : Tune to the HD Radio station (if equipped) whose frequency and HD channel are identified in the command.

    “Play Genre” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific genre.

    “Play Podcast” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific podcast.

    “Play Genre ” : Begin playback of a specific genre.

    “Tune to SXM ” : Tune to the SiriusXM radio station whose channel number is identified in the command.

    “Play Podcast ” : Begin playback of a specific podcast.

    “Play Playlist” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific playlist name.

    “My Media” : Begin a dialog to enter the desired media content.

    “Play Playlist ” : Begin playback of a specific playlist.

    “Tune to SXM ” : Tune to the SiriusXM radio station whose channel name is identified in the command.

    ########## Voice Recognition for Navigation (If Equipped)

    Similar limits exist for album content. If there are more than 12,000 albums, but fewer than 24,000, the content cannot be accessed directly with one command like, “Play .” The command “Play Album” must first be spoken; the system will then ask for the album name. The reply would be to say the name of the album to play.

    ########### Handling Large Amounts of Media Content

    It is expected that large amounts of media content will be brought into the vehicle. It may be necessary to handle large amounts of media content in a different way than smaller amounts of media. The system may limit the options of voice recognition by not allowing selection of files by voice at the highest level if the number of files exceeds the maximum limit.

    “Navigation” : Begin a dialog to enter specific destination information.

    “Navigation Commands” : Begin a dialog to enter specific destination information. “Address” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific destination address, which includes the entire address consisting of the house number, street name, city, state/province, and country. Do not include the ZIP code. “Place of Interest” : Begin a dialog to enter a destination Place of Interest category or major brand name.

    Once the number of files has exceeded approximately 24,000, there is no support for accessing the songs directly through voice commands. There will still be access to the media content by using commands for playlists, artists, and genres.

    Page 143

    Changes to voice commands due to media content limits are:

    . Files including other individual files of all media types such as songs, audiobook chapters, podcast episodes, and videos.

    The access commands for playlists, artists, and genres are prohibited after the number of this type of media exceeds 12,000.

    . Album type folders including types such

    The name must be precisely spoken. Nicknames or short names for the businesses will not likely be found. Lesser known businesses might have to be located by category, such as fast food, hotels, or banks.

  • as albums and audiobooks.
  • There are no restrictions if the number of files and albums is fewer than 12,000. When the number of files connected to the system is between 12,000 and 24,000, the content cannot be accessed directly with one command like “Play .”

    The system will provide feedback the first time voice recognition is initiated if it has become apparent that any of these limits are reached during a device initializing process.

    “Navigate to Contact” : Begin a dialog to enter a specific destination contact name.

    Voice recognition performance will degrade to some extent based on many factors when adding large amounts of data to recognize. If this is the case, perhaps accessing songs through playlists or artist name would work better.

    The restriction is that the command “Play Song” must be spoken first; the system will then ask for the song name. The reply command would be to say the name of the song to play.

    “Cancel Route” : End route guidance. “Take Me Home” : Create a route to a stored home location.

    ########## Voice Recognition for the Phone

    and allow them to be re-entered. Once the entire number has been entered, the command “Call” will start dialing the number.

    To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:

    “Call ” : Initiate a call to a stored contact. The command may include location if the contact has location numbers stored.

    . Become familiar with the features of the mobile device. Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete duplicate or rarely used entries. If possible, program speed dial or other shortcuts.

    Page 144

    ########## Phone Assistant Voice Recognition

    “Call At Home,” “At Work,” “On Mobile,” or “On Other” : Initiate a call to a stored contact and location at home, at work, on mobile device, or on another phone.

    Press and hold g on the steering wheel controls to pass through and launch Google phone assistant or Siri.

    . Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system.

    For the low radio, whether connected by Bluetooth or phone projection, the only available voice recognition is either Siri (iPhone) or the Google Assistant (Android).

    . Pair mobile device(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all mobile devices. See “Pairing” later in this section.

    “Call ” : Initiate a call to a cell phone number of seven digits, 10 digits, or three digit emergency numbers.

    Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth-capable mobile device with a Hands-Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The infotainment system and voice recognition are used to control the system. The system can be used while the ignition is on or in accessory mode. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all mobile devices support all functions and not all mobile devices work with the Bluetooth system. Visit your brand website for more information about compatible mobile devices. See Online Account 0 329.

    #### Phone Bluetooth (Overview)

    “Pair Phone” : Begin the Bluetooth pairing process. Follow the instructions on the infotainment display.

    “Redial” : Initiate a call to the last dialed number.

    The Bluetooth-capable system can be paired with up to 10 Bluetooth devices and two active Bluetooth devices, allowing:

    “Switch Phone” : Select a different connected cell phone for outgoing calls.

    . Placement and receipt of calls in a hands-free mode.

    “Voice Keypad” : Begin a dialog to enter special numbers like international numbers. The numbers can be entered in groups of digits with each group of digits being repeated back by the system. If the group of digits is not correct, the command “Delete” will remove the last group of digits

    . Sharing of the device’s address book or contact list with the vehicle.

    . The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.

    ########## Controls

    Page 145

    adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls. The volume cannot be lowered beyond a certain level.

    Use the controls on the center stack and the steering wheel to operate the Bluetooth system.

    . Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.

    ####### Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)

    ########### Steering Wheel Controls

    . If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired cell phone that is set to First to Connect. If there is no cell phone set to First to Connect, it will link to the cell phone which was used last. To link to a different paired cell phone, see “Linking to a Different Phone” later in this section.

  • g : Press to answer incoming calls and start voice recognition on your connected Bluetooth mobile device.
  • Pairing A Bluetooth-enabled mobile device must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See the mobile device manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the device. Pairing Information . If no mobile device has been connected,

  • i : Press to end a call, decline a call, or cancel an operation. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call. Infotainment System Controls
  • ########### Pairing a Phone

    For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Overview 0 120.

  • 1. Make sure Bluetooth has been enabled on the cell phone before the pairing process is started.
  • 2. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  • 3. Touch Phones at the top of the infotainment display. There is also a Connect Phones option in the middle of the Phone display which will shortcut to the Phone List menu.
  • 4. Touch Add Phone.
  • the Phone main page on the infotainment display will show the Connect Phone option. Touch this option to connect. Another way to connect is to touch the Phones tab at the top right of the display and then touch Add Phone.

    ########## Audio System

    When using the Bluetooth mobile device system, sound comes through the vehicle's front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. The volume level while on a mobile device call can be adjusted by pressing the steering wheel controls or the volume control on the center stack. The

    Page 146

    . A Bluetooth smartphone with music capability can be paired to the vehicle as a smartphone and a music player at the same time.

    . Up to 10 devices can be paired to the Bluetooth system.

    Cell phones and mobile devices can be added, removed, connected, and disconnected. A sub-menu will display whenever a request is made to add or manage cell phones and mobile devices.

  • 9. If the cell phone prompts to accept connection or allow phone book download, touch Always Accept and Allow. The phone book may not be available if not accepted.
  • 10. Repeat Steps 1−8 to pair additional cell phones.
  • 5. Select the vehicle name shown on the infotainment display from your cell phone’s Bluetooth Settings list.
  • 6. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to confirm the six-digit code showing on the infotainment display and touch Pair. The code on the cell phone and infotainment display will need to be acknowledged for a successful pair.
  • 7. Start the pairing process on the cell phone to be paired to the vehicle. See the cell phone manufacturer's user guide for information on this process. Once the cell phone is paired, it will show under Connected.
  • 8. If the vehicle name does not appear on your cell phone, there are a few ways to start the pairing process over:
  • ########### Secondary Phone

    A cell phone can be enabled as a Secondary Phone by touching the information icon to the right of the paired cell phone name to open the phone settings menu. If a cell phone is enabled as a Secondary Phone, it can connect simultaneously alongside another Bluetooth mobile device. In doing so, the Secondary Phone will be labeled as Incoming Calls. This means the mobile device can only receive calls. The Address Book of a Secondary Phone will not be available and hands-free outgoing calls cannot be placed using this cell phone.

    ########### First to Connect Paired Phones

    If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired cell phone that is set as First to Connect. To enable a paired cell phone as the First to Connect phone:

  • 1. Make sure the cell phone is turned on.
  • 2. Touch Settings, then touch System.
  • 3. Touch Phones to access all paired and all connected cell phones and mobile devices.
  • 4. Touch the information icon or pencil icon to the right of the cell phone to open the cell phone’s settings menu.
  • 5. Touch the First to Connect option, to enable the setting for that device.
  • . Turn the cell phone off and then back on.

    If needed, touch the Secondary Phone while in the Phones list to swap it into the Outgoing and Incoming role. This role makes it possible to place outgoing calls from the Contacts and Recents list.

    . Go back to the beginning of the Phone menus on the infotainment display and restart the pairing process.

    Page 147

    . Reset the cell phone, but this step should be done as a last effort.

    ########### Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

  • Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  • 2. Touch Phones.
  • 3. Touch the new cell phone to link to from the not connected phone list. See “First to Connect Paired Phones” and “Secondary Phone” previously in this section.
  • The Contacts menu accesses the phone book stored in the cell phone.

    ########### 2. Touch Phones. Disconnecting a Connected Phone

    The Recents menu accesses the recents call list from your cell phone.

  • 1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page.
  • 2. Touch Phones.
  • 3. Touch the information icon or the pencil icon next to the connected cell phone or mobile device to show the cell phone’s or mobile device’s information display.
  • 4. Touch Disconnect. Deleting a Paired Phone
  • To make a call using the Contacts menu:

  • 1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page.
  • 2. Touch Contacts.
  • 3. The Contacts list can be searched by using the first character. Touch A-Z on the infotainment display to scroll through the list of names. Touch the name to call.
  • 4. Touch the desired contact number to call. To make a call using the Recents menu:
  • ########## Switching to Handset or Handsfree Mode

    To switch between handset or handsfree mode:

    . While the active call is hands-free, touch the Handset option to switch to the handset mode. The mute icon will not be available or functional while Handset mode is active.

    Page 148

  • 1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  • 2. Touch Phones.
  • 3. Touch the information icon or the pencil icon next to the connected cell phone to display the cell phone’s or mobile device’s information display.
  • 4. Touch Forget Device. Linking to a Different Phone
  • 1. Touch Phone on the Home Page.
  • 2. Touch Recents.
  • 3. Touch the name or number to call. Making a Call Using the Keypad To make a call by dialing the numbers:
  • . While the active call is on the handset, touch the Handset option to switch to the hands-free mode.

    ########## Making a Call Using Contacts and Recent Calls

    Calls can be made through the Bluetooth system using personal cell phone contact information for all cell phones that support the Phone Book feature. Become familiar with the cell phone settings and operation. Verify the cell phone supports this feature.

  • 1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page.
  • 2. Touch Keypad and enter a phone number.
  • 3. Touch # on the infotainment display to start dialing the number.
  • To link to a different cell phone, the new cell phone must be in the vehicle and paired to the Bluetooth system.

  • 1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the phone icon on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the display.
  • Searching Contacts Using the Keypad To search for contacts using the keypad:

    ########## Call Waiting

  • 2. Initiate the second call by selecting from Recents, Contacts, or Keypad.
  • 3. When the second call is active, touch the merge icon to conference the three-way call together.
  • Page 149

    Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

  • 1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page.
  • 2. Touch Keypad and enter partial phone numbers or contact names using the digits on the keypad to search.
  • ########### Accepting a Call

    ########## Ending a Call

    Press g to answer, then touch Switch on the infotainment display.

    . Press i on the steering wheel controls.

    Results will show on the right side of the display. Touch one to place a call.

    . Touch # on the infotainment display, next to a call, to end only that call.

    ########### Declining a Call

    ########## Accepting or Declining a Call

    Press i to decline, then touch Ignore on the infotainment display

    ########## Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones

    When an incoming call is received, the infotainment system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

    The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers during a call. This is used when calling a menu-driven phone system. Use the Keypad to enter the number.

    Switching Between Calls (Call Waiting Calls Only)

    Accepting a Call There are two ways to accept a call:

    To switch between calls, touch Phone on the Home Page to display Call View. While in Call View, touch the call information of the call on hold to change calls.

    Page 150

    ####### Apple CarPlay and Android Auto

    . Press g on the steering wheel controls.

    . Touch Answer on the infotainment

    If equipped, Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay capability may be available through a compatible smartphone. If available, the Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons will change from gray to color on the Home Page of the infotainment display.

    display. Declining a Call There are two ways to decline a call:

    ########## Three-Way Calling

    Three-way calling must be supported on the Bluetooth cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

    . Press i on the steering wheel controls. . Touch Ignore on the infotainment display.

    To start a three-way call while in a current call:

  • In the Call View, touch Add Call to add another call.
  • Press { on the center stack to return to the Home Page.

  • 4. When the phone is first connected to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, agree to the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the phone.
  • 5. Follow the instructions on the phone.
  • To use Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay: For Wired Phone Projection

    ########### For Wireless Phone Projection

  • 1. Download the Android Auto app to your smartphone from the Google Play store. There is no app required for Apple CarPlay.
  • 2. Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the factory-provided phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data port. For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the device’s factory-provided USB cable, which should be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work.
  • 3. When the phone is first connected to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, accept the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the phone.
  • 4. Follow the instructions on the phone.
  • Page 151

    If equipped, verify your phone is wireless compatible by visiting the Google Android Auto or Apple CarPlay support page.

    The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the Home Page will illuminate depending on the smartphone. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon wireless connection. If not, touch the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the Home Page to launch.

  • 1. Download the Android Auto app to your smartphone from the Google Play store. There is no app required for Apple CarPlay.
  • 2. For first time connection, there are two ways to set up wireless projection:
  • . Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the factory-provided phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data port. For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the device’s factory-provided USB cable, which should be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work.

    . Connecting the phone over Bluetooth. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) 0 148 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 147.

  • 3. Make sure wireless is turned on the phone for wireless projection to work.
  • Wireless Carplay and/or Wireless Android Auto may experience occasional service disruption due to outside Wi-Fi interference.

    To disconnect the phones wireless projection:

  • 1. Select Settings from the Home Page.
  • 2. Select Phones
  • 3. Touch 4 or the pencil icon next to the phone to be disconnected.
  • 4. Turn off Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
  • The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the Home Page will illuminate depending on the smartphone. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon USB connection. If not, touch the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the Home Page to launch.

    Press { on the center stack to return to the Home Page.

    To access the menus:

    touch the Apps tab along the top of the display. Use the On/Off toggled to turn off Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

    Features are subject to change. For further information on how to set up Android Auto and Apple CarPlay in the vehicle, visit your brand website. See Online Account 0 329 for details.

  • 1. Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page on the infotainment display.
  • 2. Touch the desired category to display a list of available options.
  • Page 152

  • 3. Touch to select the desired feature setting.
  • 4. Touch the options on the infotainment display to disable or enable a feature.
  • 5. Touch z to go to the top level of the Settings menu.
  • #### Settings

    Android Auto is provided by Google and is subject to Google’s terms and privacy policy. Apple CarPlay is provided by Apple and is subject to Apple’s terms and privacy policy. Data plan rates apply. For Android Auto support and to see if your phone is compatible, see https://support.google.com/ androidauto. For Apple CarPlay support and to see if your phone is compatible, see www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Apple or Google may change or suspend availability at any time. Android Auto, Android, Google, Google Play, and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.; Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.

    Not all vehicles will have all features. Certain settings can be managed in the Owner Center sites when an account is established, and may be modified if other users have accessed the vehicle or created accounts. This may result in changes to the security or functionality of the infotainment system. Some settings may also be transferred to a new vehicle, if equipped. For instructions, in the U.S. see my.chevrolet.com or in Canada see mychevrolet.ca or monchevrolet.ca.

    System The menu may contain the following: Time / Date Allows setting of the clock. Language

    Refer to the User Terms and Privacy Statement for important details. To view, touch the Settings icon on the Home Page of the infotainment display.

    Sets the display language used on the infotainment display. It may also use the selected language for voice recognition and audio feedback.

    Press { on the center stack to exit Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. To enter back into Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, press and hold { on the center stack. Apple CarPlay and Android Auto can be disabled from the infotainment system. To do this, touch Home, Settings, and then

    The settings menu may be organized into four categories. Select the desired category by touching System, Apps, Vehicle, or Personal.

    ########### Phones

    Allows connecting to a different cell phone or mobile device source, disconnect a cell phone or media device, or delete a cell phone or media device.

    on the Home Page, select the System tab, followed by Wi-Fi Networks. Select the appropriate Wi-Fi network, and follow the on-screen prompts.

    ########### Favorites

    ########### Wi-Fi Networks

    Allows adjustment of the infotainment favorite settings.

    Shows connected and available Wi-Fi networks.

    Updates If equipped, the infotainment system can download and install select software updates over a wireless connection. The system will prompt for certain updates to be downloaded and installed. There is also an option to check for updates manually. To manually check for updates, touch Settings on the Home Page, followed by Software Information, and then System Update. Follow the on-screen prompts. The steps to check for, download and install updates may vary by vehicle. Downloading Over-the-Air vehicle software updates requires internet connectivity, which can be accessed through the vehicle’s built-in 4G LTE connection, if equipped and active. If required, data plans are provided by a third party. Optionally, a secure Wi-Fi hotspot such as a compatible mobile device hotspot, home hotspot or public hotspot can be used. Applicable data rates may apply. To connect the infotainment system to a secured mobile device hotspot, home hotspot, or a public hotspot, touch Settings

    Page 153

    If a 4G LTE data package is not active on the vehicle, the infotainment system can be connected to an external protected Wi-Fi network, such as a mobile device or home hotspot, to utilize connected services.

    Download speeds may vary. On most compatible mobile devices, activation of the Wi-Fi hotspot is in the Settings menu under Mobile Network Sharing, Personal Hotspot, Mobile Hotspot or similar. Availability of Over-the-Air software updates varies by vehicle and country. For more information on this feature, see Online Account 0 329 for details. Preferences

    ########### Wi-Fi Hotspot

    Allows adjustment of different Wi-Fi features.

    ########### Privacy

    Allows adjustment of the infotainment privacy settings.

    Allows the infotainment system to disable or enable the download of new updates in the background.

    ########### Display

    Allows adjustment of the infotainment display.

    ########### About

    Shows the infotainment system software information.

    ########### Sounds

    Allows adjustment of the infotainment system sounds.

    ########### Running Applications

    Shows a complete list of applications that are currently running on the infotainment system.

    ########### Voice

    Allows adjustment of the infotainment voice recognition features.

    Seating Position Adjusts different seat settings. Teen Driver See Teen Driver 0 156. Valet Mode

    Page 154

    Phone Adjusts different phone settings. Vehicle The menu may contain the following: Rear Seat Reminder

    ########### Return to Factory Settings

    Allows resetting the infotainment system settings in the vehicle.

    Apps The menu may contain the following: Android Auto

    This will lock the infotainment system and steering wheel controls. It may also limit access to vehicle storage locations, if equipped.

    Allows for a chime and a message when the rear door has been opened before or during operation of the vehicle.

    Allows interacting directly with a mobile device on the infotainment display. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto 0 151.

    Climate and Air Quality Adjusts different climate settings. Collision/Detection Systems

    To enable valet mode:

    ########### Apple CarPlay

  • 1. Enter a four-digit code on the keypad.
  • 2. Select Enter to go to the confirmation screen.
  • 3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
  • This feature allows you to interact directly with your mobile device on the infotainment display. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto 0 151.

    Adjusts different driver assistance system settings.

    Comfort and Convenience Adjusts different comfort and convenience settings. Lighting Adjusts different lighting settings. Power Door Locks Adjusts different door lock settings. Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start Adjusts different remote lock settings.

    Apps Shows app settings and information. Audio Adjusts different audio settings. Climate Adjusts different climate settings. Navigation Adjusts different navigation settings. See Using the Navigation System 0 131.

    Touch Lock or Unlock to lock or unlock the system. Touch Back to go back to the previous menu.

    Page 155

    ########## Personal

    If equipped, this menu allows adjustment of different user profile settings. See “Users” in Using the System 0 121 for information on

    setting up user profiles.

    ########### Vehicle Account

    ########### The PIN is required to:

    The menu may contain the following: Name

    . Set up/Add or remove keys. . Change Teen Driver settings. . Change or clear the Teen Driver PIN.

    View the vehicle account information and to change the account password.

    Edit your user name that will be displayed in the vehicle.

    Delete Profile Remove the profile from the vehicle. Teen Driver

    . Access or delete Report Card data.

    ########### Vehicle Account Information

    Set up/Add keys to activate Teen Driver and assign restrictions to the key:

    View the vehicle account information and to change the account password.

    Any vehicle key can be registered, up to a maximum of eight keys. Label the key to tell it apart from the other keys.

    If equipped, this allows multiple keys to be registered for beginner drivers to encourage safe driving habits. When the vehicle is started with a Teen Driver key, it will automatically activate certain safety systems, allow setting of some features, and limit the use of others. The Report Card will record vehicle data about driving behavior that can be viewed later. When the vehicle is started with a registered key, the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays a message that Teen Driver is active.

    An “unverified user account” pop-up will display until the account information verification process has been completed on the Internet. Check your registered e-mail account for an activation e-mail to complete the verification process.

    ########### For a pushbutton start system:

    Page 156

  • 1. Start the vehicle.
  • 2. For automatic transmissions, the vehicle must be in P (Park). For manual transmissions, the vehicle must be stopped with the parking brake set.
  • 3. From the Settings menu, touch Vehicle and then Teen Driver.
  • 4. Enter the PIN.
  • 5. Place the remote key you wish to register in the transmitter pocket. The key does not need to be the one that started the vehicle. See Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13 for transmitter pocket location.
  • Profile Picture Choose or change your profile picture. Profile Identifiers

    Have the vehicle recognize the identifier you choose.

    ########### To access:

    If the remote key is lost or stolen, see your dealer.

  • 1. Touch Settings on the Home Page, then touch Vehicle, and then Teen Driver.
  • 2. Create a Personal Identification Number (PIN) by choosing a four-digit PIN. Re-enter the PIN to confirm. To change the PIN, touch Change PIN.
  • Security Have your profile secured with a PIN. Vehicle Name Edit the vehicle name.

    systems, touch Set Audio Volume Limit to choose the maximum allowable audio volume level.

  • 2. For automatic transmissions, the vehicle must be in P (Park). For manual transmissions, the vehicle must be stopped with the parking brake set.
  • 3. From the Settings menu, touch Vehicle and then Teen Driver.
  • 4. Enter the PIN.
  • 5. Touch Setup Keys or Add/Remove Teen Driver Keys. The system displays instructions for registering or unregistering a key. A confirmation message displays.
  • From the Teen Driver menu, touch Setup Keys or Add/Remove Teen Driver Keys.
  • . If the remote key has not previously been registered, the option to add the key displays. Touch Add and a confirmation message displays. Teen Driver restrictions will be applied whenever this remote key is used to operate the vehicle.

    Set Audio Volume Limit : Use the arrows to choose the maximum allowable level for the audio volume.

    Teen Driver Speed Limiter : Limits the maximum speed of the vehicle. When the speed limiter is turned on and the vehicle is started with a Teen Driver key, the DIC displays a message that the top speed is limited.

    Page 157

    . If the remote key has already been registered, the option to remove the key displays. If Remove is touched, the remote key is no longer registered. A confirmation message displays, and Teen Driver restrictions will not be applied if this remote key is used to operate the vehicle.

    On certain vehicles, when the Speed Limiter is turned ON, the vehicle’s maximum acceleration will be limited. The DIC will display a message that the acceleration is limited.

    Manage Settings or Teen Driver Settings Depending on the options of your vehicle, the following menu items may be displayed: Buckle to Drive : When turned ON, Buckle to Drive prevents the driver from shifting out of P (Park) for a period of time after the brake pedal is pressed if the driver, or on some vehicles the detected passenger, has not buckled their seat belt. On some vehicles, Buckle to Drive is always ON when Teen Driver is active and is not configurable. Audio Volume Limit : Allows a maximum audio volume to be set. Turn the audio volume limit on or off. Use the arrows to choose the maximum allowable level for the audio volume. On some infotainment

    In vehicles with a pushbutton start system, if a Teen Driver and a non-Teen Driver key are both present at start up, the vehicle will recognize the non-Teen Driver key to start the vehicle. The Teen Driver settings will not be active.

    Teen Driver Speed Warning : Displays a warning in the DIC when exceeding a selectable speed. Turn the speed warning on or off and choose the desired speed warning level. The speed warning does not limit the speed of the vehicle. On some infotainment systems, touch Set Teen Driver Speed Warning to set the warning speed.

    ########### For a keyed ignition system:

  • Start the vehicle.
  • . The gap setting for Adaptive Cruise Control and alert timing for Forward Collision Alert, if equipped, cannot be changed.

    The Report Card data is collected from the time Teen Driver is activated or the last time the Report Card was reset. The following items may be recorded:

    Set Teen Driver Speed Warning : Choose the desired speed warning level. The speed warning does not limit the speed of the vehicle.

    . When trying to change a safety feature that is not configurable in Teen Driver, the feature may be grayed out or removed from the infotainment menu, or the DIC will display a message indicating that Teen Driver is active and the action is not available.

    . Distance Driven – the total distance driven.

    SiriusXM Explicit Content Filter : Allows the SiriusXM Explicit Content Filter to be turned ON or OFF. When ON, the teen driver will not be able to listen to SiriusXM stations that contain explicit content, and the Explicit Content Filter selection in the Audio Settings will be unavailable for change.

    . Maximum Speed – the maximum vehicle speed detected.

    . Overspeed Warnings – the number of times the speed warning setting was exceeded.

    . Super Cruise, if equipped, is not available. . Enhanced Low Fuel Warning (if equipped) – When the vehicle is low on fuel, the low fuel light on the instrument cluster flashes and the DIC low fuel warning cannot be dismissed.

    . Wide Open Throttle – the number of times the accelerator pedal was pressed nearly all the way down.

    ########### When Teen Driver is Active:

    Page 158

    . If equipped, the radio will mute when the

    driver seat belt, and in some vehicles the front passenger seat belt, is not buckled. The audio from any device paired to the vehicle will also be muted.

    . Forward Collision Alerts (if equipped) – the number of times the driver was notified when approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly and at potential risk for a crash.

    . Do not tow a trailer if equipped with

    . An object placed on the front passenger seat, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, could cause the passenger sensing system to falsely sense an unbuckled front passenger and mute the radio. If this happens, remove the object from the seat. See Passenger Sensing System

    Automatic Emergency Braking. Report Card

    . Forward Automatic Braking, also called Automatic Emergency Braking (if equipped) – the number of times the vehicle detected that a forward collision was imminent and applied the brakes.

    The vehicle owner must secure the driver’s consent to record certain vehicle data when the vehicle is driven with a registered Teen Driver key. There is one Report Card per vehicle. Data is only recorded when a registered Teen Driver key is used to operate the vehicle.

    . Reverse Automatic Braking (if equipped) – the number of times the vehicle detected that a rearward collision was imminent and applied the brakes.

  • 0 58.
  • . Some safety systems, such as Automatic Emergency Braking, if equipped, cannot be turned off.

    . Traction Control – the number of times the Traction Control System activated to reduce wheel spin or loss of traction.

    . Touch Clear PIN and All Teen Driver Keys from the Teen Driver menu. This will also unregister any Teen Driver keys and delete the PIN.

    accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

    . Stability Control – the number of events which required the use of electronic stability control.

    Forgotten PIN See your dealer to reset the PIN.

    ![image 217](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile217.png)

    Page 159

    . Antilock Braking System Active – The number of Antilock Brake System activations.

    #### Trademarks and License Agreements FCC Information See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335.

    . Tailgating Alerts (if equipped)– the number of times the driver was alerted for following a vehicle ahead too closely.

    If you decide to continue service after your trial, your selected subscription plan will automatically renew thereafter. You will be charged at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. Please see the SiriusXM Customer Agreement at siriusxm.com for complete terms and how to cancel, which includes calling SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. All fees and programming are subject to change.

    ########### Report Card Data

    ![image 218](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile218.png)

    Cumulative Data is saved for all trips until the Report Card is reset or until the maximum count is exceeded. If the maximum count is exceeded for a Report Card line item, that item will no longer be updated in the Report Card until it is reset. Each item will report a maximum of 1,000 counts. The distance driven will report a maximum of 64 374 km (40,000 mi).

    "Made for iPod," and "Made for iPhone," mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this

    Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.

    To delete Report Card data, do one of the following:

    . From the Report Card display, touch Reset.

    General Requirements:

    ########### Bose

    In Canada: Some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

  • 1. A License Agreement from SiriusXM is required for any product that incorporates SiriusXM Technology and/or for use of any of the SiriusXM marks to be manufactured, distributed, or marketed in the SiriusXM Service Area.
  • 2. For products to be distributed, marketed, and/or sold in Canada, a separate agreement is required with Canadian Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as SiriusXM Canada).
  • Bose AudioPilot and Bose Centerpoint surround are registered trademarks of Bose Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

    Explicit Language Notice: Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying SiriusXM:

    Page 160

    ########### HD Radio Technology

    ![image 219](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile219.png)

    . USA Customers — See www.siriusxm.com

    or call 1-888-601–6296. . Canada Customers — See

    HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

    www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

    ![image 220](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile220.png)

    It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SiriusXM Satellite Radio System or that support the SiriusXM website, the Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBER voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

    ########### Bluetooth

    The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

    TouchSense Technology and TouchSense System 1000 Series Licensed from Immersion Corporation. TouchSense System 1000 protected under one or more of the U.S. Patents at the following address www.immersion.com/patent-marking.html and other patents pending.

    ########### Java

    Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

    ########## Schedule I: Gracenote EULA

    OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

    Gracenote Terms of Use This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this application to do disc or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, "Gracenote Servers") and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device. This application or device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE

    ![image 221](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile221.png)

    You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

    Page 161

    Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information see www.gracenote.com.

    Music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote may apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.

    The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

    LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTPS://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

    © 2014. Gracenote, Inc. All Rights Reserved. MPEG4–AVC (H.264)

    The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you "AS IS." Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

    THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTPS://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

    MPEG4–Visual

    USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES.

    ########### MP3

    MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

    ########### WMV/WMA

    GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

    This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and under a license from Microsoft Licensing, GP. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft Corporation and/or Microsoft Licensing, GP as applicable.

    ########### VC-1

    THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER

    ########## Map End User License Agreement END USER TERMS

    guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.

    Page 162

    ########### TERMS AND CONDITIONS

    Personal Use Only: You agree to use this Data for the solely personal, noncommercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. You may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if you retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement. Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof.

    The Map Data SD card (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms (this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and HERE North America, LLC (“HERE”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.

    ########### Warning

    This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used, and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.

    The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®.

    ########### No Warranty

    This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. HERE and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations, or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free.

    HERE holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.

    ########### Restrictions

    © United States Postal Service 2013. Prices are not established, controlled, or approved by the United States Postal Service. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.

    Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by HERE and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route

    written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. Governing Law The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes, claims, and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. Government End Users

    POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories, and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you.

    Disclaimer of Warranty THE DATABASE IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND HARMAN (AND THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY HARMAN (OR ANY OF THEIR LICENSORS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS) SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THIS AGREEMENT. Disclaimer of Liability HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR

    ########### Export Control

    If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and be treated in accordance with such Notice:

    You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between HERE (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all

    Page 163

    The product you have purchased ("Product") contains Software (Runtime Configuration No. 505962; "Software") which is distributed by or on behalf of the Product manufacturer "Manufacturer") under license from Software Systems Co. ("QSSC"). You may only use the Software in the Product and in compliance with the license terms below.

    the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.

    ![image 222](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile222.png)

    ########### Unicode

    Copyright © 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in https://www.unicode.org/ copyright.html.

    Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, QSSC hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software in the Product for the purpose intended by the Manufacturer. If permitted by the Manufacturer, or by applicable law, you may make one backup copy of the Software as part of the Product software. QSSC and its licensors reserve all license+C31 rights not expressly granted herein, and retain all right, title and interest in and to all copies of the Software, including all intellectual property rights therein. Unless required by applicable law you may not reproduce, distribute or transfer, or de-compile, disassemble or otherwise attempt to unbundle, reverse engineer, modify or create derivative works of, the Software. You agree: (1) not to remove, cover or alter any proprietary notices, labels or marks in or on the Software, and to ensure that all copies bear any notice

    NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE North America, LLC CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS:

    ########### Free Type Project

    Portions of this software are copyright © 2010 The FreeType Project (https://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

    ########### Open Source SW

    Further information concerning the OSS licenses is shown in the infotainment display.

    425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.

    This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided.

    ########### QNX

    Portions of this software are copyright © 2008-2011, QNX Software Systems. All rights reserved.

    © 2014 HERE North America, LLC. All rights reserved.

    ########### Part C – EULA

    If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein,

    Page 164

    Copyright © 2011, Software Systems GmbH & Co. KG. All Rights Reserved.

    ########### Linotype

    CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER ARISING AS A RESULT OF THIS LICENSE OR OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, PRODUCT FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES), EVEN IF QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

    contained on the original; and (2) not to export the Product or the Software in contravention of applicable export control laws.

    Helvetica is a trademark of Linotype Corp. registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions in the name of Linotype Corp. or its licensee Linotype GmbH.

    EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, QSSC AND ITS LICENSORS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY WARRANTIES OR OTHER PROVISIONS OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) THAT DIFFER FROM THIS LICENSE ARE OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) ALONE AND NOT BY QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS. YOU ASSUME ANY RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS LICENSE.

    Usage in text form of each of the Licensed Trademarks is:

    The trademark attribution requirements for the Licensed Trademarks may be viewed at https://www.linotype.com/2061-19414/ trademarks.html. END USER NOTICE The marks of companies displayed by this product to indicate business locations are the marks of their respective owners. The use of such marks in this product does not imply any sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such companies of this product.

    ########### WMA

    This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

    For more information on the Software, including any open source software license terms (and available source code) as well as copyright attributions applicable to the Runtime Configuration indicated above, please contact the Manufacturer or contact QSSC at 175 Terence Matthews Crescent, Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2M 1W8 (licensing@qnx.com).

    EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW (SUCH AS IN THE CASE OF DELIBERATE OR GROSSLY NEGLIGENT ACTS), IN NO EVENT SHALL QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE),

    Climate Controls

    #### Climate Control Systems

    ########## Climate Control Systems

    Climate Control Systems ............... 167 Automatic Climate Control System .... 169

    ########## Air Vents

    Air Vents ..... ...... ...... ..... ...... .. 172 Maintenance

    Page 165

    Passenger Compartment Air Filter .... . 172 Service ................................. 172

    ![image 223](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile223.png)

    Air Delivery Mode Controls : Press z, Y, or 6 to change the direction of the airflow. The indicator light in the button will turn on. Any combination of the three buttons can be selected. The indicator light in the button will turn on.

    A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. If the climate control system is turned off or the outside temperature falls below freezing, the air conditioner will not run.

    The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system.

  • 1. Temperature Control
  • 2. Air Delivery Mode Controls
  • 3. MAX Defrost
  • 4. Rear Window Defogger
  • 5. Fan Control
  • 6. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped)
  • 7. Recirculation
  • 8. A/C (Air Conditioning)
  • @ : Press to turn on recirculation. An

    indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle or to reduce the entry of outside air and odors.

    To change the current mode, select one or more of the following:

    z : Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield.

    Rear Window Defogger K : Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.

    Y : Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

    ] : Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed or turn the fan off.

    6 : Air is directed to the floor outlets. 0 MAX : Air is directed to the windshield and the fan runs at a higher speed. Fog or frost is cleared from the windshield more quickly. When the button is pressed again, the system returns to the previous mode setting.

    Page 166

    The defogger can be turned off by turning the vehicle off or to accessory mode.

    Temperature Control : Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature.

    If the vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors, they turn on when the rear window defogger button is on and help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror.

    For best results, clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.

    See Heated Mirrors 0 32.

    |Caution| |---| |Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the front windshield and rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger grid and affect the radio's ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    ####### Automatic Climate Control System

    ![image 224](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile224.png)

    M or L : If equipped, press M or L to heat the driver or passenger seat. See Heated Front Seats 0 41.

    ########### Afterblow Feature

    If equipped, under certain conditions, the fan may stay on or may turn on and off several times after you turn off and lock the vehicle. This is normal.

  • 6. Fan Controls
  • 7. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped)
  • 8. Air Delivery Mode Controls
  • 9. A/C (Air Conditioning)
  • 10. Temperature Controls
  • The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system.

  • 1. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
  • 2. ON/OFF (Power)
  • Page 167

  • 3. MAX Defrost
  • 4. Rear Window Defogger
  • 5. Recirculation
  • Y : Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

    ########## Automatic Operation

    ON/OFF : Press to turn the fan off or on. When off, no air will flow into the vehicle. Turning the fan on, pressing any other button, or turning a knob will turn the system back on using the current setting.

    The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature.

    6 : Air is directed to the floor outlets. 0 MAX : Air is directed to the windshield and the fan runs at a higher speed. Fog or frost is cleared from the windshield more quickly. When the button is pressed again, the system returns to the previous mode setting.

    9 : Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan speed setting appears on the main display. Pressing either button cancels automatic fan control and the fan is controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

    When AUTO is lit, all four functions operate automatically. Each function can also be manually set and the selected setting is displayed.

    Functions not manually set will continue to be automatically controlled, even if the AUTO indicator is not lit. For automatic operation:

    For best results, clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.

    Air Delivery Mode Controls : Press any combination of z, Y, or 6 to change the direction of the airflow. The indicator light in the button will turn on. The current mode appears in the display screen.

    A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. If the climate control system is turned off or the outside temperature falls below freezing, the air conditioner will not run.

  • 1. Press AUTO.
  • 2. Set the temperature, allow the system time to stabilize, and adjust the temperature as needed.
  • Pressing A/C cancels automatic air conditioning and turns off the air conditioner. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation and the air conditioner runs automatically as needed. When the indicator light is on, the air conditioner runs automatically to cool the air inside the vehicle or to dry the air needed to defog the windshield faster.

    Pressing any of the three buttons cancels automatic air delivery control and the direction of the airflow is controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

    ########## Manual Operation

    Page 168

    In addition to the controls on the center stack; the fan, air delivery mode, temperature, and other climate settings can be controlled by touching CLIMATE on the infotainment Home Page or the climate button in the application tray.

    To change the current mode, select one or more of the following:

    z : Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield.

    @ : Press to turn on recirculation. An

    To turn Auto Rear Defog off or on, select Settings > Climate and Air Quality > Auto Rear Defog > Select ON or OFF.

    Remote Start Climate Control Operation (If Equipped) : If the vehicle is equipped with

    indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle or to reduce the entry of outside air and odors.

    the remote start feature, the climate control system may run when the vehicle is started remotely. The system uses the driver’s previous settings to heat or cool the inside of the vehicle. The rear defog may come on during remote start based on cold ambient conditions. If the vehicle has heated seats, they may come on during a remote start. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 19 and Heated Front Seats 0 41.

    When auto rear defog is selected, the rear window defogger turns on automatically when the interior temperature is cold and the outside temperature is about 5 °C (41 °F) and below. The Auto Rear Defogger turns off automatically.

    Auto Defog : The climate control system may have a sensor to automatically detect high humidity inside the vehicle. When high humidity is detected, the climate control system may adjust to outside air supply and turn on the air conditioner. The fan speed may slightly increase to help prevent fogging. If the climate control system does not detect possible window fogging, it returns to normal operation.

    If the vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors, they turn on when the rear window defogger button is on and help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors 0 32

    ########## Sensors

    The solar sensor on top of the instrument panel near the windshield monitors the solar heat. The climate control system uses the sensor information to adjust the temperature, fan speed, recirculation, and air delivery mode for best comfort.

    To turn Auto Defog off or on, select Settings > Climate and Air Quality > Auto Defog > Select ON or OFF.

    |Caution| |---| |Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the front windshield and rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger grid and affect the radio's ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Rear Window Defogger K : Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on. The defogger only works when the vehicle is on.

    Page 169

    Do not cover the sensor; otherwise the automatic climate control system may not work properly.

    ########### Afterblow Feature

    If equipped, under certain conditions, the fan may stay on or may turn on and off several times after you turn off and lock the vehicle. This is normal.

    The defogger can be turned off by turning the vehicle off or to accessory mode.

    M or L : If equipped, press M or L to heat the driver or passenger seat. See Heated Front Seats 0 41.

    #### Air Vents

    serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation.

    |Caution| |---| |Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Use the louvers located on the air vents to change the direction of the airflow.

    To open or close off the airflow:

    . Move slider knobs away from the

    During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns.

    occupant for shut off closing. Operation Tips

    . Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle.

    #### Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter

    . Clear snow off the hood to improve visibility and help decrease moisture drawn into the vehicle, which may improve long term system performance.

    The air conditioning system requires periodic maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 315.

    Page 170

    The filter reduces dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle. The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance.

    |Caution| |---| |Damage caused by improper refrigerant usage could lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Refrigerant systems should only be serviced by qualified personnel. Always use the correct refrigerant.|

    . Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively.

    . Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.

    See Maintenance Schedule 0 315. See your dealer regarding replacement of the filter. Service All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be

    . Do not attach any devices to the air vent slats. This restricts airflow and may cause damage to the air vents.

    Driving and Operating

    ########## Cruise Control

    Engine Heater .... . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . 191 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) .... . . . 192 Shifting Into Park ...................... 192 Shifting out of Park .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Parking over Things That Burn .... . . . . 194 Extended Parking ...................... 194

    Cruise Control ......................... 203 Adaptive Cruise Control (Camera) .... . 205

    ########## Driving Information

    Driver Assistance Systems Driver Assistance Systems .... . . . . . . . . . 214 Assistance Systems for Parking or

    Driver Behavior ........................ 174 Driving Environment ................... 174 Vehicle Design ......................... 174 Driving for Better Fuel Economy .... . . . 174 Distracted Driving ...................... 175 Defensive Driving ...................... 175 Impaired Driving ....................... 175 Control of a Vehicle .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Braking ................................ 176 Steering ............................... 176 Off-Road Recovery .... . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. 177 Loss of Control ......................... 177 Driving on Wet Roads .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Hill and Mountain Roads .... . . . . . . . . . . 178 Winter Driving ......................... 179 If the Vehicle Is Stuck ..... . .. . . .. . .. . . 180 Vehicle Load Limits .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

    ########## Engine Exhaust

    Backing .............................. 215 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) .............. 215 Park Assist ............................. 216 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

    Engine Exhaust ........................ 194 Running the Vehicle While Parked .... . 194

    Page 171

    ########## Automatic Transmission

    System ............................... 217 Assistance Systems for Driving ......... 217 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

    Automatic Transmission .... . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Manual Mode ......................... 196

    System ............................... 217 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) ... 219 Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

    ########## Drive Systems

    All-Wheel Drive ........................ 197 Brakes

    System .............................. 220 Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) ........... 222 Lane Change Alert (LCA) .... .. . . . . . . .. . 222 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) .... . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

    Electric Brake Boost .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Antilock Brake System (ABS) .... . . . . . . 198 Electric Parking Brake .................. 198 Brake Assist ........................... 199 Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................. 200

    ########## Starting and Operating

    ########## Fuel

    New Vehicle Break-In ......... ......... 184 Ignition Positions (Key Access) .... . . . . 184 Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) .... . 186 Starting the Engine .................... 187 Stop/Start System ..................... 189 Winter Cover .......................... 189

    Top Tier Fuel .......................... 226 Recommended Fuel .................... 226 Prohibited Fuels ....................... 226 Fuels in Foreign Countries .... . . . . . . . . . 227 Fuel Additives .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... . 227 Filling the Tank ........................ 227 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .... . . . 228

    ########## Ride Control Systems

    Traction Control/Electronic Stability

    Control .............................. 200 Driver Mode Control .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

    #### Driving Information Driver Behavior

    Trailer Towing General Towing Information ........... 228 Driving Characteristics and

    such as on curves, slippery roads, or hilly terrain. Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden hazards.

    Page 172

    Towing Tips ...... .... .... .... .... ... 229 Trailer Towing ......................... 232 Towing Equipment .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

    ####### Vehicle Design

    Driving is an important responsibility. Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the vehicle's design all affect how well a vehicle performs.

    Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This is because they have a higher ground clearance and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than passenger cars. While these design characteristics provide the driver with a better view of the road, these vehicles do have a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles. A utility vehicle does not handle the same as a vehicle with a lower center of gravity, like a car, in similar situations.

    ########## Conversions and Add-Ons

    Add-On Electrical Equipment .... ... .. .. 237

    Being aware of these factors can help in understanding how the vehicle handles and what can be done to avoid many types of crashes, including a rollover crash.

    Most serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use of seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. In addition, avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt turns, impaired driving, and aggressive driving can help make trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash.

    Safe driver behavior and understanding of the environment can help avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including utility vehicles.

    ####### Driving for Better Fuel Economy

    ####### Driving Environment

    Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

    Be prepared for driving in inclement weather, at night, or during other times where visibility or traction may be limited,

    . Set the climate controls to the desired temperature after the engine is started, or turn them off when not required.

    . On AWD vehicles, see Driver Mode Control 0 202.

    To avoid distracted driving, keep your eyes on the road, keep your hands on the steering wheel, and focus your attention on driving.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.|

    Page 173

    . Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

    . Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. . Avoid idling the engine for long periods

    . Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.

    of time.

    . When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control.

    Refer to the infotainment section for more information on using that system and the navigation system, if equipped, including pairing and using a cell phone.

    . Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.

    . Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.

    . Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.

    ####### Defensive Driving

    . Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

    . Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.

    . Combine several trips into a single trip.

    Defensive driving means “always expect the unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to wear the seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 45.

    . Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.

    . Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

    . Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they may do and be ready.

    . Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.

    Page 174

    ####### Distracted Driving

    Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area.

    . Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.

    . Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.

    . Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.

    . Focus on the task of driving. Impaired Driving

    . Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone.

    Death and injury associated with impaired driving is a global tragedy.

    Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Drinking alcohol or taking drugs and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol or drugs. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking or taking drugs.

    Do not drive while under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or ride with a driver who has been drinking or is impaired by drugs. Find alternate transportation home; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will remain sober.|

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |over other objects such as lane dividers and speed bumps. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:

    . Keep enough distance between you and

    ![image 225](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile225.png)

    the vehicle in front of you. . Avoid needless heavy braking.

    Page 175

    . Keep pace with traffic.

    If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. Doing so could make the pedal harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

    ####### Control of a Vehicle

    Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.

    Electric Power Steering

    Steering

    The vehicle has electric power steering. It does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required.

    ####### Braking

    |Caution| |---| |To avoid damage to the steering system, do not drive over curbs, parking barriers, or similar objects at speeds greater than 3 km/h (1 mph). Use care when driving

    (Continued)|

    Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.

    If power steering assist is lost due to a system malfunction, the vehicle can be steered, but may require increased effort.

    ####### Off-Road Recovery

    ####### Loss of Control Skidding

    If the steering wheel is turned as far as it can turn and is held with force in that position for an extended period of time, power steering assist may be reduced.

    ![image 226](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile226.png)

    There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:

    Page 176

    See your dealer if there is a problem. Curve Tips

    . Braking Skid — wheels are not rolling.

    . Take curves at a reasonable speed.

    . Steering or Cornering Skid — too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.

    . Reduce speed before entering a curve.

    . Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve.

    . Acceleration Skid — too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

    . Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway.

    Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.

    The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips:

    ########## Steering in Emergencies

    . There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking.

  • 1. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement.
  • 2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
  • 3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
  • If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:

    . Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.

    . Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to go. The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

    . The Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.

    Page 177

    . Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize

    ########## Other Rainy Weather Tips

    warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.

    Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.|

    Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:

    . Allow extra following distance.

    . Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.

    . Pass with caution.

    . Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

    . Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

    Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.

    . Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires 0 276.

    ####### Driving on Wet Roads

    . Turn off cruise control.

    . Activate All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mode. See

    Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.

    Page 178

    ####### Driver Mode Control 0 202. Hill and Mountain Roads

    ########## Hydroplaning

    Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

    Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

    |{ Warning| |---| |Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

    (Continued)|

    . Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

    . Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.

    There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

    . Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills.

    . Select All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode. See Driver Mode Control 0 202 and All-Wheel Drive 0 197.

    . The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops, but the brakes should be applied sooner than when on dry pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) 0 198.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Using the brakes to slow the vehicle on a long downhill slope can cause brake overheating, can reduce brake performance, and could result in a loss of braking. Shift the transmission to a lower gear to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.|

    ####### Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice

    . Allow greater following distance and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.

    |Caution| |---|

    Page 179

    |To avoid damage to the wheels and brake components, always clear snow and ice from inside the wheels and underneath the vehicle before driving.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. This can cause overheating of the brakes and loss of steering assist. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear.|

    . Turn off cruise control.

    Snow or ice between the tires and the road creates less traction or grip, so drive carefully. Wet ice can occur at about 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rain begins to fall. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated.

    . Select All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode for vehicles equipped with AWD. Select Snow/Ice Mode for FWD only vehicles. See Driver Mode Control 0 202 and All-Wheel Drive 0 197.

    . Drive at speeds that keep the vehicle in its own lane. Do not swing wide or cross the center line.

    ########## Cold Weather Mode

    ########### For Slippery Road Driving:

    . Accelerate gently. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick.

    In very low temperatures, a cold weather message may display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The engine speed, transmission shift patterns, and cabin fan speed may operate differently to enable the vehicle to warm up quicker. You can manually override the cabin fan speed in cold weather mode.

    . Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (e.g., stalled car, crash).

    . Pay attention to special road signs (e.g., falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

    . Turn on Traction Control. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 200.

    ########## Blizzard Conditions

    If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method. See

    |Warning (Continued)| |---|

    Page 180

    |. Adjust the climate control system to circulate the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See “Climate Control Systems.”

    For more information about CO, see Engine Exhaust 0 194.|

    Stop the vehicle in a safe place and signal for help. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program

    Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 200.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56 km/h (35 mph).|

  • 0 330. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
  • . Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

    . Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

    To save fuel, run the engine for short periods to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and partially close the window. Moving about to keep warm also helps.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

    If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

    . Clear snow from the base of the vehicle, especially any blocking the exhaust pipe.

    . Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the vehicle side that is away from the wind, to bring in fresh air.

    . Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.

    (Continued)|

    If it takes time for help to arrive, when running the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible, to save fuel.

    For All-Wheel Drive (AWD), select Off-Road or AWD mode. See Driver Mode Control 0 202 and All-Wheel Drive 0 197.

    ########## Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out

    Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a low forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting,

    ####### If the Vehicle Is Stuck

    Page 181

    Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

    and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Transporting a Disabled Vehicle 0 301. Vehicle Load Limits It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle may show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.

    occupant seating positions (1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (2) in kilograms and pounds.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping performance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle.|

    The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (3) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires 0 276 and Tire Pressure 0 282.

    Tire and Loading Information Label

    There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It may show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

    ![image 227](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile227.png)

    ########### “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit–

  • 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s placard.
  • 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
  • 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause

    (Continued)|

    Example Label

    A vehicle-specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The tire and loading information label shows the number of

  • 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
  • Page 182

  • 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
  • 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.”
  • ![image 228](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile228.png)

    ![image 229](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile229.png)

    ########### Example 1

    ########### Example 2

  • 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1
  • = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).

  • 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).
  • 3. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight
  • 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2
  • = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).

  • 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).
  • 3. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs).
  • = 317 kg (700 lbs).

    See Trailer Towing 0 232 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips.

    front and rear axles, weigh the vehicle at a weigh station. Your dealer can help with this. Be sure to spread the load equally on both sides of the centerline.

    Certification/Tire Label

    Page 183

    ![image 230](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile230.png)

    ![image 231](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile231.png)

    |Caution| |---| |Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Things inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

    . Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far forward as possible. Try to spread the weight evenly.

    . Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.

    . Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.

    . Secure loose items in the vehicle. (Continued)|

    ########### Example 3

    Label Example

  • 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3
  • = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).

  • 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
  • 3. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs).
  • A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).

    The label may show the size of the vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of the vehicle. The label shows the gross weight capacity of the vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

    Refer to the vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight.

    The Certification/Tire label may also show the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on the

    ####### Ignition Positions (Key Access)

    Page 184

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |. Do not leave a seat folded down unless needed.|

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |. Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Trailer Towing 0 232 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information.

    Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.|

    ![image 232](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile232.png)

    #### Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In

    |Caution| |---| |The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

    . Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 800 km (500 mi). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.

    . Avoid making hard stops for the first 300 km (200 mi) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.

    (Continued)|

    On new vehicles, the various mechanical and electrical systems experience a “break-in” period during the first 6 400 km (4,000 mi) of routine driving. As the vehicle is driven, the mechanical systems adjust to provide optimal fuel economy and transmission shift performance.

  • 0. Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF
  • 1. ACC/ACCESSORY
  • 2. ON/RUN
  • 3. START
  • Electrical systems will adapt and calibrate during the break-in period. A one-time occurrence of clicks and similar vehicle noises is normal during this process.

    The ignition switch has four different positions.

    Normal driving charges the vehicle’s battery to achieve the best operation of the vehicle, including fuel economy and the Stop/Start System. See Stop/Start System 0 189.

    To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN and the regular brake pedal applied.

    0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : This position turns off the vehicle. It also locks the ignition, the transmission on an

    Page 185

    Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

  • 2. Brake using firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
  • 3. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. Continue braking and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
  • 4. Come to a complete stop. Shift to P (Park). Push the key all the way in toward the steering column, then turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
  • 5. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 198.
  • automatic transmission vehicle, and the steering column, if equipped with a locking steering column.

  • 0 192.
  • A warning chime will sound when the driver door is opened and the key is in the ignition.

    If equipped with a locking steering column, the steering can bind with the front wheels turned off center, which may prevent key rotation out of LOCK/OFF. If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work, then the vehicle needs service.

    In an emergency, if the vehicle cannot be pulled over and must be turned off while driving:

  • 1. Push the key all the way in toward the steering column, then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
  • ![image 233](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile233.png)

    |Caution| |---| |Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in — or pushed all the way in toward the steering column when turning off the vehicle — and turn it only with your hand.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.|

    To turn off the vehicle:

    Page 186

  • 1. Make sure that the vehicle is stopped.
  • 2. Shift to P (Park).
  • 3. Push the key all the way in towards the steering column, then turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
  • 4. Remove the key.
  • 5. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 198.
  • (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This position allows features such as the infotainment system to operate while the vehicle is off. It also unlocks the steering column, if equipped with a locking steering column. Use this position if the vehicle must be pushed or towed. See Retained Accessory
  • See your dealer if the key can be removed in any other position.

    ####### Ignition Positions (Keyless Access)

    Power (RAP). From ON/RUN, push the key all the way in toward the steering column, then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If the key is left in ACC/ACCESSORY with the engine off, the battery could drain and the vehicle may not start. A warning chime will sound when the driver door is opened and the key is in the ignition.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.|

    ![image 234](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile234.png)

    Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : When the vehicle is stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.

  • 2. (ON/RUN) : This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument cluster warning and indicator lights. This position can also be used for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. The switch stays in this position when the engine is running. The transmission is also unlocked in this position on automatic transmission vehicles.
  • 3. (START) : This is the position that starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition returns to ON/RUN for driving.
  • If the vehicle is in P (Park), the ignition will turn off, and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 192.

    Vehicles equipped with Keyless Access have pushbutton starting.

    The Remote Key must be in the vehicle for the system to operate. If the pushbutton start is not working, the vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the Keyless Access system. See Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13.

    If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the ignition will return to accessory mode and display the message SHIFT TO PARK in the Driver Information Center (DIC). When the vehicle is shifted into P (Park), the ignition system will turn off.

    Page 187

    The vehicle may have an electric steering column lock. The lock is activated when the ignition is turned off and either front door is opened. A sound may be heard as the lock actuates or releases. The steering column lock may not release with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, the vehicle may

    To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be on or in Service Mode, and the brake pedal must be applied.

    holding the button for more than five seconds will place the vehicle in Service Mode. The instruments and audio systems will operate as they do when the ignition is on, but the vehicle will not be able to be driven. The engine will not start in Service Mode. Press the button again to turn the ignition off.

    If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for longer than two seconds, or press twice in five seconds.

    not start. Move the steering wheel from left to right while attempting to start the vehicle. If this does not work, the vehicle needs service.

    Accessory (Amber Indicator Light) : This mode allows some electrical accessories to be used when the engine is off.

    If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:

  • 1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
  • 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N (Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
  • 3. Come to a complete stop. Hold the brake pedal down and shift to P (Park). The vehicle must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition off.
  • 4. Continue to hold the brake pedal down.
  • 5. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 198.
  • 6. Press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the ignition off.
  • 7. Release the brake pedal.
  • With the ignition off, pressing the button one time without the brake pedal applied will place the ignition system in accessory.

    ####### Starting the Engine

    Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

    The ignition will switch from accessory to OFF after five minutes to prevent battery rundown.

    ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator Light) : This mode is for driving and starting. With the ignition off, and the brake pedal applied, pressing the button once will turn the ignition on. Once engine cranking begins, release the button. Engine cranking will continue until the engine starts. See Starting the Engine 0 187.

    |Caution| |---| |Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped.|

    Page 188

    |Caution| |---| |If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 237.|

    ########### Service Mode

    This power mode is available for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. With the vehicle off, and the brake pedal not applied, pressing and

    ########## Starting Procedure (Key Access)

    15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

    |Caution| |---| |Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the ignition to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.|

  • 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the ignition.
  • The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.

  • 2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below −18 °C or 0 °F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
  • |Caution| |---| |Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the ignition to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.|

  • If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below −18 °C or 0 °F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you press ENGINE START/ STOP. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, release the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
  • ########## Starting Procedure (Keyless Access)

    Page 189

  • With the Keyless Access system, the remote key must be in the vehicle. Press ENGINE START/STOPwith the brake pedal applied. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the button.
  • The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.

    If the remote key is not in the vehicle, if there is interference, or if the remote key battery is low, a Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message. See Remote Key Operation (Mechanical Key) 0 10 or Remote Key Operation (Remote Key) 0 13

    ####### Stop/Start System

    ########## Auto Stop Disable Switch

    Auto Stops may not occur and/or auto restarts may occur because:

    ![image 235](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile235.png)

    If equipped and enabled, the Stop/Start system will shut off the engine to help conserve fuel. It has components designed for the increased number of starts.

    . The climate control settings require the engine to be running to cool or heat the vehicle interior.

    . The vehicle battery needs to charge.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The automatic engine Stop/Start feature causes the engine to shut off while the vehicle is still on. Do not exit the vehicle before shifting to P (Park). The vehicle may restart and move unexpectedly. Always shift to P (Park), and then turn the ignition off before exiting the vehicle.|

    . The vehicle battery has recently been disconnected.

    . Minimum vehicle speed has not been reached since the last Auto Stop.

    . The accelerator pedal is pressed.

    . The engine or transmission is not at the required operating temperature.

    The automatic engine stop/start feature can be disabled and enabled by pressing the switch with the h symbol. Auto Stop is enabled each time you start the vehicle.

    . The outside temperature is not in the required operating range.

    Page 190

    ########## Auto Engine Stop/Start

    . The vehicle transmission is shifted out of D (Drive) to any gear other than P (Park). . Certain driver modes have been selected.

    When the brakes are applied and the vehicle is at a complete stop, the engine may turn off. When stopped, the tachometer displays AUTO STOP. See Tachometer 0 95. When the brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is pressed, the engine will restart.

    When the indicator above h is illuminated, the system is disabled.

    See Driver Mode Control 0 202.

    . The vehicle is on a steep hill or grade.

    ####### Winter Cover

    . The driver door has been opened or driver seat belt has been unbuckled.

    If equipped, the winter cover can be used to enhance heater performance in extremely cold conditions below −0 °C (32 °F). The winter cover installs over the grille and restricts airflow to the engine compartment.

    . The hood has been opened.

    To maintain vehicle performance, other conditions may cause the engine to automatically restart before the brake pedal is released.

    . The Auto Stop has reached the maximum allowed time.

    ########## Usage Guidelines

    may damage the special finish. Allow the winter cover to dry completely before reinstalling.

    ![image 236](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile236.png)

    The winter cover should only be used while operating the vehicle in extremely cold temperatures or in heavy snow for extended periods. In these temperatures, the vehicle does not need a large amount of air to properly cool the engine. When more airflow is required to cool the vehicle, the winter cover should not be used. The following usage guidelines will allow adequate airflow for proper radiator and air cooler performance:

    ########## Installation Instructions

    When first trying to fit the cover, it may appear to be undersized but will stretch during installation to ensure a tight fit. The initial installation of the cover is best performed when the winter cover is warm.

    Page 191

    ![image 237](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile237.png)

    Activ Model

    . Do not use the winter cover if towing a trailer. The vehicle may overheat if the radiator is covered while towing.

    ![image 238](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile238.png)

    . Do not modify the cover. The winter cover does not cover some sections of the front of the vehicle to provide enough airflow.

    . Keep the underside of the winter cover as clean as possible. Remove monthly or as necessary and clean away dust and debris.

    Base Model

    . Do not use the winter cover above −0 °C (32 °F).

    RS Model 1. Center grille cover and make sure that it

    Use only a mild soap to clean. Do not use harsh soap, strong detergents, or vinyl protectant/sealant type products as they

    is positioned correctly.

    ####### Engine Heater

    ![image 239](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile239.png)

    ![image 240](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile240.png)

    ![image 241](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile241.png)

    Base Model

    RS Model

  • 2. Push plastic hooks back to engage grille slats.
  • Page 192

  • 3. Repeat for all hooks to fully engage cover to grille.
  • 4. Make sure all clips remain engaged during installation. Cover should be stretched to a tight fit when properly installed.
  • ![image 242](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile242.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not plug in the engine block heater while the vehicle is parked in a garage or under a carport.

    Property damage or personal injury may result. Always park the vehicle in a clear open area away from buildings or structures.|

    The engine heater, if available, can help in cold weather conditions at or below −18 °C (0 °F) for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Plug in the engine heater at least four hours before

    Activ Model

    ####### Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

    starting the vehicle. An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |. Use a weatherproof, heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated extension cord if needed. Failure to use the recommended extension cord in good operating condition, or using a damaged heater or extension cord, could make it overheat and cause a fire, property damage, electric shock, and injury.

    . Do not operate the vehicle with the

    heater cord permanently attached to the vehicle. Possible heater cord and thermostat damage could occur.

    . While in use, do not let the heater cord touch vehicle parts or sharp edges. Never close the hood on the heater cord.

    . Before starting the vehicle, unplug the cord, reattach the cover to the plug, and securely fasten the cord. Keep the cord away from any moving parts.|

    When the vehicle is turned from on to off, the following features (if equipped) will continue to function for up to 10 minutes, or until the driver door is opened. These features will also work when the vehicle is on or in accessory mode:

    ########### To Use the Engine Heater

  • 1. Turn off the engine.
  • 2. Remove the heater cord from the rear compartment.
  • 3. Check the heater cord for damage. If it is damaged, do not use it. See your dealer for a replacement. Inspect the cord for damage yearly.
  • 4. Plug the cord into the receptacle in the front fascia.
  • 5. Plug the other end of the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
  • . Infotainment System

    Page 193

    . Power Windows (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)

    . Sunroof (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)

    . Auxiliary Power Outlet

    . Audio System

    ####### . OnStar System Shifting Into Park

    |{ Warning| |---| |Improper use of the heater cord or an extension cord can damage the cord and may result in overheating and fire. . Plug the cord into a three-prong

    electrical utility receptacle that is protected by a ground fault detection function. An ungrounded outlet could cause an electric shock.

    (Continued)|

    |{ Warning| |---| |It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.

    (Continued)|

    The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this.

    parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find out how, see Shifting Into Park

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 229|

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and shift to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park 0 192. If you are towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 229.|

  • 0 192 listed previously.
  • Page 194

    If torque lock does occur, the vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).

    Shifting out of Park To shift out of P (Park):

  • 1. Apply the brake pedal.
  • 2. Turn the vehicle on.
  • 3. Press the shift lever button.
  • 4. Move the shift lever.
  • To shift into P (Park):

  • 1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 198
  • 2. Hold the button on the shift lever and push the lever toward the front of the vehicle into P (Park).
  • 3. Turn the vehicle off.
  • If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake set.

    If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):

    Release the button and check that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park).

    Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running

  • 1. Fully release the shift lever button.
  • 2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever button again.
  • 3. Move the shift lever.
  • ########## Torque Lock

    |{ Warning| |---| |It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. It could overheat and catch fire.

    It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the vehicle is not in P (Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.

    (Continued)|

    Page 195

    Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock, set the

    If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park), see your dealer for service.

    #### Engine Exhaust

    Parking over Things That Burn

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

    . Drive it only with the windows completely down.

    . Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

    Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: . The vehicle idles in areas with poor

    ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

    . The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.

    . The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.

    . The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged, or improperly repaired.

    . There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed.

    (Continued)|

    Extended Parking

    It is best not to park with the vehicle running. If the vehicle is left running, be sure it will not move and there is adequate ventilation.

    ####### Running the Vehicle While Parked

    See Shifting Into Park 0 192 and Engine Exhaust 0 194.

    It is better not to park with the engine running.

    If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key outside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to half an hour.

    Page 196

    If the vehicle is left with the engine running, follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park 0 192 and Engine Exhaust 0 194.

    If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key inside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to an hour.

    If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 229.

    The vehicle could turn off sooner if it is parked on a hill, due to lack of available fuel.

    The timer will reset if the vehicle is taken out of P (Park) while it is running.

    #### Automatic Transmission

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |sure the vehicle will not move, even when on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and place the transmission into P (Park). See Shifting Into Park 0 192 and Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 229.|

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.|

    ![image 243](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile243.png)

    To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 180

    N : In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

    The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You must fully apply the regular brake first and then press the shift lever button before shifting from P (Park) when the vehicle is on. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting out of Park 0 193

    P : This position locks the front wheels. Use P (Park) when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.|

    Page 197

    |{ Warning| |---| |It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the transmission is not in P (Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.

    Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be

    (Continued)|

    R : Use this gear to back up.

    |Caution| |---| |Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be

    (Continued)|

    ########## Operating Modes

    |Caution| |---| |Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.|

    |Caution| |---| |If the vehicle does not shift gears, the transmission could be damaged. Have the vehicle serviced right away.|

    The transmission may operate in a lower gear than normal to improve vehicle performance. The engine speed may be higher and there may be an increase in noise during the following conditions:

    |Caution| |---| |Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission.

    The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle is stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.|

    . When climbing a grade.

    . When driving downhill.

    Page 198

    . When driving in hot temperatures or at

    ####### high altitude. Manual Mode Electronic Range Select (ERS) Mode

    |Caution| |---| |A transmission hot message may display if the automatic transmission fluid is too hot.

    Driving under this condition can damage the vehicle. Stop and idle the engine to cool the automatic transmission fluid. This message clears when the transmission fluid has cooled sufficiently.|

    ERS or manual mode allows for the selection of the range of gear positions. Use this mode when driving downhill or towing a trailer to limit the top gear and vehicle speed. The shift position indicator within the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a number next to the L indicating the highest available gear under manual mode and the driving conditions when manual mode was selected.

    L : Allows the driver to select the range of gear positions. See Manual Mode 0 196.

    D : This position is for normal driving. If more power is needed for passing, press the accelerator pedal down.

    shifted automatically. To shift to 5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus) button or shift into D (Drive).

    To use this feature:

    ![image 244](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile244.png)

  • 1. Move the shift lever to L (Manual Mode).
  • ![image 245](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile245.png)

  • 2. Press the plus/minus button on the shift lever, to increase or decrease the gear range available.
  • L (Manual Mode) will prevent shifting to a lower gear range if the engine speed is too high. If vehicle speed is not reduced within the time allowed, the lower gear range shift will not be completed. Slow the vehicle, then press the − (Minus) button to the desired lower gear range.

    While using the ERS, cruise control can be used.

    Press the AWD switch on the center console to activate the system. The AWD light will flash briefly while the system is engaging and stay lit to indicate AWD is active. Press the switch again to disable the system. The light will flash briefly while the system disables and then stay off.

    #### Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive

    Page 199

    Vehicles with this feature can operate in All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode.

    When shifting to L (Manual Mode), the transmission will shift to a preset lower gear range. For this preset range, the highest gear available is displayed next to the L in the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108 for more information. All gears below that number are available to use. For example, when 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are

    The AWD system delivers power to all four wheels and the system adjusts as needed to improve traction.

    The AWD Mode will stay selected until the mode is changed.

    When operated in two-wheel drive, the vehicle will deliver power to the front wheels only and may provide better fuel economy.

    When using a compact spare tire on an AWD vehicle, the system automatically detects the compact spare and reduces AWD

    ####### Electric Parking Brake

    performance to protect the system. To restore full AWD operation and prevent excessive wear on the system, replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tire 0 298.

    ![image 246](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile246.png)

    ![image 247](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile247.png)

    #### Brakes Electric Brake Boost

    If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light 0 101.

    Vehicles equipped with electric brake boost have hydraulic brake circuits that are electronically controlled when the brake pedal is applied during normal operation. The system performs routine tests and turns off within a few minutes after the vehicle is turned off. Noise may be heard during this time. If the brake pedal is pressed during the tests or when the electric brake boost system is off, a noticeable change in pedal force and travel may be felt. This is normal.

    ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot on the brake pedal and does not always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle ahead, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room ahead to stop, even with ABS.

    The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) can always be applied, even if the vehicle is off. In case of insufficient electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released. To prevent draining the battery, avoid unnecessary repeated cycles of the EPB.

    ########## Using ABS

    Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly. Hearing and feeling ABS operate is normal.

    The system has a red parking brake status light and an amber service parking brake warning light. See Electric Parking Brake Light 0 101 and Service Electric Parking Brake Light 0 101. There are also parking brake-related Driver Information Center (DIC) messages.

    Page 200

    ####### Antilock Brake System (ABS)

    The Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps prevent a braking skid and maintain steering while braking hard.

    ########## Braking in Emergencies

    ABS allows steering and braking at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help even more than braking.

    If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving, the vehicle will decelerate as long as the switch is pulled. If the switch is pulled until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will remain applied.

    Before leaving the vehicle, check the red parking brake status light to ensure that the parking brake is applied.

    |Caution| |---| |Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.|

    EPB Apply To apply the EPB:

    The vehicle may automatically apply the EPB in some situations when the vehicle is not moving. This is normal, and is done to periodically check the correct operation of the EPB system, or at the request of other safety functions that utilize the EPB.

  • 1. Be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop.
  • 2. Pull the EPB switch momentarily.
  • If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 229.

    The red parking brake status light will flash and then stay on once the EPB is fully applied. If the red parking brake status light flashes continuously, the EPB is only partially applied or there is a problem with the EPB. A DIC message will display. Release the EPB and try to apply it again. If the light does not come on, or keeps flashing, have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if the red parking brake status light is flashing. See your dealer.

    If the EPB fails to apply, block the rear wheels to prevent vehicle movement.

    ########## Automatic EPB Release

    The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is running, placed into gear, and an attempt is made to drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB is applied, to preserve parking brake lining life.

    Page 201

    EPB Release To release the EPB:

  • 1. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.
  • 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
  • 3. Press the EPB switch momentarily.
  • ####### Brake Assist

    If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, pull the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red parking brake status light remains on. If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, see your dealer.

    Brake Assist detects rapid brake pedal applications due to emergency braking situations and provides additional braking to activate the Antilock Brake System (ABS) if the brake pedal is not pushed hard enough to activate ABS normally. Minor noise, brake pedal pulsation, and/or pedal movement during this time may occur. Continue to

    The EPB is released when the red parking brake status light is off.

    If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, release the EPB by pressing and holding the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red parking brake status light is off. If either light stays on after release is attempted, see your dealer.

    braking pressure to any one of the vehicle wheel brakes to assist the driver in keeping the vehicle on the intended path.

    HSA is available when the vehicle is facing uphill in a forward gear, or when facing downhill in R (Reverse). The vehicle must come to a complete stop on a grade for HSA to activate.

    apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. Brake Assist disengages when the brake pedal is released.

    If cruise control is being used and TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will disengage. Cruise control may be turned back on when road conditions allow.

    ####### Hill Start Assist (HSA)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not rely on the HSA feature. HSA does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by this system. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 175.|

    #### Ride Control Systems

    ####### Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control

    Page 202

    Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move. The systems may be heard or felt while they are operating or while performing diagnostic checks. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle.

    ########## System Operation

    The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC), an electronic stability control system. These systems help limit wheel slip and assist the driver in maintaining control, especially on slippery road conditions.

    It is recommended to leave both systems on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 180 and “Turning the Systems Off and On” later in this section.

    When the vehicle is stopped on a grade, Hill Start Assist (HSA) temporarily prevents the vehicle from rolling in an unintended direction during the transition from brake pedal release to accelerator pedal apply. The brakes release when the accelerator pedal is applied or automatically release after a few seconds. The brakes may also release under other conditions. Do not rely on HSA to hold the vehicle.

    TCS activates if it senses that any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS applies the brakes to the spinning wheels and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

    ![image 248](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile248.png)

    StabiliTrak/ESC activates when the vehicle senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak/ESC selectively applies

    ########## Turning the Systems Off and On

    The indicator light for both systems is in the instrument cluster. This light will:

    ![image 249](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile249.png)

    |Caution| |---| |Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle driveline could be damaged.|

    . Flash when TCS is limiting wheel spin.

    . Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC is activated.

    . Turn on and stay on when either system

    is not working. If either system fails to turn on or to activate, a message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), and d comes on and stays on to indicate that the system is inactive and is not assisting the driver in maintaining control. The vehicle is safe to drive, but driving should be adjusted accordingly.

    ![image 250](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile250.png)

    Page 203

    Type 2

    To turn off only TCS, press and release g. The traction off light i illuminates in the instrument cluster.

    If d comes on and stays on:

  • 1. Stop the vehicle.
  • 2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 seconds.
  • 3. Start the engine.
  • To turn TCS on again, press and release g. The traction off light i in the instrument cluster will turn off.

    Type 1

    Drive the vehicle. If d comes on and stays on, the vehicle may need more time to diagnose the problem. If the condition persists, see your dealer.

    If TCS is limiting wheel spin when g is pressed, the system will not turn off until the wheels stop spinning.

    ########## Sport Mode

    mode is selected, a unique and persistent indicator will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

    To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and hold g until the traction off light

    ![image 251](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile251.png)

  • i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g illuminate and stay on in the instrument cluster.
  • ########## AWD Mode (AWD Vehicles Only)

    Vehicles with this feature can operate in All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mode.

    To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC on again, press and release g. The traction off light i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g in the instrument cluster turn off. Adding accessories can affect the vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications 0 239 Driver Mode Control

    Page 204

    ![image 252](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile252.png)

    Use Sport Mode where road conditions or personal preference demands a more controlled response. When active, Sport Mode modifies steering efforts and transmission shifting for a more sporty feel and response.

    Driver Mode Control (DMC) allows the driver to adjust the overall driving experience to better suit personal preferences by adjusting multiple subsystems simultaneously. Drive Mode availability and affected vehicle subsystems are dependent upon vehicle trim level, region, and optional features.

    AWD provides torque to all four wheels. Select AWD Mode to improve traction and control on slippery road surfaces, such as gravel, sand, wet pavement, snow, and ice. For more information on AWD Mode, see All-Wheel Drive 0 197.

    If the vehicle is in Normal (FWD) or AWD it will stay in that mode through future ignition cycles. If the vehicle is in any other mode, it will return to Normal (FWD) Mode when the vehicle is restarted. When each

    #### Cruise Control

    ########## Snow/Ice Mode (FWD Vehicles Only)

    is activated, cruise control is disengaged. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 217. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, cruise control can be turned back on.

    ![image 253](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile253.png)

    The cruise control lets the vehicle maintain a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below 40 km/h (25 mph).

    Cruise control will disengage if either TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC is turned off.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. Do not use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

    Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.|

    If the brakes are applied, cruise control disengages.

    If equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), the cruise control system may automatically brake to slow the vehicle down to maintain the set following gap between you and the vehicle in front of you or while navigating a sharp turn.

    Snow/Ice Mode improves vehicle acceleration on snow and ice covered roads. When active, Snow/Ice Mode will adjust acceleration to optimize traction on slippery surfaces. This mode can compromise the acceleration on dry asphalt.

    ![image 254](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile254.png)

    Page 205

    This feature is not intended for use when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, snow, or gravel. If the vehicle becomes stuck, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 180.

    With the Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the system may begin to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control. If this happens, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 200. If a collision alert occurs when cruise control

  • 5 : Press to turn the cruise control system on and off. A white indicator comes on in the instrument cluster when cruise is turned on.
  • Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
  • The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 92. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.

    The cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster turns green after cruise control has been set to the desired speed. See Instrument Cluster 0 92.

    ########### Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

  • : Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory.
  • If the cruise control system is already activated:

    Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed

    +RES : If there is a set speed in memory, press up briefly to resume that speed or press and hold to accelerate. If cruise control is already active, use to increase vehicle speed.

    . Press and hold −SET down until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.

    and then the brakes are applied or * is pressed, the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.

    . To slow down in small increments, briefly press −SET down. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

    −SET : Press down briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control. If cruise control is already active, use to decrease vehicle speed.

    Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, briefly press

    The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 92. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.

    +RES up. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed.

    Page 206

    Setting Cruise Control If 5 is on when not in use, −SET or +RES could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep 5 off when cruise is not being used. To set a speed:

    ########### Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

    If the cruise control system is already activated:

    Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

    . Press and hold +RES up until the vehicle accelerates to the desired speed, then release it.

    Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed. While pressing the accelerator pedal or shortly following the release to override cruise control, briefly pressing −SET will result in cruise control set to the current vehicle speed.

    . To increase the speed in small increments,

  • 1. Press 5 to turn the cruise system on.
  • 2. Get to the speed desired.
  • 3. Press −SET down and release. The desired set speed briefly appears in the instrument cluster.
  • briefly press +RES up. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

    following gap is the following time between your vehicle and a vehicle detected directly ahead in your path, moving in the same direction. If no vehicle is detected in your path, ACC works like regular cruise control. ACC uses a windshield mounted front camera sensor.

    ########### Using Cruise Control on Hills

    |{ Warning| |---| |ACC has limited braking ability and may not have time to slow the vehicle down enough to avoid a collision with another vehicle you are following. This can occur when vehicles suddenly slow or stop ahead, or enter your lane. Also see “Alerting the Driver” later in this section. Complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 175|

    How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brake pedal is applied, cruise control will disengage.

    If a vehicle is detected in your path, ACC can apply acceleration or limited, moderate braking to maintain the selected following gap. To disengage ACC, apply the brake. If ACC is controlling the vehicle speed when the Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system activates, ACC may automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 200. When road conditions allow ACC to be safely used, ACC can be turned back on. Disabling the TCS or StabiliTrak/ ESC system will disengage and prevent engagement of ACC.

    Ending Cruise Control There are four ways to end cruise control:

    Page 207

    . Step lightly on the brake pedal.

    . Press *.

    |{ Warning| |---| |ACC will not detect or brake for children, pedestrians, animals, or other objects.

    Do not use ACC when:

    . On winding and hilly roads or when the camera sensor is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. Keep the windshield and headlamps clean.

    . When visibility is poor due to rain, snow, fog, dirt, insect residue, or dust; when other foreign objects obscure

    (Continued)|

    . Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).

    . To turn off cruise control, press 5. Erasing Speed Memory

    The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if 5 is pressed or if the ignition is turned off.

    ACC can reduce the need for you to frequently brake and accelerate, especially when used on expressways, freeways, and interstate highways. When used on other roads, you may need to take over the control of braking or acceleration more often.

    ####### Adaptive Cruise Control (Camera)

    If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) allows the cruise control set speed and following gap to be selected. Read this entire section before using this system. The

    ########## Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control

    5 : Press to turn the system on or off. The indicator turns white on the instrument cluster when ACC is turned on.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |the camera’s view; or when the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic causes additional environmental obstructions, such as road spray. ACC performance is limited under these conditions.

    . On slippery roads where fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip.

    . With extremely heavy cargo loaded in the cargo area or rear seat.

    . When towing a trailer.|

    To switch between ACC and regular cruise control, press and hold * *. A Driver Information Display (DIC) message displays. See Vehicle Messages 0 110.

    RES+ : Press up briefly to resume the previous set speed or to increase vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To increase speed by about 1 km/h (1 mph), press RES+ up briefly. To increase speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, hold RES+.

    ![image 255](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile255.png)

    Page 208

    ![image 256](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile256.png)

    SET− : Press down briefly to set the speed and activate ACC or to decrease vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To decrease speed by about 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET– down briefly. To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, hold SET–.

    ACC Indicator Regular Cruise Control Indicator

    When ACC is engaged, a green o indicator will be lit on the instrument cluster and the following gap will be displayed. When the regular cruise control is engaged, a green J indicator will be lit on the instrument cluster; the following gap will not display. When the vehicle is turned on, the cruise control mode will be set to the last mode used before the vehicle was turned off. It is recommended to switch from ACC to regular cruise control only, when there are no vehicles ahead of your vehicle.

    ![image 257](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile257.png)

  • : Press to disengage ACC without erasing the selected set speed.
  • [ : Press to select a following gap setting for ACC of Far, Medium, or Near. The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 92. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.

  • 3. Press SET– down and release.
  • 4. Remove your foot from the accelerator. After ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead is detected closer than the selected following gap. ACC can also be set while the vehicle is stopped if ACC is on and the brake pedal is applied.
  • To begin using ACC again, press RES+ up briefly while moving more than 5 km/h (5 mph). The vehicle returns to the previous set speed.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Always check the cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster to determine which mode cruise control is in before using the feature. If ACC is not active, the vehicle will not automatically brake for other vehicles, which could cause a crash if the brakes are not applied manually. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.|

    A green ACC indicator and the set speed display on the instrument cluster. The vehicle ahead indicator may be flashing if a vehicle ahead was present and moved. See “Approaching and Following a Vehicle” later in this section. If the vehicle is stopped with the brake pedal applied, press RES+ up and release the brake pedal. ACC will hold the vehicle until RES+ or the accelerator pedal is pressed. Once ACC has resumed, if there is no vehicle ahead, if the vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap, or if the vehicle has exited a sharp curve, then the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.

    ![image 258](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile258.png)

    Setting Adaptive Cruise Control If 5 is on when not in use, it could get pressed and go into ACC when not desired. Keep 5 off when cruise is not being used. Select the set speed desired for ACC. This is the vehicle speed when no vehicle is detected in its path. While the vehicle is moving, ACC will not set at a speed less than 5 km/h (3 mph), although the minimum allowable set speed is 25 km/h (15 mph). To set ACC while moving:

    The ACC indicator displays on the instrument cluster. When ACC is turned on, the indicator will be lit white. When ACC is engaged, the indicator will turn green.

    Be mindful of speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when selecting the set speed.

    Page 209

    ########## Increasing Speed While ACC Is at a Set Speed

    If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:

    ########## Resuming a Set Speed

    If the ACC is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, ACC is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.

    . Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed. Briefly press down and release SET– and release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed.

  • 1. Press 5.
  • 2. Get up to the desired speed.
  • . If stopped with the break pedal applied, press or hold SET– down until the desired set speed is displayed.

    When the accelerator pedal is pressed, ACC will not brake because it is overridden. The ACC indicator will turn blue on the instrument cluster.

    When it is determined that there is no vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap, then the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.

    ########## Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

    . Press and hold RES+ up until the desired set speed is displayed, then release it.

    ########## Reducing Speed While ACC Is at a Set Speed

    When a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead within the selected following gap, ACC will adjust the vehicle's speed and attempt to maintain the follow distance gap selected.

    . To increase vehicle speed in smaller increments, press RES+ up briefly. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

    If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:

    . Use the brake to get to the desired lower speed. Release the brake and press SET– down. The vehicle will now cruise at the lower speed.

    Press [ on the steering wheel to adjust

    Page 210

    . To increase vehicle speed in larger increments, hold RES+. While holding RES+, the vehicle speed increases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) step, then continues to increase by 5 km/h (5 mph) at a time.

    the following gap. Each press cycles the gap button through three settings: Far, Medium, or Near.

    . Press and hold SET– down until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.

    ![image 259](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile259.png)

    . The set speed can also be increased while the vehicle is stopped. If stopped with the brake pedal applied, press RES+ up until the desired set speed is displayed.

    . To decrease the vehicle speed in smaller increments, press SET– down briefly. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

    . To decrease the vehicle speed in larger increments, hold SET– down. While holding SET–, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) step, then continues to decrease by 5 km/h (5 mph) at a time.

    . If ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop and there is another vehicle directly ahead, pressing RES+ will increase the set speed.

    ########### Far Gap Setting

    . Pressing RES+ up when there is no longer a vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is pulling away and the brake is not applied will cause the ACC to resume.

    . The set speed can also be decreased while the vehicle is stopped.

    page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select “Collision/ Detection Systems”.

    further back your vehicle will follow a vehicle detected ahead. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the following gap. The range of selectable gaps may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.

    ![image 260](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile260.png)

    ########## See Defensive Driving 0 175. Approaching and Following a Vehicle

    Changing the gap setting automatically changes the alert timing sensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) for the Forward Collision Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 217.

    ![image 261](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile261.png)

    Medium Gap Setting

    Page 211

    ![image 262](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile262.png)

    ########## Alerting the Driver

    The vehicle ahead indicator is in the instrument cluster. It only displays when a vehicle is detected in your vehicle’s path moving in the same direction. If this symbol is not displaying, ACC will not respond to or brake for vehicles ahead.

    ![image 263](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile263.png)

    ACC automatically slows the vehicle down and adjusts vehicle speed to follow a detected vehicle ahead at the selected following gap. The vehicle speed increases or decreases to follow a detected vehicle in front of your vehicle when that vehicle is traveling slower than your vehicle set speed. It may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is active, the brake lamps will

    Near Gap Setting

    If ACC is engaged, driver action may be required when ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because of approaching a vehicle too rapidly.

    When pressed, the current gap setting displays briefly on the instrument cluster. The gap setting will be maintained until it is changed.

    When this condition occurs, six red lights will flash on the windshield and eight beeps will sound from the front. Touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home

    Since each gap setting corresponds to a following time (Far, Medium, or Near), the following distance will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the

    . Non-standard shaped vehicles, such as vehicle transport, vehicles with a side car fitted, or horse carriages

    Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects

    come on. The automatic braking may feel or sound different than if the brakes were applied manually. This is normal.

    |{ Warning| |---| |ACC may not detect and react to stopped or slow-moving vehicles ahead of you. For example, the system may not brake for a vehicle it has never detected moving. This can occur in stop-and-go traffic or when a vehicle suddenly appears due to a vehicle ahead changing lanes. Your vehicle may not stop and could cause a crash. Use caution when using ACC. Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes.|

    . Vehicles that are low to the road surface

    ########## Passing a Vehicle While Using ACC

    . Objects that are close to the front of your vehicle

    Page 212

    If the set speed is high enough, and the left turn signal is used to pass a vehicle ahead in the selected following gap, ACC may assist by gradually accelerating the vehicle prior to the lane change.

    . Vehicles on which extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the cargo area or rear seat

    ![image 264](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile264.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |When using ACC to pass a vehicle or perform a lane change, the following distance to the vehicle being passed may be reduced. ACC may not apply sufficient acceleration or braking when passing a vehicle or performing a lane change. Always be ready to manually accelerate or brake to complete the pass or lane change.|

    ########## ACC Automatically Disengages

    Irregular Objects Affecting ACC

    ACC may automatically disengage and the driver will need to manually apply the brakes to slow the vehicle if:

    ACC may have difficulty detecting the following objects:

    . The front camera is blocked or visibility is reduced.

    . Vehicles in front of your vehicle that have a rear aspect that is low, small, or irregular

    . The Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/ESC system has activated or been disabled.

    . An empty truck or trailer that has no cargo in the cargo bed

    . There is a fault in the system.

    . Vehicles with cargo extending from the back end

    . A DIC message displays to indicate that ACC is temporarily unavailable.

    A DIC warning message may display indicating to shift to P (Park) before exiting the vehicle. See Vehicle Messages 0 110.

    Page 213

    The ACC indicator will turn white when ACC is no longer active.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The ACC will not automatically apply the brakes if your foot is resting on the accelerator pedal. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.|

    In some cases, when ACC is temporarily unavailable, regular cruise control may be used. See “Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control” in this section. Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control system.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If ACC has stopped the vehicle, and if ACC is disengaged, turned off, or canceled, the vehicle will no longer be held at a stop. The vehicle can move. When ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop, always be prepared to manually apply the brakes.|

    ########## Curves in the Road

    |{ Warning| |---| |On curves, ACC may not detect a vehicle ahead in your lane. You could be startled if the vehicle accelerates up to the set speed, especially when following a vehicle exiting or entering exit ramps. You could lose control of the vehicle or crash. Do not use ACC while driving on an entrance or exit ramp. Always be ready to use the brakes if necessary.|

    ########## Notification to Resume ACC

    ACC will maintain a follow gap behind a detected vehicle and slow your vehicle to a stop behind that vehicle.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Leaving the vehicle without placing it in P (Park) can be dangerous. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held at a stop by ACC. Always place the vehicle in P (Park) and turn off the ignition before leaving the vehicle.|

    If the stopped vehicle ahead has driven away and ACC has not resumed, the vehicle ahead indicator will flash as a reminder to check traffic ahead before proceeding. In addition, three beeps will sound.

    When the vehicle ahead drives away, ACC resumes automatically if the stop was brief. If necessary, press RES+ or the accelerator pedal to resume ACC. If stopped for more than two minutes or if the driver door is opened and the driver seat belt is unbuckled, ACC automatically applies the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPB status light will turn on. See Electric Parking Brake 0 198. To release the EPB, press the accelerator pedal.

    |{ Warning| |---|

    Page 214

    |On curves, ACC may respond to a vehicle in another lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra

    (Continued)|

    ########## ACC Override

    If using the accelerator pedal while ACC is active, the ACC indicator turns blue on the instrument cluster indicating ACC braking will not occur. ACC will resume operation when the accelerator pedal is not being pressed.

    ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead until it is completely in the lane. The brakes may need to be manually applied.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves.|

    ![image 265](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile265.png)

    ########## Objects Not Directly in Front of Your Vehicle

    ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may reduce the vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.

    The detection of objects in front of the vehicle may not be possible if:

    . The vehicle or object ahead is not within your lane.

    ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and apply the brakes.

    ACC automatically slows the vehicle down while navigating the curve and may increase speed out of the curve, but will not exceed the set speed.

    . The vehicle ahead is shifted, not centered,

    or is shifted to one side of the lane. Driving in Narrow Lanes

    ACC may occasionally provide an alert and/or braking that is considered unnecessary. It could respond to vehicles in different lanes or stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation. The vehicle does not need service.

    ![image 266](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile266.png)

    Page 215

    Vehicles in adjacent traffic lanes or roadside objects may be incorrectly detected when located along the roadway.

    Other Vehicle Lane Changes

    ########## Do Not Use ACC on Hills and When Towing a Trailer

    ![image 267](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile267.png)

    ![image 268](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile268.png)

    When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC may not detect the vehicle ahead and accelerate to the set speed. When this happens, the vehicle ahead indicator will not appear.

    . There are multiple changes in brightness or shadows along the vehicle roadway.

    droplets from rain or snow that remain on the windshield may also limit ACC’s ability to detect objects.

    Do not use ACC when driving on steep hills or when towing a trailer. ACC will not detect a vehicle in the lane while driving on steep hills. If the brakes are applied, ACC disengages.

    . In a tunnel without the headlamps on, or in a tunnel when there is a vehicle in front that does not have its taillamps on.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Camera visibility may be limited and the ACC system may not work properly if the windshield is not clear. Do not use ACC if moisture is present on the inside of the windshield or the windshield washer is used in cold weather. Turn on the front defroster and make sure the windshield is clear before using ACC. Before driving, check that the windshield wipers are in good condition and replace them if worn.|

    . Subjected to strong light from opposing lane traffic in the front of the vehicle, such as high-beam headlamps from oncoming traffic.

    Disengaging ACC There are three ways to disengage ACC:

    . Step lightly on the brake pedal.

    ######### . Press *. . Press 5. Erasing Speed Memory

    ########## Accessory Installations and Vehicle Modifications

    Do not install or place any object around the front camera windshield area that would obstruct the front camera view.

    Page 216

    The ACC set speed is erased from memory if 5 is pressed or if the ignition is turned off.

    Do not install objects on top of the vehicle that overhang and obstruct the front camera, such as a canoe, kayak, or other items that can be transported on a roof rack system. See Roof Rack System 0 83.

    ########## Lighting Conditions Affecting ACC

    ########## Weather Conditions Affecting ACC

    The ACC front camera can be affected by poor lighting conditions, and ACC may have limited performance when:

    If the interior temperature is extremely high, the instrument cluster may indicate that ACC is temporarily unavailable. This can be caused by extreme hot weather conditions with direct sunlight on the front camera. ACC will return to normal operation once the cabin temperature is lower.

    Do not modify the hood, headlamps, or fog lamps, as this may limit the camera’s ability to detect an object.

    . There are changes in brightness, such as entering and exiting tunnels, bridges, and overpasses.

    . Low sun angles cause the camera to not detect objects, or it is more difficult to detect objects in the same traffic lane.

    Conditions that are associated with low visibility, such as fog, rain, snow, or road spray, may limit ACC performance. Water

    . Lighting is poor in the evening or early morning

    ########## Cleaning the Sensing System

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |. Work if the detection sensor is covered up, such as with a sticker, magnet, or metal plate.

    . Work if the area surrounding the detection sensor is damaged or not properly repaired.

    Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 175.

    Under many conditions, these systems will not:

    . Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.

    . Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system.

    . Work at all driving speeds.

    . Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash.

    . Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions.

    . Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

    (Continued)|

    The camera sensor on the windshield behind the rearview mirror can become blocked by snow, ice, dirt, mud, or debris. This area needs to be cleaned for ACC to operate properly.

    Page 217

    The vehicle headlamps may need to be cleaned due to dirt, snow, or ice. Objects that are not illuminated correctly may be difficult to detect.

    If ACC will not operate, regular cruise control may be available. See “Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control” in this section. Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control system.

    ########### Audible Alert

    Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by beeping. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience.

    For cleaning instructions, see “Washing the Vehicle” under Exterior Care 0 305.

    #### Driver Assistance Systems

    ########### Cleaning

    This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems.

    Depending on vehicle options, keep these areas of the vehicle clean to ensure the best driver assistance feature performance. Driver Information Center (DIC) messages may display when the systems are unavailable or blocked.

    . Front side and rear side panels

    on the infotainment display, shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12 km/h (8 mph) while in D (Drive).

    ![image 269](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile269.png)

    . Outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror

    . Rear side corner bumpers

    . Rear Vision Camera above the license plate

    ![image 270](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile270.png)

    ########### Radio Frequency

    This vehicle may be equipped with driver assistance systems that operate using radio frequency. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335.

    Page 218

    ![image 271](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile271.png)

    ####### Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing

    If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may help the driver park or avoid objects. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing. Rear Vision Camera (RVC) When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the RVC displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the infotainment display. The previous screen displays when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) after a short delay. To return to the previous screen sooner, press Home or Back button

  • View Displayed by the Rear Vision Camera
  • ![image 272](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile272.png)

    . Front and rear bumpers and the area below the bumpers

    . Front grille and headlamps

    . Front camera lens in the front grille or near the front emblem

    ####### Park Assist

  • 1. View Displayed by the Rear Vision Camera
  • 2. Corners of the Rear Bumper
  • |Warning (Continued)| |---| |with Park Assist, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing.|

    If equipped, Rear Parking Assist (RPA) system, it assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse).

    Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display.

    RPA operates at speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and the sensors on the rear bumper detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground. The distance objects can be detected may be less during warmer or humid weather.

    ![image 273](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile273.png)

    Page 219

    A warning triangle may display to show that RPA or RCTA has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object.

    Blocked sensors will not detect objects and can also cause false detections. Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush; and clean sensors after a car wash in freezing temperatures.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of the cameras’ field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.|

    The instrument cluster may have a Park Assist display with bars that show “distance to object” and object location information for the Park Assist system. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars change color from yellow to amber to red.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The Park Assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even

    (Continued)|

    When an object is first detected in the rear, one beep will be heard from the rear. When an object is very close (< 0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear, five beeps will sound from the rear.

    ########## Turning the Features On or Off

    ########## Turning the Features On or Off

    FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and operates at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph).

    Rear Park Assist symbols can be turned on or off through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.

    RCTA can be turned on or off through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.

    |{ Warning| |---| |FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. It also may not provide any warning at all. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 175.|

    Turn off RPA when towing a trailer.

    ####### Assistance Systems for Driving

    Page 220

    ####### Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) System

    If equipped, when driving the vehicle in a forward gear, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Lane Change Alert (LCA), Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB), and/or the Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage.

    If equipped, when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), RCTA displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow on the infotainment display to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. This system detects objects coming from up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three beeps sound from the left or right depending on the direction of the detected vehicle.

    ####### Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System

    FCA can be disabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.

    If equipped, the FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps. FCA also lights an amber visual alert if following another vehicle much too closely.

    Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.

    ########## Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

    ########### Tailgating Alert

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair.|

    ![image 274](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile274.png)

    ![image 275](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile275.png)

    The vehicle ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead too closely.

    FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is detected, the vehicle ahead indicator will display green. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; or if a vehicle ahead is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane.

    ########### Collision Alert

    ![image 276](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile276.png)

    Page 221

    Selecting the Alert Timing The Collision Alert control is on the steering wheel. Press [ to set the FCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near. The first button press shows the current setting on the DIC. Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timings may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.

    When your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA display will flash on the windshield.

    |{ Warning| |---| |FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain,

    (Continued)|

    Also, eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Collision Alert occurs.

    . Clean the entire front of the vehicle.

    If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), changing the FCA timing setting automatically changes the following gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).

    |{ Warning| |---| |AEB is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on AEB to brake the vehicle. AEB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles.

    AEB may not:

    . Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads.

    . Detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.

    . Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow.

    . Detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects.

    Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.|

    . Clean the headlamps.

    ####### Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

    ########## Following Distance Indicator

    The AEB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by a front-end crashes. AEB also includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard. This automatic emergency braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected. This is shown by the FCA vehicle ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 217.

    The following distance to a moving vehicle ahead in your path is indicated in following time in seconds on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108. The minimum following time is 0.5 seconds away. If there is no vehicle detected ahead, or the vehicle ahead is out of sensor range, dashes will be displayed.

    ########## Unnecessary Alerts

    FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.

    The system works when driving in a forward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detect vehicles up to approximately 60 m (197 ft).

    Page 222

    ########## Cleaning the System

    If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, this may correct the issue:

    . Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror.

    . There is a problem with the StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.

    AEB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. If this happens, AEB may hold the vehicle at rest momentarily. A firm press the accelerator pedal will release the brake.

    |{ Warning| |---| |IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed.|

    ####### The AEB system does not need service. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System

    |{ Warning| |---| |AEB may automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving objects. To override AEB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.|

    If equipped, the FPB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with nearby pedestrians when driving in a forward gear. FPB displays an amber indicator, ~, when a nearby pedestrian is detected directly ahead. The indicator may also be white depending on the equipped instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster 0 92. When approaching a detected pedestrian too quickly, FPB provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps. FPB can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This system includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA), and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system may also respond to pedestrians. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 0 219.

    AEB and IBA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. To view available settings for this feature, touch the Settings icon on the infotainment home page. Select “Vehicle” to display the list of available options and select “Collision/Detection Systems”.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Using AEB or IBA while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert, or if the vehicle has ACC to Off, when towing a trailer.|

    ########## Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

    IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead.

    Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage only when the brake pedal is released.

    Page 223

    A system unavailable message may display if:

    The FPB system can detect and alert to pedestrians in a forward gear at speeds between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph). During daytime driving, the system detects pedestrians up to a distance

    . The front of the vehicle or windshield is not clean.

    . Heavy rain or snow is interfering with object detection.

    FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems.

    of approximately 40 m (131 ft). During nighttime driving, system performance is very limited.

    When the vehicle approaches a pedestrian ahead too rapidly, the red FPB alert display will flash on the windshield. Eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front. When this Pedestrian Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Front Pedestrian Alert occurs.

    |{ Warning| |---| |FPB does not provide an alert or automatically brake the vehicle, unless it detects a pedestrian. FPB may not detect pedestrians, including children:

    . When the pedestrian is not directly ahead, fully visible, or standing upright, or when part of a group.

    . Due to poor visibility, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow.

    . If the FPB sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.

    . If the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition.

    Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. For more information, see Defensive Driving 0 175. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FPB sensor clean and in good repair.|

    ########## Detecting the Pedestrian Ahead

    ![image 277](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile277.png)

    ########## Automatic Braking

    If FPB detects it is about to crash into a pedestrian directly ahead, and the brakes have not been applied, FPB may automatically brake moderately or brake hard. This can help to avoid some very low speed pedestrian crashes or reduce pedestrian injury. FPB can automatically brake to detected pedestrians between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph). Automatic braking levels may be reduced under certain conditions, such as higher speeds.

    FPB alerts and automatic braking will not occur unless the FPB system detects a pedestrian. When a nearby pedestrian is detected directly in front of the vehicle, the pedestrian ahead indicator will display amber or white depending on the equipped instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster 0 92.

    Front Pedestrian Alert

    ![image 278](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile278.png)

    If this happens, Automatic Braking may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB. A firm press of the accelerator pedal will also release Automatic Braking and the EPB.

    Page 224

    ########## Cleaning the System

    LCA warning display will light up in the corresponding outside mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on.

    |{ Warning| |---| |FPB may alert or automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could falsely alert or brake for objects similar in shape or size to pedestrians, including shadows. This is normal operation and the vehicle does not need service. To override Automatic Braking, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.|

    If FPB does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror may correct the issue.

    |{ Warning| |---| |LCA does not alert the driver to vehicles outside of the system detection zones, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. It may not provide alerts when changing lanes under all driving conditions. Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.|

    ####### Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

    If equipped, the SBZA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right side mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes. Since this system is part of the Lane Change Alert (LCA) system, read the entire LCA section before using this feature.

    Automatic Braking can be disabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems > Front Pedestrian Detection.

    ########### LCA Detection Zones

    |{ Warning| |---| |Using the Front Pedestrian Braking system while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.|

    ![image 279](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile279.png)

    ####### Lane Change Alert (LCA)

    If equipped, the LCA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding lane change crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly approaching these areas from behind. The

  • 1. SBZA Detection Zone
  • Page 225

  • 2. LCA Detection Zone
  • LCA displays may not come on when passing a vehicle quickly, for a stopped vehicle, or when towing a trailer. The LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer. LCA may alert to objects attached to the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle, or object extending out to either side of the vehicle. Attached objects may also interfere with the detection of vehicles. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.

    When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror LCA displays will briefly come on to indicate the system is operating. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right outside mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in the next lane over in that blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone. If the turn signal is activated in the same direction as a detected vehicle, this display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes.

    The LCA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m (11 ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning area starts at approximately the middle of the vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are also warned of vehicles rapidly approaching from up to 70 m (230 ft) behind the vehicle.

    LCA can be disabled. When you disable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alert is also disabled. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems. If LCA is disabled by the driver, the LCA mirror displays will not light up.

    ########## How the System Works

    The LCA symbol lights up in the outside mirrors when the system detects a moving vehicle in the next lane over that is in the side blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone from behind. A lit LCA symbol indicates it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before making a lane change, check the LCA display, check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.

    LCA may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the next lane over, especially in wet conditions or when driving on sharp curves. The system does not need to be serviced. The system may light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.

    ########## When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly

    The LCA system requires some driving for the system to calibrate to maximum performance. This calibration may occur more quickly if the vehicle is driving on a straight highway road with traffic and roadside objects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).

    LCA may not operate when the LCA sensors in the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care 0 305. If the DIC still displays the system unavailable

    ![image 280](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile280.png)

    ![image 281](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile281.png)

    Left Outside Mirror Display

    Right Outside Mirror Display

    overridden by turning the steering wheel. If the system detects you are steering intentionally across a lane marker, the LDW will not be given. Do not expect the LDW to occur when you are intentionally crossing a lane marker.

    message after cleaning both sides of the vehicle toward the rear corners of the vehicle, see your dealer.

    |Warning (Continued)|

    Page 226

    |---| |If LKA only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only assist or provide an LDW alert when approaching the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Even with LKA and LDW, you must steer the vehicle. Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LKA in bad weather conditions or on roads with unclear lane markings, such as construction zones.|

    If the LCA displays do not light up when moving vehicles are in the side blind zone or are rapidly approaching this zone and the system is clean, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. It may not keep the vehicle in the lane or give a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, even if a lane marking is detected.

    The LKA and LDW systems may not:

    . Provide an alert or enough steering assist to avoid a lane departure or crash.

    . Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice; if they are not in proper condition; or if the sun shines directly into the camera.

    . Detect road edges.

    . Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads. (Continued)|

    Radio Frequency Information See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

    If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. This system uses a camera to detect lane markings. The LKA may be ready to assist at speeds between 50 km/h (31 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph). LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert if the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. This system is not intended to keep the vehicle centered in the lane. LKA will not assist and alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if it detects that you are accelerating, braking or actively steering. LKA can be

    |{ Warning| |---| |Using LKA on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Turn the system off.|

    When on, A is white, if equipped, indicating that the system is not ready to assist. A is green if LKA is ready to assist. LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. A is amber when assisting. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert by flashing A amber if the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. Additionally, there may be three beeps, or the driver seat may pulse three times, on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction. Take Steering

    . Banked roads.

    |{ Warning| |---| |LKA will not alert the driver if a towed trailer crosses into an adjacent lane of travel. Serious injury or property damage may occur if the trailer moves into another lane. Always monitor the trailer position while towing to make sure it is within the same lane as the tow vehicle.|

    . Roads with poor lane markings, such as

    two-lane roads. If the LKA system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help. A camera blocked message may display if the camera is blocked. Some driver assistance systems may have reduced performance or not work at all. An LKA or LDW unavailable message may display if the systems are temporarily unavailable. This message could be due to a blocked camera. The LKA system does not need service. Clean the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror. LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LKA off if these conditions continue.

    How the System Works LKA uses a camera sensor installed on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror to detect lane markings. It may provide brief steering assist if it detects an unintended lane departure. It may further provide an audible alert or the driver seat may pulse indicating that a lane marking has been crossed. The system does not provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when intentionally steering across a lane marker. To turn LKA on and off, press A on the center console. If equipped, the indicator light on the button comes on when LKA is on and turns off when LKA is disabled. On some vehicles, a long press of over three seconds is required to turn LKA off.

    The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. If LKA does not detect active driver steering, an alert and chime may be provided. Steer the vehicle to dismiss. LKA may become temporarily unavailable after repeated take steering alerts.

    Page 227

    ########## When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly

    The system performance may be affected by:

    . Close vehicles ahead.

    . Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels.

    #### Fuel Top Tier Fuel

    ####### Recommended Fuel

    ####### Prohibited Fuels

    |Caution| |---| |Do not use fuels with any of the following conditions; doing so may damage the vehicle and void its warranty:

    . For vehicles that are not FlexFuel, fuel labeled greater than 15% ethanol by volume, such as mid-level ethanol blends (16–50% ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.

    . Fuel with any amount of methanol, methylal, ferrocene, and aniline. These fuels can corrode metal fuel system parts or damage plastic and rubber parts.

    . Fuel containing metals such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT), which can damage the emissions control system and spark plugs.

    . Fuel with a posted octane rating of less than the recommended fuel. Using this fuel will lower fuel economy and performance, and may decrease the life of the emissions catalyst.|

    ![image 282](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile282.png)

    GM recommends the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline to keep the engine clean, reduce engine deposits, and maintain optimal vehicle performance. Look for the TOP TIER Logo or see www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline marketers and applicable countries.

    Regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating (R+M)/2 of 87 or greater is recommended. Do not use gasoline with a posted octane rating of less than 87, as this will result in reduced performance and driveability. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 or greater, the engine needs service.

    ![image 283](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile283.png)

    Do not use any fuel labeled E85 or FlexFuel. Do not use gasoline with ethanol levels greater than 15% by volume.

    ####### Fuels in Foreign Countries

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |. Fuel can spray out if the fuel cap is opened too quickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop, then unscrew the cap all the way.|

    Page 228

    |{ Warning| |---| |Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn violently and can cause injury or death.

    Follow these guidelines to help avoid injuries to you and others:

    . Read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island.

    . Turn off the engine when refueling.

    . Keep sparks, flames, and smoking

    materials away from fuel. . Do not leave the fuel pump

    unattended.

    . Avoid using electronic devices while refueling.

    . Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel.

    . Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel.

    . Before touching the fill nozzle, touch a metallic object to discharge static electricity from your body.

    (Continued)|

    The U.S., Canada, and Mexico post fuel octane ratings in anti-knock index (AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreign country, see Prohibited Fuels 0 226.

    ####### Fuel Additives

    TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highly recommended for use with your vehicle. If your country does not have TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, add ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus−Gasoline to the vehicle’s gasoline fuel tank at every oil change or 15 000 km (9,000 mi), whichever occurs first. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus−Gasoline will help keep your vehicle’s engine fuel deposit free and performing optimally.

    ![image 284](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile284.png)

    ####### Filling the Tank

    An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge 0 95.

    To open the fuel door, push and release the rearward center edge of the door.

    Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to remove. When refueling, hang the fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. Fully insert and latch the fill nozzle, then begin fueling.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Overfilling the fuel tank by more than three clicks of a standard fill nozzle may cause:

    . Vehicle performance issues, including engine stalling and damage to the fuel system.

    . Fuel spills.

    . Under certain conditions, fuel fires.|

    |Caution| |---| |If a new fuel cap is needed, get the right type of cap from your dealer. The wrong type of fuel cap may not fit properly, may turn on the malfunction indicator lamp, and could damage the fuel system and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 99.|

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |. Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Maintain contact until filling is complete.

    . Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.

    . Avoid using electronic devices while pumping fuel.|

    Page 229

    Filling a Portable Fuel Container

    Trailer Towing General Towing Information

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged. To help avoid injury to you and others:

    . Dispense fuel only into approved containers.

    . Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, in a pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground.

    (Continued)|

    Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait five seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the fill nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care 0 305. Reinstall the cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks. Push the fuel door closed until it latches.

    Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle to tow a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer.

    |{ Warning| |---| |If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the fill nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.|

    To tow a disabled vehicle, see Transporting a Disabled Vehicle 0 301. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 302.

    . Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). If the transmission downshifts too often, a lower gear may be selected using Manual Mode See Manual Mode 0 196.

    ####### Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips

    The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.

    |{ Warning| |---| |You can lose control when towing a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load, the vehicle may not stop as expected. You and others could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.|

    If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned off when towing a trailer:

    When towing a trailer:

    Page 230

    . Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

    . Become familiar with and follow all state and local laws that apply to trailer towing. These requirements vary from state to state.

    . Super Cruise Control

    . Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

    . Park Assist

    . State laws may require the use of extended side view mirrors. Even if not required, you should install extended side view mirrors if your visibility is limited or restricted while towing.

    If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned to alert or off when towing a trailer:

    . Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

    . Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

    . Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 mi) of vehicle use to prevent damage to the engine, axle, or other parts.

    . Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

    If equipped with Lane Change Alert (LCA), the LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer.

    ########## Driving with a Trailer

    . It is recommended to perform the first oil change before heavy towing.

    Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

    . During the first 800 km (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle.

    If equipped with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones

    ########## Passing

    Page 231

    The trailer structure, the tires, and the brakes must be all be rated to carry the intended cargo. Inadequate trailer equipment can cause the combination to operate in an unexpected or unsafe manner. Before driving, inspect all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. See Towing Equipment 0 235. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then manually apply the trailer brake controller to check the trailer brakes work. During the trip, occasionally check that the cargo and trailer are secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are working.

    that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.

    More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is much longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Pass on level roadways. Avoid passing on hills if possible.

    |{ Warning| |---| |To prevent serious injury or death from carbon monoxide (CO), when towing a trailer:

    . Do not drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open.

    . Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.

    . Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air. See “Climate Control Systems” in the Index.

    For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust 0 194.|

    ########## Backing Up

    Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move that hand to the right.

    Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

    Towing with a Stability Control System When towing, the stability control system might be heard. The system reacts to vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers. Following Distance

    ########## Making Turns

    |Caution| |---| |Turn more slowly and make wider arcs when towing a trailer to prevent damage to your vehicle. Making very sharp turns could cause the trailer to contact the vehicle.|

    Towing a trailer requires experience. The combination of the vehicle and trailer is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Get used to the handling and braking of the combination by driving on a level road surface before driving on public roads.

    Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving without a trailer. This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.

    ########## Parking on Hills

    ########## Leaving After Parking on a Hill

    Make wider turns than normal when towing, so trailer will not go over soft shoulders, over curbs, or strike road signs, trees, or other objects. Always signal turns well in advance. Do not steer or brake suddenly.

    Page 232

  • 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
  • . Start the engine. . Shift into a gear. . Release the parking brake.

  • 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
  • 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
  • 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |To prevent serious injury or death, always park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface when possible.|

    ########## Driving on Grades

    Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downhill grade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes may overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

    When parking your vehicle and your trailer on a hill:

  • 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
  • 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
  • 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer.
  • 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
  • 5. Release the brake pedal.
  • ########## Maintenance When Trailer Towing

    The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

    The vehicle needs service more often when used to tow trailers. See Maintenance Schedule 0 315. It is especially important to check the automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake system before and during each trip.

    When towing at higher altitudes, engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at lower altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle could show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run, preferably on level ground, with the transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating 0 254.

    Check periodically that all nuts and bolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

    Page 233

    ########## Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing

    The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating 0 254.

    ####### Trailer Towing

    ########## Trailer Weight Ratings

    |{ Warning| |---| |You and others could be seriously injured or killed if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load. The vehicle may be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

    Only tow a trailer if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer.|

    When towing a trailer, the weight of the loaded vehicle and trailer must be within the weight ratings for the vehicle.

    |Caution| |---| |Towing a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To tow a trailer correctly, follow the directions in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.|

    . GCWR: Gross Combined Weight Rating

    . GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

    . Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

    . Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight

    See “Weight-Distributing Hitch Adjustment” under Towing Equipment 0 235 to determine if equalizer bars are required to obtain the maximum trailer weight rating.

    ########## Trailer Weight

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never exceed the towing capacity for your vehicle.|

    Page 234

    ########## Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

    See “Trailer Brakes” under Towing Equipment 0 235 to determine if brakes are required based on your trailer's weight.

    GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any fuel, passengers, cargo, equipment, and accessories. Do not exceed the GCWR for your vehicle. The GCWR for the vehicle is on the tow rating chart later in this section.

    The only way to be sure the weight is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip, getting individual weights for each of these items.

    Safe trailering requires monitoring the weight, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, dimensions of the front of the trailer, and how frequently the vehicle is used to tow a trailer.

    ########## Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

    The gross combined weight can also be confirmed by weighing the truck and trailer on a public scale. The truck and trailer should be loaded for the trip with passengers and cargo.

    To check that the weight of the vehicle and trailer are within the GCWR for the vehicle, follow these steps:

    The maximum trailer weight rating is calculated assuming the tow vehicle has a driver, a front seat passenger, and all required trailering equipment. Weight of additional optional equipment, passengers, and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the trailer weight rating.

  • 1. Start with the "curb weight" from the Trailering Information label.
  • 2. Add the weight of the trailer loaded with cargo and ready for the trip.
  • 3. Add the weight of all passengers.
  • 4. Add the weight of all cargo in the vehicle.
  • 5. Add the weight of hitch hardware such as a draw bar, ball, load equalizer bars, or sway bars.
  • 6. Add the weight of any accessories or aftermarket equipment added to the vehicle.
  • ![image 285](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile285.png)

    Use the tow rating chart to determine how much the trailer can weigh, based on the vehicle model, powertrain and trailering options.

    The resulting weight cannot exceed the GCWR value on the Trailering Information label.

    ########## Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

    Page 235

    For information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 181. When calculating the GVWR with a trailer attached, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the weight the vehicle is carrying.

    |Vehicle| |Maximum Trailer Weight| |*GCWR| |---|---|---|---|---| |1.2L CVT Front-Wheel Drive| |454 kg (1,000 lb)| |2,050 kg (4,519 lb)| |1.3L CVT Front-Wheel Drive| |454 kg (1,000 lb)| |2,070 kg (4,563 lb)| |1.3L AT All-Wheel Drive| |454 kg (1,000 lb)| |2,130 kg (4,695 lb)| |* The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCW passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions|) is the total allowable weight of the completely The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceede|) is the total allowable weight of the completely The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceede|oaded vehicel and trailer including any

    .|oaded vehicel and trailer including any

    .| | | | | | | |Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating The Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating is the allowable trailer tongue weight that the vehicle can support using a conventional trailer hitch. It may be necessary to reduce the overall trailer weight to stay within the maximum trailer tongue weight rating while still maintaining the correct trailer load balance.|![image 286](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile286.png)

    Do not exceed a maximum trailer tongue weight of 45.36 kg (100 lb).|![image 286](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile286.png)

    Do not exceed a maximum trailer tongue weight of 45.36 kg (100 lb).|The trailer tongue weight contributes to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). GVW includes the CURB WEIGHT of your vehicle, any passengers, cargo, equipment and the trailer tongue weight. Vehicle options, passengers, cargo, and equipment reduce the maximum allowable tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which also reduces the maximum allowable trailer weight.

    Trailer Load Balance

    The correct trailer load balance must be maintained to ensure trailer stability. Incorrect load balance is a leading cause of trailer sway.|The trailer tongue weight contributes to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). GVW includes the CURB WEIGHT of your vehicle, any passengers, cargo, equipment and the trailer tongue weight. Vehicle options, passengers, cargo, and equipment reduce the maximum allowable tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which also reduces the maximum allowable trailer weight.

    Trailer Load Balance

    The correct trailer load balance must be maintained to ensure trailer stability. Incorrect load balance is a leading cause of trailer sway.|

    If the trailer tongue weight is too high or too low, it may be possible to rearrange some of the cargo inside of the trailer. Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. Use the shortest hitch extension available to position the hitch ball closer to your vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of the trailer tongue weight on the trailer hitch and the rear axle.

    using a weight-carrying hitch which has a coupler latched to the hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a pintle hook. Other trailers may require a weight-distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight between your vehicle and trailer axles. See “Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight” under Trailer Towing 0 232 for weight limits with various hitch types.

    ![image 287](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile287.png)

    Never attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches. Only use frame-mounted hitches that do not attach to the bumper.

    If a cargo carrier is used in the trailer hitch receiver, choose a carrier that positions the load as close to the vehicle as possible. Make sure the total weight, including the carrier, is no more than half of the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle.

    The trailer tongue weight (1) should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight (2). Some specific trailer types, such as boat trailers, fall outside of this range. Always refer to the trailer owner’s manual for the recommended trailer tongue weight for each trailer. Never exceed the maximum loads for your vehicle, hitch and trailer.

    ########## Tires

    . Do not tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire on the vehicle.

    Ask your dealer for trailering information or assistance.

    . Tires must be properly inflated to support loads while towing a trailer. See Tires 0 276 for instructions on proper tire inflation.

    ####### Towing Equipment Hitches

    After loading the trailer, separately weigh the trailer and then the trailer tongue and calculate the trailer load balance percentage to see if the weights and distribution are appropriate for your vehicle. If the trailer weight is too high, it may be possible to transfer some of the cargo into your vehicle.

    Page 236

    ########## Safety Chains

    Always use the correct hitch equipment for your vehicle. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads can affect the trailer and the hitch.

    Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer, and attach the chains to the holes on the trailer hitch platform. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.

    Proper hitch equipment for your vehicle helps maintain control of the vehicle-trailer combination. Many trailers can be towed

    ########## Trailer Lamps

    Trailer tires deteriorate over time. The trailer tire sidewall will show the week and year the tire was manufactured. Many trailer tire manufacturers recommend replacing tires more than six years old.

    Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

    Always check all trailer lamps are working at the beginning of each trip, and periodically on longer trips.

    ########## Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

    Overloading is another leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs. Never load your trailer with more weight than the tires are designed to support. The load rating is located on the trailer tire sidewall.

    ########## Trailer Brakes

    When properly connected, the trailer turn signals should will illuminate to indicate the vehicle is turning, changing lanes, or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument cluster will illuminate even if the trailer is not properly connected or the bulbs are burned out.

    Loaded trailers over 450 kg (1,000 lb) must be equipped with brake systems and with brakes for each axle. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended.

    Always know the maximum speed rating for the trailer tires before driving. This may be significantly lower than the vehicle tire speed rating. The speed rating may be on the trailer tire sidewall. If the speed rating is not shown, the default trailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h (65 mph).

    ########## Trailer Tires

    State or local regulations may require trailers to have their own braking system if the loaded weight of the trailer exceeds certain minimums that can vary from state to state. Read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly. Never attempt to tap into your vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do, both the vehicle anti-lock brakes and the trailer brakes may not function, which could result in a crash.

    Special Trailer (ST) tires differ from vehicle tires. Trailer tires are designed with stiff sidewalls to help prevent sway and to support heavy loads. These features can make it difficult to determine if the trailer tire pressures are low only based on a visual inspection.

    Always check all trailer tire pressures before each trip when the tires are cool. Low trailer tire pressure is a leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs.

    Page 237

    #### Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment

    The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The Data Link Connector (DLC) is used for vehicle service and Emission Inspection/ Maintenance testing. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 99. A device connected to the DLC — such as an aftermarket fleet or driver-behavior tracking device — may interfere with vehicle systems. This could affect vehicle operation and cause a crash. Such devices may also access information stored in the vehicle’s systems.|

    |Caution| |---| |Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.|

    Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.

    Vehicle Care

    Wiper Blade Replacement ..... .. .. . .. . 260 Windshield Replacement ............... 261 Gas Strut(s) ............................ 261

    Engine Compartment Fuse Block .... . . . 271 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........... 273 Rear Compartment Fuse Block .... . . . . . 275

    General Information General Information ................... 239 California Perchlorate Materials

    ########## Headlamp Aiming

    ########## Wheels and Tires

    Front Headlamp Aiming ..... . .. . .. . .. . 262 Bulb Replacement

    Tires ................................... 276 All-Season Tires ........................ 277 Winter Tires ........................... 277 Tire Sidewall Labeling .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Tire Designations ...................... 279 Tire Terminology and Definitions .... . 280 Tire Pressure ...... ..... ..... ..... ..... 282 Tire Pressure Monitor System .... . . . . . 283 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .... . . 284 Tire Inspection ..... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 287 Tire Rotation ............... ........... 287 When It Is Time for New Tires .... . . . . 288 Buying New Tires ...... ... .. ... .. ... .. 289 Different Size Tires and Wheels .... . . . 290 Uniform Tire Quality Grading .... . . . . . 290 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .... 292 Wheel Replacement ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 292 Tire Chains ............................ 292 If a Tire Goes Flat ..................... 293 Tire Changing ......................... 294 Compact Spare Tire .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

    Requirements ........................ 239

    Accessories and Modifications .... . . . . . 239 Vehicle Checks

    Page 238

    Bulb Replacement ...... ...... ..... .... 262 Halogen Bulbs ......................... 262 LED Lighting ........................... 262 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

    Doing Your Own Service Work .... . . . . 240 Hood .................................. 240 Engine Compartment Overview ........ 242 Engine Oil ............................. 245 Engine Oil Life System .... . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Automatic Transmission Fluid .... . . . . . 248 Engine Air Filter Life System .... . . . . . . 248 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter .... . . . . . . . . . . 248 Cooling System .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Engine Overheating .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Washer Fluid ........... ............... 255 Brakes ................................. 255 Brake Fluid ............................ 256 Battery - North America .... . . . . . . . . . . . 257 All-Wheel Drive ........................ 258 Starter Switch Check .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock

    Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps (Base Level) ................................ 262

    Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps (Uplevel) ............................. 263

    Fog Lamps ............................ 264 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

    Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps (Base Level) ................................ 264

    Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps (Uplevel) ............................. 267

    ########## Electrical System

    Electrical System Overload .... . . . . . . . . 269 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............. 270 Where To Find Fuse Maps for Your

    ########## Jump Starting

    Control Function Check .... . . . . . . . . . . 259 Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism

    Jump Starting - North America .... . . . . 299

    Vehicle .............................. 270

    Check ................................ 259

    #### General Information

    ####### California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

    ########## Towing the Vehicle

    Transporting a Disabled Vehicle .... . . . 301 Recreational Vehicle Towing ........... 302

    Page 239

    For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.

    Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in electronic keys, may contain perchlorate materials. Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.

    ########## Appearance Care

    Exterior Care .......................... 305 Interior Care ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... . 309 Floor Mats ............................. 312

    Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

    ![image 288](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile288.png)

    ####### Accessories and Modifications

    Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, Driver Assistance Systems, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

    Damage to suspension components caused by modifying vehicle height outside of factory settings will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

    ####### Hood

    Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.

    If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 335.

    |{ Warning| |---| |For vehicles with auto engine stop/start, turn the vehicle off before opening the hood. If the vehicle is on, the engine will start when the hood is opened. You or others could be injured.|

    This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61.

    GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Components under the hood can get hot from running the engine. To help avoid the risk of burning unprotected skin, never touch these components until they have cooled, and always use a glove or towel to avoid direct skin contact.|

    Page 240

    If equipped with remote vehicle start, open the hood before performing any service work to prevent remote starting the vehicle accidentally. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 19.

    Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61.

    Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Records 0 322.

    Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work

    |{ Warning| |---| |It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools, or parts. Always follow owner’s manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work.|

    |Caution| |---| |Even small amounts of contamination can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.|

    To close the hood:

    To open the hood:

  • 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and move the secondary hood release lever toward the right side of the vehicle.
  • ![image 289](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile289.png)

  • 3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from its retainer, above the radiator. Securely place the hood prop into the slot on the underside of the hood.
  • 1. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Then, lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the underside of the hood and return the prop to its retainer. The prop rod must click into place when returning it to the retainer to prevent hood damage.
  • 2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in) above the vehicle and release it so it fully latches. Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat the process if necessary.
  • ![image 290](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile290.png)

    Page 241

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not drive the vehicle if the hood is not latched completely. The hood could open fully, block your vision, and cause a crash. You or others could be injured. Always close the hood completely before driving.|

  • Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. It is located on the lower left side of the instrument panel.
  • ![image 291](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile291.png)

    ####### Engine Compartment Overview

    ![image 292](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile292.png)

    1.2L L3 Engine (LIH)

  • 1. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid 0 255.
  • 2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 250.
  • 3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil 0 245.
  • 4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 250.
  • 5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil 0 245.
  • 6. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 248.
  • 7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes 0 255.
  • 8. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 299.
  • 9. Battery - North America 0 257.
  • 10. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 271.
  • 11. Remote Negative (-) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 299
  • ![image 293](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile293.png)

    ########### 1.3L L3 Engine (L3T)

    . Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See “Checking Engine Oil” and “When to Add Engine Oil” in this section.

    oil level on steep grades or too soon after engine shutoff can result in incorrect readings. Accuracy improves when checking a cold engine prior to starting. Remove the dipstick and check the level.

    Page 242

  • 1. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid 0 255.
  • 2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 250.
  • 3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil 0 245.
  • 4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil 0 245.
  • 5. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 250.
  • 6. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 248.
  • 7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes 0 255.
  • 8. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 299.
  • 9. Battery - North America 0 257.
  • 10. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 271.
  • 11. Remote Negative (-) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 299
  • . Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System 0 247.

    . If unable to wait two hours, the engine must be off for at least 15 minutes if the engine is warm, or at least 30 minutes if the engine is not warm. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it with a clean paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

    . Always dispose of engine oil properly. See “What to Do with Used Oil” in this section.

    ########## Checking Engine Oil

    Check the engine oil level regularly, every 650 km (400 mi), especially prior to a long trip. The engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 242 for the location.

    ########## When to Add Engine Oil

    ![image 294](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile294.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |The engine oil dipstick handle may be hot; it could burn you. Use a towel or glove to touch the dipstick handle.|

    ####### Engine Oil

    To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:

    Page 243

    L3T 1.3L L3 Engine

    If a low oil Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays, check the oil level.

    Follow these guidelines:

    . Use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in this section.

    . To get an accurate reading, park the

    vehicle on level ground. Check the engine oil level after the engine has been off for at least two hours. Checking the engine

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle and seek a service professional to remove the excess amount of oil.|

    ![image 295](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile295.png)

    ![image 296](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile296.png)

    See Engine Compartment Overview 0 242 for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

    ########### LIH 1.2L L3 Engine

    |Caution| |---| |Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick and the engine has been off for at least 15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” later in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications 0 324.

    Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range between the MIN and MAX marks. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through.

    ########## Selecting the Right Engine Oil

    Page 244

    ########### Viscosity Grade

    Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 319.

    Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity grade engine oil for 1.3L L3 engine.

    Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade engine oil for 1.2L L3 engine. Cold Temperature Operation: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below −29 °C (−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used for the 1.2L L3 engine. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.

    |Caution| |---| |Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If you find that you have an oil level above the operating range, i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the MAX mark, the engine could be damaged. You should drain out

    (Continued)|

    ########### Specification

    Use full synthetic engine oils that meet the dexos1 specification.

    Engine oils that have been approved by GM as meeting the dexos1 specification are marked with the dexos1 approved logo. See www.gmdexos.com.

    When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, it is recommended to select an oil of the correct specification. See “Specification” earlier in this section.

    ####### Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil

    ########## Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes

    If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.

    Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils meeting the dexos1 specification are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection.

    This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.

    How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system:

    Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

    Page 245

    ########## What to Do with Used Oil

  • 1. Display remaining OIL LIFE on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108. This display shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If 99% is displayed, that means that 99% of the current oil life remains.
  • 2. Press and hold the thumbwheel while the Oil Life display is active. Confirm reset and the oil life will change to 100%.
  • Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

    When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level.

    Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.

    ########## How to Reset the Engine Air Filter Life System

    There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult, you should have this done at your dealer.

    The oil life system can also be reset as follows:

  • 1. Display remaining OIL LIFE on the DIC with the engine off. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level)
  • 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
  • 0 108.
  • 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds.
  • 3. If the display changes to 100%, the system is reset
  • To reset:

  • 1. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
  • 2. Select Air Filter Life on the DIC menu. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108.
  • 3. Press l or the thumbwheel to move to the Reset/Disable display area. Select Reset then press l or press the thumbwheel for several seconds.
  • 4. Press l or the thumbwheel to confirm the reset.
  • Page 246

    Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule 0 315, and be sure to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 319.

    ####### Engine Air Filter Life System

    It equipped, this feature provides the engine air filter’s remaining life and best timing for a change. The timing to change an engine air filter depends on driving and environmental conditions.

    If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure.

    When to Change the Engine Air Filter When the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays a message to replace the engine air filter at the next oil change, follow this timing.

    ####### Automatic Transmission Fluid

    ####### Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

    The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 242.

    ########## How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid

    When the DIC displays a message to replace the engine air filter soon, replace the engine air filter at the earliest convenience.

    It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.

    The system must be reset after the engine air filter is changed.

    If the DIC displays a message to check the engine air filter system, see your dealer.

    ########## When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

    To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

    ![image 297](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile297.png)

    ![image 298](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile298.png)

    Page 247

    If the vehicle is not equipped with the engine air filter life system, see Maintenance Schedule 0 315 for intervals on inspecting and replacing the engine air cleaner/filter.

    ########## How to Inspect/Replace the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

    Do not start the engine or have the engine running with the engine air cleaner/filter housing open. Before removing the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby components are free of dirt and debris. Do not clean the engine air cleaner/filter with water or compressed air.

  • 3. Disassemble the duct.
  • ![image 299](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile299.png)

  • 4. Remove four screws, tilt the cover, and slide it out of the assembly.
  • 1. Remove the two push pins.
  • ![image 300](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile300.png)

  • 2. Press a hook both sides and disassemble two hooks.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |If part replacement is necessary, the part must be replaced with one of the same part number or with an equivalent part. Use of a replacement part without the same fit, form, and function may result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off.|

    ![image 301](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile301.png)

  • 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
  • 6. Lower the cover, slide it into the assembly, then secure with the screws.
  • 7. If equipped, reset the engine air filter life system after replacing the engine air filter. See Engine Air Filter Life System.
  • Page 248

    |Caution| |---| |If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when driving.|

    ########### 1.2L L3 Engine (LIH)

    ![image 302](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile302.png)

    ####### Cooling System

    See Maintenance Schedule 0 315 for replacement intervals.

    The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.

    ########### 1.3L L3 Engine (L3T)

  • 1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
  • 2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)
  • The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating 0 254.

    |Caution| |---| |Do not use anything other than a mix of DEX-COOL coolant that meets GM Standard GMW3420 and clean, drinkable water. Anything else can cause damage to the engine cooling system and the vehicle, which would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |An underhood electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.|

    ########## What to Use

    Page 249

    |{ Warning| |---| |Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.|

    Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not touch heater or radiator hoses, or other engine parts. They can be very hot and can burn you. Do not run the engine if there is a leak; all coolant could leak out. That could cause an engine fire and can burn you. Fix any leak before driving the vehicle.|

    Use a 50/50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. This mixture: . Gives freezing protection down to −37 °C

    ########## Checking Coolant

    (−34 °F), outside temperature.

    The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.

    . Gives boiling protection up to 129 °C (265 °F), engine temperature.

    ########## Engine Coolant

    It is normal to see coolant moving in the upper coolant hose return line when the engine is running.

    . Protects against rust and corrosion.

    The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.

    . Will not damage aluminum parts.

    . Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

    ########## How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank

    Page 250

    |{ Warning| |---| |Spilling coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.|

    ![image 303](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile303.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.|

    |Caution| |---| |Failure to follow the specific coolant fill procedure could cause the engine to overheat and could cause system damage. If coolant is not visible in the surge tank, contact your dealer.|

    Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.|

    If no problem is found, check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at the indicated level mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.

    If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the mark pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant.

    Be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.

    If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add coolant as follows:

  • Verify coolant level after the engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1–6. If the coolant still is not at the proper level when the system cools down again, see your dealer.
  • ![image 304](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile304.png)

    Page 251

    ![image 305](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile305.png)

  • 1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
  • Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the discharge hose.

  • 2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it.
  • |Caution| |---| |If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.|

  • 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the indicated level mark.
  • 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
  • By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the indicated level mark.

  • 5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
  • Automatic Coolant Service Fill Instruction If equipped, this feature assists in filling and removing air from the cooling system after service of components or when coolant is added after being too low. To activate the fill and air removal process:

  • 1. With a cold system, open the surge tank cap and add coolant to the indicated mark on the surge tank.
  • 2. Connect the vehicle to a battery charger.
  • 3. Turn the ignition to Service Mode. See Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 184 or Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 186.
  • 4. Turn off the air conditioning.
  • If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface.

  • 5. Set the parking brake.
  • 6. At the same time, press the accelerator and the brake for two seconds, then release.
  • Page 252

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.|

    Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it is not, do not continue to run the engine. Have the vehicle serviced.

    At the end of the cycle, check the coolant level in the surge tank and add coolant if it is low. Turn off the vehicle, allow the Engine Control Module (ECM) to go to sleep, about two minutes, and repeat Steps 3-7.

    If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment

    If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:

    |Caution| |---| |Do not run the engine if there is a leak in the engine cooling system. This can cause a loss of all coolant and can damage the system and vehicle. Have any leaks fixed right away.|

    Listen for pump activation and movement of the control valves while watching the level of the coolant in the surge tank. If the tank empties, turn the ignition off, carefully remove the surge tank cap, refill to the indicated mark, and repeat Steps 4-7. The fill and air removal process will run for approximately 10 minutes.

    . Climbs a long hill on a hot day

    . Stops after high-speed driving

    If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:

    If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment

    ####### Engine Overheating

  • 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
  • 2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary.
  • 3. When it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral), and let the engine idle.
  • |{ Warning|

    Page 253

    |---| |Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system,

    (Continued)|

    The vehicle has an engine coolant temperature gauge to warn of the engine overheating. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 96.

    If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program

  • 0 330.
  • ########## Adding Washer Fluid

    If the engine coolant temperature gauge is no longer in the overheat zone, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally and have the cooling system checked for proper fill and function.

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water.

    . Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.|

    ![image 306](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile306.png)

    Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 242 for reservoir location. Brakes

    If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

    If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.

    |Caution| |---| |. Do not use washer fluid that contains any type of water repellent coating. This can cause the wiper blades to chatter or skip, and may also clog the washer nozzle.

    . Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.

    . Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.

    (Continued)|

    Disc brake linings have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake linings are worn and new linings are needed. The sound can come and go or can be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.

    ####### Washer Fluid What to Use

    Page 254

    When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

    |{ Warning| |---| |The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.|

    ########## Replacing Brake System Parts

    There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir may go down:

    |Caution| |---| |Continuing to drive with worn-out brake linings could result in costly brake repairs.|

    Always replace brake system parts with new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes may not work properly. The braking performance can change in many ways if the wrong brake parts are installed or if parts are improperly installed.

    . Normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up.

    . A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed. With a leak, the brakes will not work well.

    Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied, clearing up following several applications. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

    ####### Brake Fluid

    Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it.

    ![image 307](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile307.png)

    Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake linings for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications. See Capacities and Specifications 0 324.

    Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

    The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 242 for the location of the reservoir.

    Page 255

    Brake pads should be replaced as complete axle sets.

    ########## Brake Pedal Travel

    |{ Warning| |---| |If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.|

    See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service may be required.

    ########### Checking Brake Fluid

    With the vehicle in P (Park) on a level surface, the brake fluid level should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the brake fluid reservoir.

    ####### Battery - North America

    When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 100.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.|

    The original equipment battery is maintenance free. Do not remove the cap and do not add fluid.

    Brake fluid absorbs water over time which degrades the effectiveness of the brake fluid. Replace brake fluid at the specified intervals to prevent increased stopping distance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 315.

    Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. For replacement of the battery, see your dealer.

    See the warning on the back cover. Vehicle Storage

    ########### What to Add

    ########## Stop/Start System

    Page 256

    Use only GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid from a clean, sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 319.

    If equipped, the Stop/Start system shuts off the engine to help conserve fuel. See Stop/ Start System 0 189. It has an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) 12-volt battery. Installation of a standard 12-volt battery will result in reduced 12-volt battery life.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting - North America 0 299 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |The wrong or contaminated brake fluid could result in damage to the brake system. This could result in the loss of braking leading to a possible injury. Always use the proper GM approved brake fluid.|

    When using a 12-volt battery charger on the 12-volt AGM battery, some chargers have an AGM battery setting on the charger. If available, use the AGM setting on the charger to limit charge voltage to 14.8 volts.

    Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down.

    |{ Warning| |---| |WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead compounds, which are known to the

    (Continued)|

    |Caution| |---| |If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Immediately wash off any painted surface.|

    Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.

    ########## Negative Battery Cable Disconnection

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |. Tighten the nut with a hand tool. Do not use an impact wrench or power tools to tighten the nut.

    The vehicle could be damaged if these guidelines are not followed.|

    Page 257

    ![image 308](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile308.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Before disconnecting the negative battery cable, turn off all features, turn the ignition off, and remove the key, if equipped, from the vehicle. If this is not done, you or others could be injured, and the vehicle could be damaged.|

    |Caution| |---| |Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on the nut that secures the negative battery cable to the vehicle. This could damage the vehicle.|

    |Caution| |---| |If the battery is disconnected with the ignition on or the vehicle in Retained Accessory Power (RAP), the OnStar back-up battery will be permanently discharged and will need to be replaced.|

  • 3. Loosen the negative battery cable nut (1).
  • 4. Remove the negative battery cable (2) from the battery.
  • 1. Install the negative battery cable (2) to the battery.
  • 2. Install the negative battery cable nut (1) and tighten.
  • 3. Turn the ignition on. All-Wheel Drive Transfer Case
  • Negative Battery Cable Reconnection

    |Caution| |---| |When reconnecting the battery:

    . Use the original nut from the vehicle to secure the negative battery cable. Do not use a different nut. If you need a replacement nut, see your dealer.

    (Continued)|

  • 1. Make sure the lamps, features, and accessories are turned off.
  • Page 258

  • 2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key, if equipped.
  • Under normal driving conditions, transfer case fluid does not require maintenance unless there is a fluid leak or unusual noise. If required, have the transfer case serviced by your dealer.

    ####### Starter Switch Check

    ####### Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check

    ####### Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check

    |{ Warning| |---| |When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.|

  • 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle.
  • 2. Apply both the parking brake and the regular brake.
  • Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

  • 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service.
  • 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
  • 2. Apply the parking brake. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
  • Page 259

  • 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.
  • Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.

    . To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

    . To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.

    Contact your dealer if service is required.

    ####### Wiper Blade Replacement

    ########## Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

    ![image 309](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile309.png)

    ![image 310](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile310.png)

    Windshield wiper blades should be replaced periodically. See Maintenance Schedule

  • 0 315.
  • Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 320.

    Front Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the front wiper blades:

  • 1. Lift the wiper arm from the windshield until no further movement is possible.
  • |Caution| |---| |Allowing the wiper arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper arm to touch the windshield.|

  • 2. Press the release button on the top side of the wiper and pull the wiper blade out of the end of the wiper arm.
  • Page 260

  • 3. Install the wiper blade connector by sliding it into the end of the wiper arm until the button on the wiper blade clicks into place.
  • 4. Place the wiper arm and wiper blade back on the windshield.
  • 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the rear windshield.
  • 2. Push the wiper blade away from the wiper arm.
  • 3. Once the blade pin disengages from the wiper arm, remove the wiper blade by sliding the blade off the arm.
  • 4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to install a new wiper blade.
  • |Caution| |---| |Damage may occur if the wiper blades are not in contact with the windshield before turning on the wiper system.|

    ####### Windshield Replacement Driver Assistance Systems

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |enough force. If struts are failing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have the vehicle serviced.|

    ![image 311](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile311.png)

    When a windshield replacement is needed and the vehicle is equipped with a front-looking camera sensor for the Driver Assistance Systems, the windshield must be installed according to GM specifications for these systems to work properly. If it is not, there may be unexpected behavior and/or messages from these systems.

    |Caution| |---| |Do not apply tape or hang any objects from gas struts. Also do not push down or pull on gas struts. This may cause damage to the vehicle.|

    ####### Gas Strut(s)

    Trunk

    See Maintenance Schedule 0 315.

    Page 261

    Your vehicle may be equipped with gas strut(s) to provide assistance in lifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position.

    ![image 312](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile312.png)

    ![image 313](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile313.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the gas struts that hold open the hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, you or others could be seriously injured. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service immediately. Visually inspect the gas struts for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage periodically. Check to make sure the hood/trunk/liftgate is held open with

    (Continued)|

    Liftgate

    Hood

    #### Headlamp Aiming Front Headlamp Aiming

    Halogen Bulbs

    ####### Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps (Base Level)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.|

    Headlamp aim has been preset and should need no further adjustment.

    Headlamp Assembly

    If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer.

    ![image 314](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile314.png)

    LED Lighting

    Page 262

    #### Bulb Replacement

    This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.

    For the proper type of replacement bulbs, or any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.

    |Caution| |---| |Do not replace incandescent bulbs with aftermarket LED replacement bulbs. This can cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.|

    DRL and Parking Lamps

    The vehicle has LED DRL and Parking lamps on the headlamp assembly.

    This vehicle may be equipped with desiccant to reduce fogging inside the headlamp due to moisture. If fogging continues for a long time, see your dealer for service.

    ####### Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps (Uplevel)

    ########## Low-beam Headlamp, High-beam Headlamp and Front Turn Signal Lamps

    Low-Beam Headlamp and High-Beam Headlamp

  • 1. Remove the headlamp bulb access cover.
  • 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull straight back.
  • 3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the bulb.
  • 4. Install the new bulb in the headlamp assembly by turning clockwise.
  • 5. Reconnect the wiring harness connector.
  • 6. Install the headlamp bulb access cover. Front Turn Signal Lamp
  • ![image 315](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile315.png)

    Headlamp Assembly

    Page 263

    ![image 316](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile316.png)

  • 1. Remove the bulb socket from the headlamp assembly.
  • 2. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket by pulling it straight out.
  • 3. Insert a new bulb into the bulb socket.
  • 4. Install the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly.
  • ########### Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  • 1. Front Turn Signal Lamp
  • 2. High-beam Headlamp
  • 3. Low-beam Headlamp
  • Low-beam Headlamp, DRL and Parking Lamps

    The vehicle has LED low-beam headlamps, DRL and Parking lamps on the headlamp assembly.

    ####### Fog Lamps Front Fog Lamp

    ########## High-beam Headlamp and Front Turn Signal Lamps

  • Install the headlamp bulb access cover. Front Turn Signal Lamp
  • ![image 317](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile317.png)

  • 1. Remove the bulb socket from the headlamp assembly.
  • 2. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket by pulling it straight out.
  • 3. Insert a new bulb into the bulb socket.
  • 4. Install the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly.
  • ![image 318](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile318.png)

    ########## Sidemarker

    Page 264

    ![image 319](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile319.png)

    ########### Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

    The vehicle has LED front fog lamps.

  • 1. Front Turn Signal Lamp
  • 2. High-beam Headlamp High-Beam Headlamp
  • ####### Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps (Base Level)

  • 1. Remove the headlamp bulb access cover.
  • 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull straight back.
  • 3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the bulb.
  • 4. Install the new bulb in the headlamp assembly by turning clockwise.
  • 5. Reconnect the wiring harness connector.
  • |Caution| |---| |Improper lamp assembly removal and installation can cause le aks and water intrusion which may cause damage to

    (Continued)|

    The vehicle has an LED sidemarker lamp.

  • 2. Remove two nuts and pull the taillamp assembly to detach it from vehicle body. Take care that the cable duct remains in place.
  • ![image 320](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile320.png)

  • 3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket and replace with a new bulb.
  • 4. Insert the bulb socket and attach the plug connector.
  • 5. Reassemble the cover.
  • Page 265

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |the taillamp. Do not remove the taillamp assembly to replace a bulb. Use the tailgate opening to access the bulb.|

    ![image 321](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile321.png)

    ########## Tailgate Inboard Taillamp

    ![image 322](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile322.png)

  • Remove the bulb access door on tailgate.
  • ![image 323](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile323.png)

    ########### Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  • 1. Taillamp
  • 2. Back-up lamp
  • ########## Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal, and Sidemarker Lamp

    ![image 324](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile324.png)

    ![image 325](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile325.png)

    ![image 326](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile326.png)

  • 1. Remove and retain both screws attaching the taillamp assembly to the vehicle body.
  • 2. Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to detach it from the vehicle body. Take care that the cable duct remains in place.
  • 3. Remove the bulb socket from the taillamp assembly.
  • 4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket by pulling it straight out.
  • 5. Insert a new bulb into the bulb socket.
  • Page 266

  • 6. Install the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly.
  • 7. Install the taillamp assembly to the vehicle body with the two screws.
  • ########### Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  • 1. Stoplamp/Taillamp
  • 2. Turn signal lamp
  • 3. Sidemarker (LED)
  • ####### Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps (Uplevel)

    ############ 1. Remove the bulb access door on tailgate.

    ![image 327](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile327.png)

    ![image 328](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile328.png)

    |Caution| |---| |Improper lamp assembly removal and installation can cause le aks and water intrusion which may cause damage to the taillamp. Do not remove the taillamp assembly to replace a bulb. Use the tailgate opening to access the bulb.|

    ########### Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

    ########## Tailgate Inboard Taillamp

    ############ 2. Remove two nuts and pull the taillampassembly to detach it from vehicle body.Take care that the cable duct remains inplace.

  • 1. Taillamp (LED)
  • 2. Back-up lamp
  • The taillamps are LED. To replace, see your dealer.

    Page 267

    ![image 329](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile329.png)

  • 1. Remove and retain both screws attaching the taillamp assembly to the vehicle body.
  • 2. Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to detach it from the vehicle body. Take care that the cable duct remains in place.
  • ![image 330](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile330.png)

  • 3. Remove the bulb socket from the taillamp assembly.
  • 4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket by pulling it straight out.
  • 5. Insert a new bulb into the bulb socket.
  • 6. Install the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly.
  • 7. Install the taillamp assembly to the vehicle body with the two screws.
  • ![image 331](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile331.png)

    ![image 332](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile332.png)

    ########### Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

  • 3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket and replace with a new bulb.
  • 4. Insert the bulb socket and attach the plug connector.
  • 5. Reassemble the cover.
  • 1. Stoplamp/Taillamp (LED)
  • 2. Turn signal lamp
  • ![image 333](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile333.png)

    ########## Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal, and Sidemarker Lamp

    The Stoplamps and taillamps are LED. To replace, see your dealer.

    #### Electrical System Electrical System Overload

    Page 268

    ![image 334](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile334.png)

    ![image 335](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile335.png)

    The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload.

    When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed. This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems.

    ![image 336](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile336.png)

    ![image 337](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile337.png)

    Fuses and circuit breakers protect power devices in the vehicle.

    If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.

    To check a fuse, look at the band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a fuse of the identical size and rating.

  • Use the fuse puller to remove the fuse from the top or side, as shown above.
  • ########## Replacing a Blown Fuse

  • 1. Turn off the vehicle.
  • 2. Locate the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse block.
  • If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.

  • 4. If the fuse must be replaced immediately, borrow a replacement fuse with the same amperage from the fuse block. Choose a vehicle feature that is not needed to safely operate the vehicle. Repeat Steps 2-3.
  • 5. Insert the replacement fuse into the empty slot of the blown fuse.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |Installation or use of fuses that do not meet GM’s original fuse specifications is dangerous. The fuses could fail, and result in a fire. You or others could be injured or killed, and the vehicle could be damaged.|

    Page 269

    ####### Fuses and Circuit Breakers

    The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems. See Accessories and Modifications 0 239 and

    At the next opportunity, see your dealer to replace the blown fuse.

    General Information 0 239. To check or replace a blown fuse, see Electrical System Overload 0 269.

    |{ Danger| |---| |Fuses and circuit breakers are marked with their ampere rating. Do not exceed the specified amperage rating when replacing fuses and circuit breakers. Use of an oversized fuse or circuit breaker can result in a vehicle fire. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.|

    ########## Headlamp Wiring

    An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.

    ####### Where To Find Fuse Maps for Your Vehicle

    A detailed fuse map and fuse locations for the vehicle are on the inside of the cover of the fuse compartments. For the location of fuse blocks, see Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 271, Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0 273, and Rear Compartment Fuse Block 0 275.

    ########## Windshield Wipers

    If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart.

    ![image 338](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile338.png)

    Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.

    ####### Engine Compartment Fuse Block

    To view the fuse maps online, scan the QR code on the back of the printed Owner’s Manual or visit:

    ![image 339](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile339.png)

    Page 270

    ![image 340](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile340.png)

    For the United States : www.mychevrolet.com

    For Canada : mychevrolet.ca

    The maps are in the same order as the fuse compartment locations described in your Owner’s Manual. The number/letter label prefix is for technician purposes only.

    To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clip and lift it up.

    |Caution| |---| |Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.|

    The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.

    |Micro Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |F02|CLSTR| |F03|N/A| |F06|OSRVM DEFOG| |F07|L/GATE RELSE| |F08|AHL AFL MTR1| |F09|VENT SEAT| |F10|N/A| |F11|AHL AFL MTR2| |F12|N/A| |F14|ISRVM REAR VIEW CAMERA| |F15|DEFC MDL RUN/CRNK| |F16|HDLP LVL| |F17|N/A-DSL| |F18|FTZM| |F19|N/A| |F20|N/A|

    Page 271

    |F22|TRLR ST/TRN LT - TRLR| |F24|ESCL| |F25|ECM TCM RUN/CRNK|

    |Micro Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |F26|FRT/REAR WSW PUMP| |F27|IGN COIL-GAS ECM PT3-DSL| |F28|AERO SH| |F29|AHL AFL MDL| |F31|ECM PT2| |F32|ENG COMP2| |F33|RVC| |F34|FRT FOG LP| |F35|ENG COMP1| |F36|ECM PT1| |F38|TRLR PRK LAMP - TRLR| |F40|AUX WATER PUMP| |F41|REAR WPR| |F42|HORN| |F44|REAR WPR PRK| |F45|A/C CLTCH| |F46|N/A| |F47|ECM BATT-GAS ECM BATT-DSL|

    |Micro Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |F49|HDLP HI LH| |F50|N/A| |F51|HDLP HI RH| |F52|NOX SOOT SNSR -DSL TRLR ST/TRN RT - TRLR| |F53|N/A| |F54|PEPS| |F56|CNSTR VENT SOL-GAS / DEFC MDL-DSL|

    Page 272

    |F57|DEFC MDL-DSL| |F58|TCM BATT|

    |Spare Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |SF01|SPARE| |SF02|SPARE| |SF03|SPARE| |SF04|SPARE| |SF05|SPARE| |SF06|SPARE|

    ####### Instrument Panel Fuse Block

    |ET Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |F48|GLOW PLUG|

    |M-case Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |F61|N/A|

    ![image 341](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile341.png)

    |J-Case Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |F01|N/A| |F05|N/A| |F13|REAR WNDW DEFOG| |F21|E-BOOST PWR1| |F23|STRTR PINION| |F59|N/A|

    Page 273

    |F62|FUEL HTR DSL| |F63|N/A|

    |Mini Relays|Usage| |---|---| |K03|RUN/CRNK| |K04|REAR DEFOG| |K06|STRTR PINION| |K08|PT RLY| |K09|FUEL HTR DSL|

    |HC Micro Relays|Usage| |---|---| |K01|N/A| |K02|N/A| |K05|STRTR SOL| |K07|A/C CNTRL| |K10|N/A|

    The instrument panel fuse block is on the underside of the driver side instrument panel. To access the fuses, remove the storage compartment.

    |M-case Fuses|Usage| |---|---| |F04|FRT WPR| |F30|STRTR SOL| |F37|AUX OIL PUMP| |F39|N/A| |F43|PWR WNDW RT| |F55|PWR WNDW LT| |F60|DEF HTR|

    |Ultra Micro Relays|Usage|

    Page 274

    |---|---| |K11|N/A|

    |Fuse|Usage| |---|---| |F01|LUMBAR| |F02|SUNROOF| |F03|VBAT_3| |F04|VBAT_7| |F05|VBAT_6| |F06|AUTO HVAC| |F07|CGM| |F08|ST_WHL_HTR| |F09|DISPLAY| |F10|RADIO| |F11|ONSTAR (ERA)| |F12|PARK_ASSIST| |F13|MAN. HVAC| |F14|WL CHARGER| |F15|VBAT_2| |F16|VBAT_1| |F17|SWC BKLT| |F18|N/A| |F19|N/A|

    ![image 342](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile342.png)

    ![image 343](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile343.png)

    ############ To remove the storage compartment, use the hole at the top to pull the compartment outward from the instrument panel.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Be careful of injuries to your fingers and nails when using the holes to remove the storage compartment.|

    Page 275

    ####### Rear Compartment Fuse Block

    |Fuse|Usage| |---|---| |F20|CLOCK SPRING| |F21|OCC SEN| |F22|DLC| |F23|SDM| |F24|IGN_SW/ESCL| |F25|PWR L-GATE MDL| |F26|SEC FUSE-2| |F27|PWR SEAT CO-DR| |F28|VBAT_8| |F29|DC-DC AT| |F30|PWR L-GATE MDL| |F31|OSRVM| |F32|FRT HS PWR-1| |F33|VBAT_4| |F34|FRT HS PWR-2| |F35|AMPLIFIER| |F36|ONSTAR (TCP)| |F37|PWR SEAT DR| |F38|DC-DC_400W|

    |Fuse|Usage| |---|---| |F39|SEC FUSE-1| |F40|HVAC_BLOWER|

    ![image 344](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile344.png)

    |Circuit Breaker|Usage|

    Page 276

    |---|---| |CB1|N/A| |CB2|APO|

    |Relay|Usage| |---|---| |K01|i-RAP_ACC| |K02|RUN| |K03|LOGISTICS| |K04|N/A| |K05|N/A| |K06|N/A|

    The rear compartment fuse block is behind a cover on the driver side of the rear compartment. To access the fuses, remove the cover.

    |Fuse|Usage| |---|---| |F01|N/A| |F02|RDCM ELEC| |F03|N/A| |F04|N/A| |F05|DC/AC INVERTER| |F06|N/A| |F07|RDCM| |F08|RR SEAT HEAT PWR1| |F09|N/A| |F10|RR SEAT HEAT PWR2| |F11|N/A| |F12|N/A| |F13|N/A| |F14|N/A| |F15|N/A| |F16|N/A| |F17|N/A|

    Page 277

    |F18|N/A| |F19|N/A|

    |Fuse|Usage| |---|---| |F20|N/A| |F21|N/A|

    ![image 345](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile345.png)

    |Circuit Breakers|Usage| |---|---| |CB1|N/A|

    |Relays|Usage| |---|---| |K01|N/A| |K02|N/A| |K03|N/A| |K04|N/A| |K05|N/A|

    #### Wheels and Tires Tires

    Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire

    warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.

    equipment all-season tires can be identified by the last two characters of this TPC code, which will be “MS.”

    |Warning (Continued)| |---|

    Page 278

    |. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.

    . Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.

    . Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only your dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.

    . Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.|

    Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires 0 277.

    |{ Warning| |---| |. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.

    . Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    . Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.

    . Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact — such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

    (Continued)|

    ####### Winter Tires

    This vehicle was not originally equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires 0 289.

    ####### All-Season Tires

    With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.

    This vehicle may come with all-season tires. These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces and weather conditions. Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. Original

  • (3) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
  • DOT Tire Date of Manufacture : The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2020 would have a 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week 01 is the first full week (Sunday through Saturday) of each year.

  • (4) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
  • If using winter tires:

    ![image 346](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile346.png)

    . Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions.

    . Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires.

    Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's maximum speed capability.

    Page 279

    Passenger Tire Example

    ####### Tire Sidewall Labeling

  • (1) Tire Size : The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration in this section.
  • (2) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
  • Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The examples show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

  • (5) Tire Inflation : The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Tire Pressure 0 282.
  • (6) Tire Size : A combination of letters and numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. The letter “T” as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only.
  • (7) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. Tire Designations Tire Size
  • (5) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
  • (6) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: tread wear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 290.
  • (7) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.
  • (1) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
  • (2) Temporary Use Only : The compact spare tire or temporary use tire should not be driven at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire 0 298 and If a Tire Goes Flat 0 293.
  • (3) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
  • (4) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.
  • ![image 347](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile347.png)

    The example shows a typical passenger vehicle tire size.

    Compact Spare Tire Example

  • (4) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction.
  • (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches.
  • (6) Service Description : These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Tire Terminology and Definitions
  • Page 280

    Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

    ![image 348](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile348.png)

    Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

    Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

  • (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter "P" as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
  • (2) Tire Width : The 3-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
  • (3) Aspect Ratio : A 2-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item (3) of the illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
  • Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

    Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure 0 282.

    DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.

    Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch).

    Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

    Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

    Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

    GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    Occupant Distribution : Designated seating positions.

    Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

    Page 281

    Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.

    GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

    Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

    Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

    Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure.

    Traction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

    Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

    Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

    Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

    Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

    Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. See

    Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire Pressure 0 282 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

    When It Is Time for New Tires 0 288. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards) : A tire information system

    that provides consumers with ratings

    ####### Tire Pressure

    for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading

    Page 282

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |. Needless damage from road hazards|

    Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:

    . Tire overloading and overheating, which could lead to a blowout

    . Premature or irregular wear

    . Poor handling

    . Reduced fuel economy for internal combustion engine vehicles

    . Reduced range for electric vehicles

    Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:

    . Unusual wear . Poor handling . Rough ride

    (Continued)|

    The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

  • 0 290.
  • Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

    How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

    Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Label” under Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    ########## When to Check

    Check the pressure of the tires once a month or more. Do not forget the spare, if the vehicle has one. The compact spare cold tire pressure should be at 420 kPa (60 psi). See Compact Spare Tire 0 298.

    Put the valve caps back on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture. Use only valve caps designed for the vehicle by GM. TPMS sensors could be damaged and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

    ########## How to Check

    As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

    Page 283

    Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi).

    Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces energy efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

    ####### Tire Pressure Monitor System

    The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

    Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure is high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air.

    Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

    Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

    Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This

    Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge.

    about the DIC operation and displays, see Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 106 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 108.

    the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

    sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

    When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

    ![image 349](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile349.png)

    The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure. A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure 0 282.

    When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 284. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335. Tire Pressure Monitor Operation

    The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition, but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection 0 287, Tire Rotation 0 287, and Tires 0 276.

    Page 284

    A message to check the pressure in a specific tire may display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message, if equipped, come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, it may be possible to view the tire pressure levels. For additional information and details

    This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor

    |Caution| |---| |Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor

    (Continued)|

    is performed successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.

    If the TPMS is not functioning properly, it cannot detect or signal a low tire pressure condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message, if equipped, come on and stay on.

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.|

    . The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message, if equipped, should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.

    ########## Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

    This feature provides visual and audible alerts outside the vehicle to help when inflating an underinflated tire to the recommended cold tire pressure.

    ########## TPMS Malfunction Light and Message

    The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light, defined above, flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message may also display. The malfunction light and DIC warning message, if equipped, come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:

    . One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message, if equipped, should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.

    When the low tire pressure warning light comes on:

  • 1. Park the vehicle in a safe, level place.
  • 2. Set the parking brake firmly.
  • 3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
  • 4. Add air to the tire that is underinflated. The turn signal lamp will flash. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once and the turn signal lamp will stop flashing and briefly turn solid.
  • Page 285

    . Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires 0 289.

    . One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message, if equipped, should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process

    . Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

    Repeat these steps for all underinflated tires that have illuminated the low tire pressure warning light.

    The TPMS will not activate the tire fill alert properly under the following conditions: . There is interference from an external

    next ignition cycle. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS relearn tool, in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear. See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS relearn tool can also be purchased. See Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Activation Tool at www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or call 1-800-GM TOOLS (1-800-468-6657).

    |{ Warning| |---| |Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Do not exceed the maximum pressure listed on the tire sidewall.

    See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 278 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.|

    device or transmitter.

    . The air pressure from the inflation device

    is not sufficient to inflate the tire. . There is a malfunction in the TPMS.

    . There is a malfunction in the horn or turn signal lamps.

    If the tire is overinflated by more than 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will sound multiple times and the turn signal lamp will continue to flash for several seconds after filling stops.

    . The identification code of the TPMS

    sensor is not registered to the system. . The battery of the TPMS sensor is low.

    There are two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer, the matching process stops and must be restarted.

    If the tire fill alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back or forward and try again. If the tire fill alert feature is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

    Page 286

    To release and correct the pressure, while the turn signal lamp is still flashing, briefly press the center of the valve stem. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once.

    The TPMS sensor matching process is:

  • 1. Set the parking brake.
  • 2. Turn the ignition on without starting the vehicle or place the vehicle in Service Mode. See Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 184 or Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 186.
  • 3. Use o / p to select the Vehicle in the Base Level Driver Information Center (DIC), or use o / p to select the Info page in the Uplevel Driver Information Center (DIC).
  • ########## TPMS Sensor Matching Process

    If the turn signal lamp does not flash within 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, the tire fill alert has not been activated or is not working.

    Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the vehicle’s tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. Also, the TPMS sensor matching process should be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message, if equipped, should go off at the

    If the hazard warning flashers are on, the tire fill alert visual feedback will not work properly.

    . The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

  • identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARN or TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off.
  • 12. Turn the vehicle off.
  • 13. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
  • 4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the Tire Pressure Learn Menu Item (Base DIC) or the Tire Pressure Menu Item screen (Uplevel DIC).
  • 5. Press and hold the thumbwheel to begin the sensor matching process. A message requesting acceptance of the process may display.
  • 6. If requested, press the thumbwheel again to confirm the selection. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and the TIRE LEARN or TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
  • 7. Start with the driver side front tire.
  • 8. Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall, near the valve stem. Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position.
  • 9. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 8.
  • 10. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 8.
  • 11. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 8. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor
  • ####### Tire Rotation

    Page 287

    Tires should be rotated according to the interval specified in the Maintenance Schedule. See Maintenance Schedule 0 315.

    ####### Tire Inspection

    Tires are rotated to achieve a more uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.

    We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month.

    Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 288 and Wheel Replacement 0 292.

    Replace the tire if:

    . The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.

    . There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.

    . The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

    . The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

    Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications 0 324, and “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire Changing 0 294.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not apply grease to the wheel mounting surface, wheel conical seats, or the wheel nuts or bolts. Grease applied to these areas could cause a wheel to become loose or come off, resulting in a crash.|

    ![image 350](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile350.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.|

    ####### When It Is Time for New Tires

    Page 288

    Factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.

    Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires.

    ![image 351](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile351.png)

    Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.

    Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure 0 282 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    Lightly coat the inner diameter of the wheel hub opening with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust buildup.

    Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation

  • 0 284.
  • Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only

    TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 278 for additional information. GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires should wear out at about the same time. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle. See Tire Rotation 0 287.

    1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining. See Tire Inspection 0 287 and Tire Rotation 0 287.

    aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.

    The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. To identify the age of a tire, use the tire manufacture date, which is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2020 would have a 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week 01 is the first full week (Sunday through Saturday) of each year.

    Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.

    ####### Buying New Tires

    GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed, GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.

    GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's

    Page 289

    |{ Warning| |---| |Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or

    (Continued)|

    ########## Vehicle Storage

    Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow

    Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tires’ maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating.

    stability control, or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Mixing tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on the vehicle), brands, tread patterns, or types may cause loss of vehicle control, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tire on all wheels.|

    If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires.

    The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    See Buying New Tires 0 289 and Accessories and Modifications 0 239.

    |{ Warning| |---|

    Page 290

    |Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.|

    ####### Uniform Tire Quality Grading

    The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires.

    Different Size Tires and Wheels If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, electronic

    ########## Temperature

    conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

    The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter tires, compact spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

    The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

    While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

    ########## Traction

    The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

    Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

    All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades.

    ########## Treadwear

    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

    ####### Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

    Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.

    Page 291

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.|

    Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

    The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

    |Caution| |---| |The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.|

    Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air and cause loss of control, resulting in a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.|

    ####### Tire Chains

    |{ Warning| |---| |If the vehicle has 225/60R17 or 225/55R18 size tires, do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash. Use another type of traction device only

    (Continued)|

    ####### Wheel Replacement

    Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown.

    (Continued)|

    Page 292

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle's tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To avoid vehicle damage, drive slow and readjust or remove the traction device if it contacts the vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. If traction devices are used, install them on the front tires.|

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.|

    ####### If a Tire Goes Flat

    It is unusual for a tire to blow out while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. See Tires 0 276. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there is ever a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

    |Caution| |---| |If the vehicle is equipped with a tire size other than 225/60R17 or 225/55R18, use tire chains only where legal and only when necessary. Use low profile chains that add no more than 12 mm thickness to the tire tread and inner sidewall. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the front axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the rear axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If the chains contact the vehicle, stop and

    (Continued)|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.|

    If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.

    A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.

    ####### Tire Changing Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

    Page 293

    If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 0 115.

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |5. Place wheel blocks, if equipped, on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed.|

    The spare tire and tools are located under the load floor in the rear of the vehicle.

    If your vehicle is loaded at or near maximum cargo capacity, it may be difficult to fit the jack under the vehicle due to the environment (shoulder slope, road debris, etc.). Removal of some weight may improve the ability to fit the jack under the vehicle

    ![image 352](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile352.png)

    When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), use the following example as a guide to assist in the placement of the wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

    ![image 353](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile353.png)

  • at the correct jacking location.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

    1. Set the parking brake firmly.
    2. Put the vehicle in P (Park).
    3. Turn the vehicle off and do not restart the vehicle while it is raised.
    4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.


    (Continued)|

    ########### Without Subwoofer

  • 1. Tow Eye
  • 2. Jack
  • 3. Wrench
  • 4. Strap
  • 5. Funnel
  • 1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)
  • Page 294

  • 2. Flat Tire
  • The following information explains how to repair or change a tire.

    ![image 354](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile354.png)

    ########### With Subwoofer

  • 1. Tow Eye
  • 2. Wrench
  • 3. Jack
  • 4. Strap
  • 5. Wing Nut To access the spare tire and tools:
  • Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 0 24.
  • ![image 355](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile355.png)

  • 2. Lift and move the load floor into the holding slots. The load floor will stay in the open position.
  • 3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to remove the spare tire.
  • 4. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools and place them near the tire being changed.
  • ########## Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

  • Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 293.
  • ![image 356](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile356.png)

  • Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.
  • ![image 357](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile357.png)

  • 7. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to remove them.
  • Page 295

  • 8. Remove the flat tire.
  • 3. Place the jack at the position marked with a half circle.
  • ![image 358](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile358.png)

  • 4. Place the hex tube end of the wrench over the hex head of the jack to attach it.
  • 5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until the lift head is firmly contacting the proper lifting point nearest the flat tire.
  • |{ Warning| |---| |Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Getting under a vehicle when it is lifted on a jack is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.|

  • Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
  • Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
  • ![image 359](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile359.png)

    Page 296

    ![image 360](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile360.png)

    |{ Warning| |---| |Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications 0 324 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.|

  • 9. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel.
  • 10. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
  • 11. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Turn each nut clockwise, by hand, until the wheel is held against the hub.
  • Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel wrench in a crisscross sequence, as shown.
  • |Caution| |---| |Wheel covers will not fit on the vehicle's compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be damaged.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash.|

    |Caution| |---| |Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications 0 324 for the wheel nut torque specification.|

    ####### Compact Spare Tire

    ########## Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

    ![image 361](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile361.png)

    Page 297

    |{ Warning| |---| |Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling. This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at a time.|

    ########### Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

    If this vehicle has a compact spare tire, it was fully inflated when new; however, it can lose air over time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 420 kPa (60 psi).

  • 1. Return the jack and tools to their original storage location.
  • 2. Move the load floor back to its original position.
  • 3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, in the rear storage compartment.
  • 4. Attach one end of the strap to a cargo tie-down in the rear of the vehicle.
  • 5. Route the strap through the wheel, as shown.
  • 6. Attach the other end of the strap to the other cargo tie-down in the rear of the vehicle.
  • 7. Tighten the strap. Storing the Compact Spare Tire and Tools
  • Stop as soon as possible and check that the spare tire is correctly inflated after being installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is designed for temporary use only. The vehicle will perform differently with the spare tire installed and it is recommended that the vehicle speed be limited to 80 km/h (50 mph). To conserve the tread of the spare tire, have the standard tire repaired or replaced as soon as convenient and return the spare tire to the storage area.

    Reverse the instructions for removing the spare tire and tools to store the spare tire.

    The compact spare tire is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire 0 298.

    Jump Starting Jump Starting - North America For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery - North America 0 257. If the battery has run down, try to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

    When using a compact spare tire, the AWD (if equipped), ABS, and Traction Control systems may engage until the spare tire is recognized by the vehicle, especially on slippery roads. Adjust driving to reduce possible wheel slip.

    |{ Warning|

    Page 298

    |---| |Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

    . They contain acid that can burn you. . They contain gas that can explode or

    ignite.

    . They contain enough electricity to burn you.

    If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.|

    |Caution| |---| |When the compact spare is installed, do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire, wheel, and other parts of the vehicle.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead compounds, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.|

    |Caution| |---| |Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.|

    Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

    Do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

    |Caution| |---| |Tire chains will not fit the compact spare. Using them can damage the vehicle and the chains. Do not use tire chains on the compact spare.|

    See the warning on the back cover.

    The good battery negative (–) terminal and good battery positive (+) terminal are on the battery of the vehicle providing the jump start.

    |Caution| |---| |If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting.|

    Page 299

    ![image 362](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile362.png)

    The discharge battery positive (+) terminal is under a trim cover. Open the cover to expose the terminal.

  • 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
  • 2. Position the two vehicles so that they are not touching.
  • 3. Set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a manual transmission.
  • Turn the ignition off. Turn off all lights and accessories in both vehicles, except the hazard warning flashers if needed.
  • |Caution| |---| |If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting.|

  • 1. Discharged Battery Positive (+) Terminal
  • 2. Discharged Battery Negative (–) Grounding Point
  • 3. Good Battery Negative (–) Terminal
  • 4. Good Battery Positive (+) Terminal
  • |{ Warning| |---| |An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.|

    The discharged battery positive (+) terminal is in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.

    (Continued)|

    The discharged battery negative (–) grounding point is the engine block or an engine mounting bolt. Connect to a spot as far away from the discharged battery as possible.

    Page 300

    #### Towing the Vehicle Transporting a Disabled Vehicle

  • 9. Start the engine in the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine at idle speed for at least four minutes.
  • 10. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
  • |Warning (Continued)| |---| |Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.|

    |Caution| |---| |Incorrectly transporting a disabled vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle. Use proper tire straps to secure the vehicle to the flatbed tow truck. Do not strap or hook to any frame, underbody, or suspension component not specified below. Do not move vehicles with drive axle tires on the ground. Damage is not covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    |Caution| |---| |If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.|

    |{ Warning| |---| |Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.|

  • 5. Connect one end of the red positive (+) cable to the discharged battery positive (+) terminal.
  • 6. Connect the other end of the red positive (+) cable to the good battery positive (+) terminal.
  • 7. Connect one end of the black negative (–) cable to the good battery negative (–) terminal.
  • 8. Connect the other end of the black negative (–) cable to the discharged battery negative (–) grounding point.
  • |Caution| |---| |The vehicle may be equipped with an electric parking brake and/or a mechanical transmission range select shifter. In the event of a loss of 12-volt battery power, the electric parking brake cannot be released, and the vehicle cannot be shifted to N (Neutral). Tire skates or dollies must be used under the non-rolling tires to prevent damage while

    (Continued)|

    Page 301

    ########### Jumper Cable Removal

    Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables.

    After starting the disabled vehicle and removing the jumper cables, allow it to idle for several minutes.

    ########## Front Attachment Points

    If equipped, a tow eye may be located near the spare tire or emergency jack. Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle from the snow, mud, sand, or ditch. Tow eye threads may have right or left-hand threads. Use caution when installing or removing the tow eye.

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |loading/unloading the vehicle. Dragging the vehicle will cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    ![image 363](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile363.png)

    |Caution| |---| |The vehicle may be equipped with a tow eye. Improper use of the tow eye may cause damage to the vehicle and is not covered by the vehicle warranty. If equipped, use the tow eye to load the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck from a flat road surface, or to move the vehicle a very short distance at a walking pace. The tow eye is not designed for off-road recovery. The vehicle must be in N (Neutral) with the electric parking brake released when using the tow eye.|

    The vehicle must be in N (Neutral) and the electric parking brake must be released when loading the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck.

    . If the 12-volt battery is dead and/or electric parking brake is not released, the vehicle will not move. Try to jump start the vehicle with a known good 12-volt battery, shift the car into N (Neutral), and release the electric parking brake. Refer to Jump Starting - North America 0 299.

    The vehicle is equipped with specific attachment points to be used by the towing provider. These holes may be used to pull the vehicle from a flat road surface onto the flatbed tow truck.

    . If unsuccessful, the vehicle will not move. Tire skates or dollies must be used under the non-rolling tires to prevent vehicle damage.

    ####### Recreational Vehicle Towing

    Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle, such as behind a motor home. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.

    Page 302

    Contact a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be transported. GM recommends a flatbed tow truck to transport a disabled vehicle. Use ramps to help reduce approach angles, if necessary.

    ########## Dinghy Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

    ########## Dinghy Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only)

    Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.

    ![image 364](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile364.png)

    ![image 365](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile365.png)

    Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing:

    . What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations.

    . What is the distance that will be

    traveled? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

    . Is the proper towing equipment going to be used? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.

    |Caution| |---| |If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.|

    To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four wheels on the ground:

    . Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed.

  • 1. Position the vehicle behind the tow vehicle, lining it up with the tow bar.
  • 2. Leave the vehicle running. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
  • 3. Apply the parking brake to prevent vehicle rollaway.
  • 4. Connect the vehicle to the tow bar hardware.
  • 5. Release the parking brake.
  • Page 303

    |Caution| |---| |Use of a shield mounted in front of the vehicle grille could restrict airflow and cause damage to the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If using a shield, only use one that attaches to the towing vehicle.|

    The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground.

    ########## Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only)

  • 5. Apply the parking brake.
  • 6. Disconnect the vehicle from the tow vehicle.
  • 7. Release the parking brake. Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
  • 6. Leave the transmission in N (Neutral) and turn the vehicle off. You may hear a continuous chime, which is normal.
  • 7. Open the hood and disconnect the negative battery terminal. See Battery North America 0 257.
  • 8. Cover the negative battery post with a non-conductive material to prevent any contact with the negative battery terminal.
  • ![image 366](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile366.png)

    ![image 367](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile367.png)

    |Caution| |---| |If 113 km/h (70 mph) is exceeded while towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never exceed 113 km/h (70 mph) while towing the vehicle.|

    To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with two wheels on the ground:

  • 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
  • 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
  • 3. Set the parking brake.
  • 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing.
  • Page 304

  • 5. Turn the vehicle off.
  • 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
  • 7. Release the parking brake.
  • To disconnect the towed vehicle:

  • 1. Park on a level surface.
  • 2. Make sure that the ignition is off.
  • 3. Remove any tape, glue, or excess material from the negative battery post.
  • 4. Connect the battery. See “Negative Battery Cable Reconnection” under Battery - North America 0 257.
  • All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with two wheels on the ground.

    #### Appearance Care Exterior Care Locks

  • 8. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery. See “Negative Battery Cable Disconnection” Battery - North America 0 257.
  • 9. Cover the negative battery post with a non-conductive material to prevent any contact with the negative battery terminal.
  • ![image 368](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile368.png)

    Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 319.

    ########## Towing the Vehicle from the Rear

    ![image 369](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile369.png)

    ########## Washing the Vehicle

    To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight.

    |Caution| |---| |Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from the rear.|

    Page 305

    |Caution| |---| |Do not use petroleum-based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.|

    Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.

    chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

    |Caution| |---| |Avoid using high-pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8 274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.|

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |This could cause damage that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Solvents or aggressive cleaners may harm underhood components. The usages of these chemicals should be avoided.

    Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.

    If using an automatic car wash, follow the car wash instructions. The windshield wiper and rear window wiper, if equipped, must be off. Remove any accessories that may be damaged or interfere with the car wash equipment.

    Recommend water only. A pressure washer may be used, but care must be utilized. The following criteria must be followed:

    Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or flat paint as damage can occur.

    . Water pressure must be kept below 14 000 KPa (2,000 PSI).

    Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

    . Water temperature must be below 80 °C (180 °F).

    Page 306

    |Caution| |---| |Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.|

    . Spray nozzle with a 40 degree wide angle

    spray pattern or wider must be used. . Nozzle must be kept at least 30 cm (1 ft)

    Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

    away from all surfaces. Finish Care

    Cleaning Underhood Components

    Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/ wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

    |Caution| |---| |Do not power wash any component under the hood that has this e symbol.

    (Continued)|

    To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

    ########## Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, and Stripes

    ########### Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings

    |Caution| |---| |Using wax on low gloss black finish stripes can increase the gloss level and create a non-uniform finish. Clean low gloss stripes with soap and water only.|

    |Caution| |---|

    Page 307

    |Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems, decals, and stripes. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" previously in this section.

    ########## Air Intakes

    Lamp covers are made of plastic, and some have a UV protective coating. Do not clean or wipe them when dry.

    Clear debris from the air intakes, between the hood and windshield, when washing the vehicle.

    The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum, chrome, or stainless steel. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions:

    Do not use any of the following on lamp covers:

    ########## Shutter System

    . Be sure the molding is cool to the touch before applying any cleaning solution.

    . Abrasive or caustic agents.

    ![image 370](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile370.png)

    . Washer fluids and other cleaning agents in higher concentrations than suggested by the manufacturer.

    . Use only approved cleaning solutions for aluminum, chrome, or stainless steel. Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings.

    . Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or other harsh cleaners.

    . Ice scrapers or other hard items.

    . Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

    . Aftermarket appearance caps or covers while the lamps are illuminated, due to excessive heat generated.

    . Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use.

    Page 308

    |Caution| |---| |Failure to clean lamps properly can cause damage to the lamp cover that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    . Use a nonabrasive wax on the vehicle after washing to protect and extend the molding finish.

    The vehicle may have a shutter system designed to help improve fuel economy. Keep the shutter system clear of debris,

    ########## Tires

    snow and ice. If the check engine light is activated, please check to see if the shutter system is clear of debris, snow or ice.

    |Caution| |---| |To avoid surface damage on wheels and wheel trim, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, or brushes. Use only GM approved cleaners. Do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash that uses silicon carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.

    ########## Windshield and Wiper Blades

    |Caution| |---| |Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.|

    Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

    Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.

    ########## Wheels and Wheel Trim

    ########## Brake System

    Page 309

    Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

    Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect all other brake parts.

    Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

    ########## Weatherstrips

    |Caution| |---| |Chrome wheels and chrome wheel trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium chloride or calcium chloride. These are used on roads for conditions such as dust and ice. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure.|

    Apply weatherstrip lubricant on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at least once a year. Hot, dry climates may require more frequent application. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 319.

    ########## Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components

    Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear at least once a year.

    ####### Interior Care

    ########## Sheet Metal Damage

    Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

    If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

    To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Before using cleaners, read and follow all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, open the doors and windows to get proper ventilation. Newspapers or dark garments can transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

    Visually check constant velocity joint boots and axle seals for leaks.

    ########## Body Component Lubrication

    Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.

    Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel fuel door hinges, and power assist step hinges, unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

    Page 310

    |Caution| |---| |Immediately remove cleaners, hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.|

    ########## Finish Damage

    Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.

    ########## Underbody Maintenance

    At least twice a year, spring and fall, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to thoroughly clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

    |Caution| |---| |Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage to the vehicle. Apply all cleaners directly to a cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners on any switches or controls.|

    ########## Chemical Paint Spotting

    Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. See “Finish Care” previously in this section.

    Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.

    When using liquid soap cleaners, follow the directions on the specific cleaner or soap solution for dilution instructions.

    Coated Moldings Coated moldings should be cleaned.

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |. Do not use scented or gel-type hand sanitizers. If hand sanitizer comes in contact with interior surfaces of the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution.|

    |Caution| |---|

    Page 311

    |To prevent damage:

    . Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove soil from any interior surface

    . Never use a brush with stiff bristles.

    . Never rub any surface aggressively or with too much pressure.

    . Do not get any exposed electrical components wet.

    . Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.

    . Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.

    . Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.

    . Do not use disinfecting wipes that are scented or contain bleach. Do not use wipes or cleaners that show a color transfer to the wipe or change the appearance of the interior surface when used.

    (Continued)|

    . When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water.

    . When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.

    ########## Vinyl/Rubber

    ########## Interior Glass

    If equipped with vinyl floor and rubber floor mats, use a soft cloth and/or brush dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For more thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution.

    To clean, use a microfiber cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. If necessary, use a commercial glass cleaner after cleaning with plain water.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not use cleaners that contain silicone, wax-based products, or cleaners that increase gloss on vinyl/rubber floor and mats. These cleaners can permanently change the appearance and feel of the vinyl/rubber and can make the floor slippery. Your foot could slip while operating the vehicle, and you could lose control, resulting in a crash. You or others could be injured.|

    |Caution| |---| |To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.|

    Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog.

    ########## Speaker Covers

    Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with water and mild soap.

    ########## Fabric/Carpet/Suede

  • If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by plain water.
  • |Caution|

    Page 312

    |---| |Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating vacuum brush attachment is being used, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible:

    If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet.

    . Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.

    ########## Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, and Natural Open Pore Wood Surfaces

    . For solid soils, remove as much as

    After cleaning, use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.

    possible prior to vacuuming. To clean:

    Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution.

    ########## Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays

  • 1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfast cloth with water. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet.
  • 2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth.
  • 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Fold the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil into the fabric.
  • 4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth.
  • Use a microfiber cloth on high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays. First, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that can scratch the surface. Then gently clean by rubbing with a microfiber cloth. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.

    |Caution| |---| |Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, or spot removers. Do not use liquids that contain alcohol or solvents on

    (Continued)|

    ########## Cargo Cover and Convenience Net

    Page 313

    |Warning (Continued)| |---| |cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.|

    |Caution (Continued)| |---| |leather seats. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim, and are not recommended.|

    If equipped, wash with warm water and mild detergent. Do not use chlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water, and then dry completely.

    Care of Seat Belts Keep belts clean and dry.

    Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat use.

    . The original equipment floor mats are designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need to be replaced, it is recommended that GM-certified floor mats are purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.

    |{ Warning| |---| |Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.|

    Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions.

    |Caution| |---| |Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    . Do not use a floor mat if the vehicle is not equipped with a floor mat retainer on the driver side floor.

    Floor Mats

    . Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.

    Page 314

    |{ Warning| |---| |If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can

    (Continued)|

    . Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.

    . Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.

    . Do not place one floor mat on top of another.

    The driver side floor mat is held in place by a button-type retainer.

    ![image 371](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile371.png)

    ########### Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats

  • 1. Pull up on the rear of the floor mat to unlock the retainers and remove.
  • 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer openings over the carpet retainers and snap into position.
  • 3. Make sure the floor mat is properly secured in place. Verify the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
  • ########## Cleaning Rubber Floor Mats (All-Weather Mats and Floor Liners)

    See “Vinyl/Rubber” under Interior Care 0 309 for important cleaning information.

    Service and Maintenance

    #### General Information

    |Caution| |---| |Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition.

    Do not have chemical flushes that are not approved by GM performed on the vehicle. The use of flushes, solvents, cleaners, or lubricants that are not approved by GM could damage the vehicle, requiring expensive repairs that are not covered by the vehicle warranty.|

    Page 315

    Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed.

    ########## General Information

    General Information ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 314 Maintenance Schedule

    Maintenance Schedule .... ... ... .. ... .. 315 Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI)

    Multi-Point Vehicle

    Inspection (MPVI) .... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 317 Special Application Services

    Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.

    Special Application Services .... .. .. .. .. 318

    ########## Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ... 319 Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... .. 320

    The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions.

    ########## Maintenance Records

    Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.

    Maintenance Records .................. 322

    wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 288 and Wheel Replacement 0 292.

    Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Severe Service.

    Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services. The Additional Required Services - Normal are for vehicles that:

    . Perform Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection. See Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) 0 317.

    Page 316

    |{ Warning| |---| |Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work 0 240.|

    . Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 181.

    . Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care 0 305.

    ########## Additional Required Services — Normal Service

    . Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.

    . Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel 0 226.

    ########### Every 12 000 km (7,500 mi)

    . Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. Or when the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate the need for vehicle service for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last service.

    Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Normal Service.

    #### Maintenance Schedule

    ########## Tire Rotation and Required Services Every 12 000 km (7,500 mi)

    The Additional Required Services - Severe are for vehicles that are:

    Tires are rotated to achieve a more uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.

    . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather.

    . Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.

    Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the

    . Frequently towing a trailer.

    Page 317

    . Used for high speed or competitive driving.

    . Used for taxi, police, or delivery service.

    ########### Every 96 000 km (60,000 mi)

    ‐ Civilian vehicles such as light duty pick-up trucks, SUVs, and passenger cars that are used in military applications.

    Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System 0 247.

    . Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires and/or boots.

    . When the REPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGE message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the next engine oil change. When the REPLACE ENGINE AIR FILTER SOON message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the earliest convenience. Reset the engine air filter life system after the engine air filter is replaced. See Engine Air Filter Life System 0 248.

    ########### Every 161 000 km (100,000 mi)

    ‐ Recovery vehicles such as tow trucks and flatbed single vehicle carriers or any vehicle that is consistently used in towing trailers or other loads.

    . Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 261.

    ########### Every 240 000 km (150,000 mi)

    ‐ High use commercial vehicles such as courier delivery vehicles, private security patrol vehicles, or any vehicles that operate on a 24–hour basis.

    . Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/ or axles and should be replaced.

    ‐ Any vehicle consistently operated in a

    ########### Every 36 000 km (22,500 mi)

    high sand or dust environment such as those used on oil pipelines and similar applications.

    . Passenger compartment air filter replacement (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). More frequent replacement may be needed if the vehicle is driven in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, areas with high dust levels or are sensitive to environmental allergens. Filter replacement may also be needed if you notice reduced airflow, windows fogging up, or odors. Your local GM Service location can help you determine when it is the right time to replace your filter.

    . Vehicles that are regularly used for short trips of 6 km (4 mi) or less. The oil life indicator will show you when to change the oil and filter. Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 12 000 km (7,500 mi).

    Page 318

    . Drain and fill engine cooling system. Or every six years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 250.

    ########## Severe Conditions Requiring More Frequent Maintenance*

  • Footnote: Under extreme driving conditions listed above, it may be necessary to replace your spark plugs at more frequent intervals. For further assistance in determining the most
  • . Public service, military, or commercial use vehicles to include the following:

    ‐ Ambulances, police cars, and emergency rescue vehicles.

    ########## Diagnostics

    suitable service maintenance intervals for your vehicle, please contact your authorized GM Dealer. Extreme service is for vehicles mainly driven off-road in four-wheel drive or used in farming, mining, forestry, or snow plowing.

    ########### Every Seven Years

    . Replace Air Conditioning Desiccant every seven years. The air conditioning system requires maintenance every seven years. This service requires replacement of the desiccant to help the longevity and efficient operation of the air conditioning system. This service can be complex. See your dealer.

    . OnStar active, if equipped

    . Service history/recall check Engine Oil and Filter

    . Engine oil

    . Oil life monitor

    ‐ Reset oil life monitor Exterior Lights

    ########## Additional Required Services — Severe Service

    #### Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI)

    ########### Every 72 000 km (45,000 mi)

    ########## . Visual inspection Windshield and Wipers

    Page 319

    . Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.

    . Visual inspection Battery

    A Multi Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) completed by a GM dealer technician is a maintenance assessment of your vehicle. The benefit of the MPVI is to identify and inform the customer of service items that require immediate attention and those that may require attention in the future.

    ########### Every 75 000 km (120,000 mi)

    . Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/ or axles and should be replaced.

    . Battery visual inspection

    . Battery test results

    . Battery cables and connections

    ########## Systems, Fluids, and Visible Leak Inspection

    The technician will perform the following checks on your vehicle. For a complete list of checks, inspections, and services, see your dealer.

    . Engine oil

    ########## Owner Checks and Services Every Five Years

    . Transmission

    . Drive axle

    Some items may not apply to your vehicle and/or region.

    . Transfer case

    . Replace brake fluid every five years. See Brake Fluid 0 256.

    . Engine cooling system

    Page 320

    . Power steering, if equipped

    . Fuel system

    . Engine air filter

    #### Special Application Services

    . Windshield washer fluid Tire Inspection

    . Hoses

    . Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every oil change.

    . Belts

    . Shocks and struts

    . Tire pressure, tread depth, and wear

    . Steering components

    . Have underbody flushing service performed. See "Underbody Maintenance" in Exterior Care 0 305.

    . Rotation, if applicable

    . Axle boots or driveshaft and u-joints . Compartment lift struts, if equipped . Floor mats secured, no interference with

    . Alignment check, optional

    . Reset tire pressure monitor

    . Check tire sealant expiration date, if equipped

    pedals

    Page 321

    . Horn

    . Check spare tire, if equipped Brakes

    . Ignition lock, if equipped

    . Starter switch

    ########## . Check brake system Visible and Functional Inspections

    . Evaporative control system Lubricate

    . Chassis components

    . Seat belt components

    . Exhaust system

    . Accelerator pedal

    . Passenger compartment air filter, if equipped

    ##### Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name or specification, including fluids or lubricants not listed here, can be obtained from your dealer.

    |Usage|Fluid/Lubricant| |---|---| |Automatic Transmission — Continuously Variable Ratio (CVT)|High Performance CVT Fluid. See your dealer.| |Automatic Transmission — 9 Speed|DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.| |Engine Coolant|50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Cooling System 0 250.| |Engine Oil|Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 245.| |Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Release Pawl|Lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.| |Hydraulic Brake System|DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid.| |Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and Door Hinges|Multi-Purpose Lubricant. See your dealer.| |Rear Axle (All-Wheel Drive)|See your dealer.| |Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive)|Transfer Case Fluid. See your dealer.|

    Page 322

    |Windshield Washer|Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements.| | | |

    ######## Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

    |Part|GM Part Number|ACDelco Part Number| |---|---|---| |Engine Air Cleaner/Filter|42712666|A3251C| |Engine Oil Filter|Engine Oil Filter|Engine Oil Filter| |1.2L L3 Gas Engine|12706595|PF64| |1.3L L3 Gas Engine|55495105|PF66| |Passenger Compartment Air Filter|13508023|CF185| |Spark Plugs|Spark Plugs|Spark Plugs| |1.2L L3 Gas Engine|12683541|41-156| |1.3L L3 Gas Engine|12688094|41-106-IP|

    | | |---| | |

    |Part|GM Part Number|ACDelco Part Number| |---|---|---| |Wiper Blades|Wiper Blades|Wiper Blades| |Driver Side – 60.0 cm (24 in)|42709511|—| |Passenger Side – 45.0 cm (18 in)|42709513|—| |Rear – 30.0 cm (12 in)|42709518|—| | | | |

    #### Maintenance Records

    After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

    Page 323

    |Date|Odometer Reading|Serviced By|Services Performed| |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Technical Data

    #### Vehicle Identification

    ########## Engine Identification

    The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications 0 324 for the vehicle's engine code.

    ####### Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

    ########## Vehicle Identification

    Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ... 323 Service Parts Identification ............. 323

    ![image 372](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile372.png)

    ########## Vehicle Data

    Capacities and Specifications .... . . . . . . 324 Engine Drive Belt Routing .... . . . . . . . . . 326

    ####### Service Parts Identification

    There may be a large barcode on the certification label on the center pillar that you can scan for the following information:

    Page 324

    This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) also appears on the Vehicle Certification label and certificates of title and registration.

    . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

    . Model designation

    . Paint information

    . Production options

    If there is not a large barcode on this label, then you will find this same information on a label in the rear storage area.

    #### Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications

    |Application|Capacities|Capacities| |---|---|---| |Application|Metric|English| |Air Conditioning Refrigerant|For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood. See your dealer for more information.|For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood. See your dealer for more information.| |Engine Cooling System*|Engine Cooling System*|Engine Cooling System*| |1.2L L3 Gas Engine|6.3 L|6.7 qt| |1.3L L3 Gas Engine|7.4 L|7.8 qt| |Engine Oil with Filter|Engine Oil with Filter|Engine Oil with Filter| |1.2L L3 Gas Engine FWD|4.0 L|4.2 qt| |1.3L L3 Gas Engine FWD|4.5 L|4.8 qt| |1.3L L3 Gas Engine AWD|4.5 L|4.8 qt| |Fuel Tank|50 L|13.2 gal|

    | | |---| | |

    |Application|Capacities|Capacities| |---|---|---|

    Page 325

    |Application|Metric|English| |Transfer Case Fluid|0.23 L|0.24 qt| |Wheel Nut Torque|140 Y|100 lb ft| |All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.|All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.|All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.| |*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.|*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.|*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.| | | | |

    ########## Engine Specifications

    |Engine|VIN Code|Transmission|Spark Plug Gap| |---|---|---|---| |1.2L L3 Gas Engine (LIH)|2|Automatic|0.6 - 0.7 mm| |1.3L L3 Gas Engine (L3T)|L|Automatic|0.65 - 0.75 mm| |Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.|Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.|Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.|Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.| | | | | |

    ####### Engine Drive Belt Routing

    ![image 373](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile373.png)

  • 1.2L L3 Gas Engine
  • ![image 374](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile374.png)

  • 1.3L L3 Gas Engine
  • Customer Information

    #### Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure

    ########## Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy

    Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ... 336 Cybersecurity .......................... 337 Event Data Recorders .................. 337 OnStar ................................ 338 Infotainment System .................. 338

    Page 326

    ########## Customer Information

    Customer Satisfaction Procedure .... . . . 327 Customer Assistance Offices ..... . .. .. . 329 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

    Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

    (TTY) Users .......................... 329 Online Account ........................ 329 GM Mobility Reimbursement

    Program ............................. 330 Roadside Assistance Program .... .... .. 330 Scheduling Service Appointments .... . . 332 Courtesy Transportation Program .... . . 332 Collision Damage Repair ..... .. ... .. ... 333 Publication Ordering Information .... . . 335 Radio Frequency Statement .... . . . . . . . 335

    STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the general manager.

    ########## Reporting Safety Defects

    Reporting Safety Defects to the United

    States Government .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Reporting Safety Defects to the

    Canadian Government ..... . .. . .. . .. . 336 Reporting Safety Defects to General

    STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by your dealership without further help, in the U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of Canada Customer Care Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

    Motors .............................. 336

    This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

    The BBB AUTO LINE Program is an out-of-court program administered by BBB National Programs, Inc. to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

    We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:

    . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.

    STEP THREE — Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Company wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Company has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

    . Dealership name and location.

    Page 327

    . Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

    When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.

    You may contact the BBB AUTO LINE Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:

    STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE Program to enforce your rights.

    BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB National Programs, Inc. 1676 International Drive Suite 550 McLean, VA 22102

    Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 www.bbbautoline.org

    ####### Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users

    ########## United States and Puerto Rico

    For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Care Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

    Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170

    To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

    1-800-222-1020 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone Devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-243-8872

    The Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5

    From U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 Canada

    ####### Online Account

    Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Customer Assistance Offices Chevrolet is committed to assisting customers. Visit us online at www.chevrolet.com/support (U.S.) or www.my.chevrolet.ca (Canada) to chat with us or find answers to commonly asked questions, tips, vehicle how-to instructions, and available support. Need more help? Use the phone numbers or mailing addresses below for additional assistance.

    ########## Create a Chevrolet Account (U.S.) at chevrolet.com

    Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5

    Page 328

    Learn more about your vehicle features, shop for and manage your connected services and OnStar plans, and access diagnostic information specific to your vehicle.

    1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

    Membership Benefits E : Download owner’s manuals and view vehicle-specific how-to videos. G : View maintenance schedules, alerts, and Vehicle Diagnostic Information. Schedule service appointments.

    ########## Overseas

    Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

  • I : View service records from your dealership and add your own.
  • D : Select a preferred dealer and view locations, maps, phone numbers, and hours.

    r : Track your vehicle’s warranty information.

  • J : View active recalls by Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 323.
  • ####### GM Mobility Reimbursement Program

    ####### Roadside Assistance Program

    For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

    ![image 375](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile375.png)

    For Canadian-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.

    Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

    This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement, up to certain limits, of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for the vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift for the vehicle.

    ########## Calling for Assistance

    Page 329

  • H : Manage your profile and payment information. View your GM Rewards Card earnings and My Chevrolet Rewards points. F : Chat with online help representatives.
  • When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready:

    . Your name, home address, and home telephone number

    . Telephone number of your location

    To learn about the GM Mobility program, see www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

    Visit chevrolet.com and create an account today.

    . Location of the vehicle

    . Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle

    ########## Chevrolet Owner Centre (Canada) mychevrolet.ca

    . Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

    General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility program. See www.gm.ca, or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

    Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre at mychevrolet.ca (English) or my.chevrolet.ca (French) to access similar benefits to the U.S. site.

    . Description of the problem

    ########## Coverage

    ########## Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance

    OnStar. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.

    Services are provided for the duration of the vehicle’s powertrain warranty.

    . Impound towing caused by violation of

    Page 330

    . Emergency Tow from a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is not given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.

    any laws . Legal fines

    In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.

    . Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices

    Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. General Motors North America and Chevrolet reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.

    Service is not provided if a vehicle is in an area that is not accessible to the service vehicle or is not a regularly traveled or maintained public road, which includes ice and winter roads. Off-road use is not covered.

    . Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.

    General Motors North America and Chevrolet reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.

    ########## Services Specific to Canadian-Purchased Vehicles

    . Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.

    . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement is up to 7 liters. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service.

    . Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty event, incidental expenses may be reimbursed within the Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are reasonable and customary hotel, meals, rental car, or a vehicle being delivered back to the customer, up to 500 miles.

    ########## Services Provided

    . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.

    . Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

    . Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over 150 km from where your trip was started to qualify. Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders are required. Once authorization has been

    . Lock-Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have

    If your dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same-day repair.

    Page 331

    ########### Shuttle Service

    received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements and explain how to receive payment.

    This includes one-way or round-trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of your dealer's area.

    . Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility.

    Courtesy Transportation Program To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada), Federal Emission, Extended Powertrain or Electric specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.

    ########### Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement

    If overnight warranty repairs are needed, and public transportation is used, the expense must be supported by original receipts and within the maximum amount allowed by GM. If U.S. customers arrange their own transportation, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information.

    Scheduling Service Appointments When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.

    Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.

    ########### Courtesy Rental Vehicle

    Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate manual entitled “Limited Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” produced for new vehicles provides detailed warranty coverage information.

    For an overnight warranty repair, the dealer may provide an available courtesy rental vehicle or provide for reimbursement of a rental vehicle. Reimbursement is limited and must be supported by original receipts as well as a signed and completed rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Additional fees

    ########## Transportation Options

    Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to do so, your dealer may offer the following transportation options:

    ########## Collision Parts

    poorly, exhibit premature durability/ corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.

    such as fuel, rental vehicle insurance, taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair are also your responsibility.

    Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

    Page 332

    It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.

    ########## Additional Program Information

    ########## Repair Facility

    All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Contact your dealer for specific availability.

    GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state-of-the-art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.

    Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety performance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.

    General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

    ####### Collision Damage Repair

    ########## Insuring the Vehicle

    Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs through the use of aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket

    If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.

    Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit

    Gather the following information:

    Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty.

    collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.

    . Driver name, address, and telephone number

    . Driver license number

    Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with the repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember, if the vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

    Page 333

    . Owner name, address, and telephone number

    . Vehicle license plate number

    If the vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read the lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.

    . Vehicle make, model, and model year

    . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

    . Insurance company and policy number

    . General description of the damage to the other vehicle

    Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this section.

    If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.

    ########## If a Crash Occurs

    If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? 0 56.

    If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.

    ########## Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process

    In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take the vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new

    Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.

    For emergency towing see Roadside Assistance Program 0 330.

    ####### Publication Ordering Information Service Manuals

    Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

    Page 334

    For credit card orders only (VISA, MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

    Service manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engine/propulsion, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical system, steering system, body, etc.

    To order by mail, write to: Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170 Make checks payable in U.S. funds. Radio Frequency Statement

    #### Reporting Safety Defects

    ####### Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government

    ########## Customer Literature

    Owner’s manuals are written specifically for owners and are intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.

    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.

    This vehicle uses license-exempt transmitters / receivers / systems that operate on a radio frequency that complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED) Canada's license-exempt RSS(s) / RSP-100 / ICES-GEN.

    Customer literature publications available for purchase include owner’s manuals, warranty manuals, and portfolios. Portfolios include an owner’s manual, warranty manual, if applicable, and zip lock bag or pouch.

    If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.

    ########## Current and Past Models

    Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

    Service manuals and customer literature are available for many current and past model year GM vehicles.

  • 1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
  • 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
  • To order, call 1-800-551-4123 Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m. Eastern Time

    To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to https://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

    Page 335

    In Mexico, call 800-466-0811 or 800-508-0000.

    or write to:

    Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Directorate Defect Investigations and Recalls Division 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

    In other Central America and Caribbean Countries, call 52-555-901-2369.

    Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590

    #### Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy

    You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from https://www.safercar.gov.

    ####### Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors

    The vehicle has a number of computers that record information about the vehicle’s performance and how it is driven or used. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy them in a crash, and, if equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle or to help GM improve safety or features. Some modules may also store data about how the vehicle is operated, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may retain personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

    In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, notify General Motors.

    ####### Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government

    In the U.S., call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write: Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5

    If you live in Canada, and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada Company. Call Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0510; go to:

    www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English) www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

    ####### Cybersecurity

    ####### Event Data Recorders

    driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

    GM collects information about the use of your vehicle including operational and safety related information. We collect this information to provide, evaluate, improve, and troubleshoot our products and services and to develop new products and services. The protection of vehicle electronics systems and customer data from unauthorized outside electronic access or control is important to GM. GM maintains appropriate security standards, practices, guidelines and controls aimed at defending the vehicle and the vehicle service ecosystem against unauthorized electronic access, detecting possible malicious activity in related networks, and responding to suspected cybersecurity incidents in a timely, coordinated and effective manner. Security incidents could impact your safety or compromise your private data. To minimize security risks, please do not connect your vehicle electronic systems to unauthorized devices or connect your vehicle to any unknown or untrusted networks (such as Bluetooth, WIFI or similar technology). In the event you suspect any security incident impacting your data or the safe operation of your vehicle, please stop operating your vehicle and contact your dealer.

    Page 336

    This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

    To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

    . How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

    GM will not access these data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as permitted by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

    . Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

    . How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

    . How fast the vehicle was traveling.

    These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

    Note EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal

    ####### OnStar

    If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar and has an active service plan, additional data may be collected and transmitted through the OnStar system. This includes information about the vehicle’s operation; collisions involving the vehicle; the use of the vehicle and its features, including infotainment; and the location and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement on the OnStar website.

    See OnStar Additional Information 0 341. Infotainment System

    If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system as part of the infotainment system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. See the infotainment section for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.

    OnStar

    #### OnStar Overview

    The OnStar system status light is next to the OnStar buttons. If the status light is: . Solid Green: System is ready.

    ![image 376](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile376.png)

    ########## OnStar Overview

    Page 337

    . Flashing Green: On a call. . Red: Indicates a problem. . Off: System is off. Press Q twice to

    OnStar Overview .... ....... ....... .... 339 OnStar Services

    Emergency ............................ 340 Security ............................... 340

    speak with an OnStar Advisor.

    Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Advisor.

    = Voice Command Button Q Blue OnStar Button > Red Emergency Button

    ########## OnStar Additional Information

    OnStar Additional Information .... . . . . . 341

    Functionality of the Voice Command button may vary by vehicle and region.

    Press = to:

    This vehicle may be equipped with a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to an OnStar Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connections, and Diagnostics Services. OnStar services may require a paid service plan and data plan. OnStar requires the vehicle battery and electrical system, cellular service, and GPS satellite signals to be available and operating. OnStar acts as a link to existing emergency service providers. OnStar may collect information about you and your vehicle, including location information. See OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms for more details including system limitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

    . Open the OnStar app on the infotainment display. If equipped, the infotainment system has OnStar controls in the embedded OnStar app on the Home Page. Most OnStar functions that can be performed with the buttons can be done using the app. To open the app, touch the OnStar icon on the Home Page. App updates require a corresponding service plan. Features vary by region and model. Features are subject to change. For more information, see my.chevrolet.com/learn or press Q.

    #### OnStar Services Emergency

    Security If equipped, OnStar provides these services:

    Or

    . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice commands.

    . With Stolen Vehicle Assistance, OnStar Advisors can use GPS to pinpoint the vehicle and help authorities quickly recover it.

    . Obtain and customize the Wi-Fi hotspot

    Page 338

    Emergency Services require an active safety and security plan. With Automatic Crash Response, built-in sensors can automatically alert a specially trained OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected in to the vehicle to help.

    name or SSID and password, if equipped. Press Q to connect to an Advisor to:

    . With Remote Ignition Block, if equipped, OnStar can block the vehicle from being restarted.

    . Verify account information or update

    contact information. . Get driving directions.

    Press > for a priority connection to an OnStar Advisor who can contact emergency service providers, direct them to your exact location, and relay important information. With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially trained Advisors are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to provide a central point of contact, assistance, and information during a crisis. With Roadside Assistance, Advisors can locate a nearby service provider to help with a flat tire, a battery jump, or an empty gas tank.

    . With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown, if equipped, OnStar can work with law enforcement to gradually slow the vehicle down.

    . Receive a Diagnostic check of the vehicle's key operating systems.

    . Receive Roadside Assistance.

    . Manage Wi-Fi Settings, if equipped.

    ########## Theft Alarm Notification

    Press > to get a priority connection to an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

    If equipped, if the doors are locked and the vehicle alarm sounds, a notification by text, e-mail, or phone call will be sent. If the vehicle is stolen, an OnStar Advisor can work with authorities to recover the vehicle.

    . Get help for an emergency.

    . Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an AMBER Alert.

    . Get assistance in severe weather or other crisis situations and find evacuation routes.

    #### OnStar Additional Information In-Vehicle Audio Messages

    ########## How OnStar Service Works

    Page 339

    services may not work if the OnStar equipment is not properly installed or it has not been properly maintained. If equipment or software is added, connected, or modified, OnStar or connected services may not work. Other problems beyond the control of OnStar — such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming may prevent service.

    Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Services, and Roadside Assistance are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full description of OnStar services, system limitations, and OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms:

    Audio messages may play important information at the following times:

    . Prior to vehicle purchase. Press Q to set

    up an account.

    . After change in ownership and at 90 days.

    . Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

    See Radio Frequency Statement 0 335. Services for People with Disabilities Advisors provide services to help with physical disabilities and medical conditions. Press Q to help:

    ########## Transferring Service

    . See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

    Press Q to request account transfer eligibility information. The Advisor can cancel or change account information.

    . See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

    . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

    . Press Q to speak with an Advisor.

    ########## Selling/Transferring the Vehicle

    OnStar or connected services cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. The wireless service provider must also have coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with OnStar or connected services. Service involving location information about the vehicle cannot work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar or connected

    Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) immediately to terminate your OnStar or connected services if the vehicle is disposed of, sold, transferred, or if the lease ends.

    . Locate a gas station with an attendant to pump gas.

    Page 340

    . Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., that meets accessibility needs.

    . Provide directions to the closest hospital or pharmacy in urgent situations.

    ########## Reactivation for Subsequent Owners

    Press Q and follow the prompts to speak to an Advisor as soon as possible. The Advisor will update vehicle records and explain OnStar or connected service options.

    ########## TTY Users

    Languages The vehicle can be programmed to respond in multiple languages. Press Q and ask for an Advisor. Advisors are available in English, Spanish, and French. Available languages may vary by country. Potential Issues

    operate to call OnStar. However, OnStar could have difficulty identifying the exact location.

    OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle. The available TTY system can provide in-vehicle access to all OnStar services, except Virtual Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

    . In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPS location to send to emergency responders.

    A temporary loss of GPS can cause loss of the ability to send a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The Advisor may give a verbal route or may ask for a call back after the vehicle is driven into an open area.

    If equipped, TTY mode can be turned on or off by touching Settings, then Apps, and then Phone. When TTY mode is on, phone calls can be made or received with OnStar using the infotainment display.

    OnStar cannot perform Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the vehicle has been off continuously for an extended period of time without an ignition cycle. To find out the duration of time that applies for the vehicle, contact an OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or calling 1-888-4ONSTAR. If the vehicle has not been started for an extended period of time, OnStar can contact Roadside Assistance or a locksmith to help gain access to the vehicle.

    ########## Cellular and GPS Antennas

    ########## OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN)

    Cellular reception is required for OnStar to send remote signals to the vehicle. Do not place items over or near the antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception.

    A PIN is needed to access some OnStar services. The PIN will need to be changed the first time when speaking with an Advisor. To change the OnStar PIN, contact an OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or calling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

    Unable to Connect to OnStar Message If there is limited cellular coverage or the cellular network has reached maximum capacity, this message may come on. Press Q to try the call again or try again after driving a few miles into another cellular area.

    ########## Global Positioning System (GPS)

    Page 341

    . Obstruction of the GPS can occur in a large city with tall buildings; in parking garages; around airports; in tunnels and underpasses; or in an area with very dense trees. If GPS signals are not available, the OnStar system should still

    ########## Warranty

    OnStar equipment may be warranted as part of the vehicle warranty.

    ########## Vehicle and Power Issues

    ########## OnStar - Software Acknowledgements

    These updates or changes may also collect personal information. Such collection is described in the OnStar privacy statement or separately disclosed at the time of installation. These updates or changes may also cause a system to automatically communicate with GM servers to collect information about vehicle system status, identify whether updates or changes are available, or deliver updates or changes. An active OnStar agreement constitutes consent to these software updates or changes and agreement that either OnStar or GM may remotely deliver them to the vehicle.

    OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features to function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.

    To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit https://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers, and copyright notices are available for download. This offer is valid for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.

    ########## Add-on Electrical Equipment

    The OnStar system is integrated into the electrical architecture of the vehicle. Do not add any electrical equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 237. Added electrical equipment may interfere with the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.

    *Provided through LG Electronics Inc., who is solely responsible for provisions of related OSS compliance.

    Privacy The complete OnStar Privacy Statement may be found at www.onstar.com (U.S.), or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We recommend that you review it. If you have any questions, call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or press Q to speak with an Advisor. Users of wireless communications are cautioned that the privacy of any information sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept or access transmissions and private communications without consent.

    ########## Vehicle Software Updates

    OnStar or GM may remotely deliver software updates or changes to the vehicle without further notice or consent. These updates or changes may enhance or maintain safety, security, or the operation of the vehicle or the vehicle systems. Software updates or changes may affect or erase data or settings that are stored in the vehicle, such as saved navigation destinations or pre-set radio stations. Neither OnStar nor GM is responsible for any affected or erased data or settings.

    Connected Services

    #### Connected Services Navigation

    ########## Using Voice Commands During a Planned Route

    ########## Connected Services

    Page 342

    Functionality of the Voice Command button, if equipped, may vary by vehicle and region.

    Navigation ............. ............... 344 Connections ........................... 344 Diagnostics ............................ 346

    Navigation requires a specific OnStar or connected service plan.

    For some vehicles, press = to open the OnStar app on the infotainment display.

    Press Q to receive Turn-by-Turn directions or have them sent to the vehicle’s navigation screen, if equipped. Select Turn-by-Turn Directions from the Services tab of the OnStar app to call an Advisor or select a recent or favorite destination. Touch the navigation icons to select home, address, or place. A destination transfer from OnStar will show the detail view of the destination when it is transferred from OnStar to the Navigation application. See www.onstar.com for a coverage map. Services vary by model. Map coverage is available in the United States and Canada.

    ########### Send Destination to Vehicle

    Directions can be sent to the vehicle’s navigation screen, if equipped.

    Press Q, then ask the Advisor to download directions to the vehicle’s navigation system, if equipped. After the call ends, the navigation screen will provide prompts to begin driving directions. Routes that are sent to the navigation screen can only be canceled through the navigation system.

    See www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

    ########## Turn-by-Turn Navigation

    ####### Connections

  • 1. Press Q to connect to an Advisor.
  • 2. Request directions to be downloaded to the vehicle.
  • 3. Follow the voice-guided commands.
  • The following services help with staying connected.

    For coverage maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

    ######### Connected Services 345 Ensuring Security

    . Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire pressure, if factory-equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System.

    Page 343

  • 2. The Wi-Fi settings will display the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID), password, and on some vehicles, the connection type (no Internet connection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality (poor, good, excellent).
  • 3. To change the SSID or password, press
  • . Change the default passwords for the Wi-Fi hotspot and myChevrolet mobile application. Make these passwords different from each other and use a combination of letters and numbers to increase the security.

    . Send destinations to the vehicle.

    . Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S. market only).

    Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR to connect with an Advisor. On some vehicles, the SSID and password can be changed in the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

    . Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot on/off, manage settings, and monitor data consumption, if equipped.

    . Change the default name of the SSID (Service Set Identifier). This is your network’s name that is visible to other wireless devices. Choose a unique name and avoid family names or vehicle descriptions.

    . Locate a dealer and schedule service.

    After initial set-up, your vehicle’s Wi-Fi hotspot will connect automatically to your mobile devices. Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fi on or off on your mobile device, using the myChevrolet mobile app, or by contacting an OnStar Advisor. On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also be managed from the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

    . Request roadside assistance.

    . Set a parking reminder with pin drop, take a photo, make a note, and set a timer.

    ########### Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

    The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fi hotspot that provides access to the Internet and web content at 4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobile devices can be connected. A data plan is required. Use the in-vehicle controls only when it is safe to do so.

    . Connect with Chevrolet on social media.

    Features are subject to change. For myChevrolet mobile app information and compatibility, see my.chevrolet.com.

    ########### MyChevrolet Mobile App (If Available)

    An active OnStar or connected service plan may be required. A compatible device, factory-installed remote start, and power locks are required. Data rates apply. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations.

    Page 344

    Download the myChevrolet mobile app to compatible Apple and Android smartphones. Chevrolet users can access the following services from a smartphone:

  • To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspot information, press = to open the OnStar app on the infotainment display, then select Wi-Fi Hotspot. On some vehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings on the screen.
  • . Remotely start/stop the vehicle, if factory-equipped.

    . Lock/unlock doors, if equipped with automatic locks.

    . Activate the horn and lamps.

    ########## Remote Services

    Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlock the doors or sound the horn and flash the lamps.

    ########## Marketplace

    OnStar Advisors can provide offers from restaurants and retailers on your route, help locate hotels, or book a room. These services vary by market.

    ####### Diagnostics

    By monitoring and reporting on the vehicle's key systems, OnStar Advanced Diagnostics, if equipped, provides a way to keep up on maintenance. Capabilities vary by model. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations. Features are subject to change. For updates on feature capabilities, see my.chevrolet.com. Message and data rates may apply.

    Index AAbout Driving the Vehicle ..................3 Accessories and Modifications ........... 239 Accessory Power ......................... 192 Adaptive

    Airbag System (cont'd)

    Where Are the Airbags? ................ 54 Airbags

    Adding Equipment to the Vehicle ....... 61 Passenger Status Indicator .............. 98 Readiness Light ......................... 97 Replacing System Parts after a

    Cruise Control ......................... 205 Add-On Electrical Equipment ............. 237 Additional

    Crash ................................. 62

    Servicing Airbag-Equipped Vehicles ...... 61 Alarm

    Page 345

    OnStar Information .................... 341 Adjustments

    Vehicle Security ........................ 30 Alert

    Lumbar, Front Seats .................... 41 Agreements

    Lane Change ........................... 222 Rear Cross Traffic .......................217 Side Blind Zone (SBZA) ................. 222

    Trademarks and License ............... 159 Air

    Cleaner/Filter, Engine .................. 248 Conditioning ........................... 169 Filter Life System ...................... 248 Filter, Passenger Compartment .........172 Vents ...................................172

    All-Season Tires .......................... 277 All-Wheel Drive ......................197, 258

    Light ................................... 102 AM-FM Radio .............................124 Antenna

    Air Conditioning ......................... 167 Airbag System .............................52

    Multi-band ..............................127 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............. 198

    Check ................................... 62 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......... 56 Passenger Sensing System .............. 58 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ......... 56 What Will You See after an Airbag

    Warning Light ......................... 101 Appearance Care

    Exterior ................................ 305 Interior ................................ 309

    Inflates? .............................. 56 When Should an Airbag Inflate? ........ 55

    B Battery

    Bulb Replacement (cont'd)

    Apple CarPlay and Android Auto ..........151 Armrest

    Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps .......................... 262, 263

    Page 346

    Rear Seat ............................... 45 Assistance Program, Roadside ............ 330 Assistance Systems

    Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......... 118 Load Management ...................... 118 Power Protection ....................... 118

    Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and Backup Lamps ................... 264, 267

    Driving .................................217 Parking and Backing ................... 215

    Battery - North America ............ 257, 299 Blade Replacement, Wiper ...............260 Bluetooth

    Buying New Tires ........................ 289 C Calibration

    Audio

    Bluetooth .............................. 130 Automatic

    Audio .................................. 130 Overview .......................... 147, 148

    Climate Control System ................ 169 Door Locks .............................. 23 Emergency Braking (AEB) .............. 219 Headlamp System ...................... 114 Transmission ........................... 195 Transmission Fluid ..................... 248 Transmission Shift Lock Control

    Brake

    Compass ................................ 88 California

    Fluid ................................... 256 System Warning Light ................. 100

    Perchlorate Materials

    Brakes ................................... 255 Antilock ................................ 198 Brake Assist ........................... 199 Electric Brake Boost .................... 198 Electric Parking Brake .................. 198

    Requirements ........................ 239 California Proposition 65 Warning .....1, 299 Camera

    Rear Vision (RVC) ...................... 215 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...................2 Capacities and Specifications ............. 324 Carbon Monoxide

    Function Check ....................... 259 Automatic Transmission

    Page 347

    Braking .................................. 176

    Manual Mode ......................... 196 Auxiliary

    Automatic Emergency (AEB) ........... 219 Braking System

    Engine Exhaust ........................ 194 Liftgate ................................. 24 Winter Driving ......................... 179

    Jack .................................... 130 Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices ........127

    Front Pedestrian (FPB) ................. 220 Break-In, New Vehicle .................... 184 Bulb Replacement........................ 262

    Cargo

    Fog Lamps ............................. 264 Halogen Bulbs ......................... 262 Headlamp Aiming...................... 262

    Management System ................... 83 Tie-Downs .............................. 82

    Caution, Danger, and Warning ..............3

    Cruise Control ........................... 203 Adaptive ............................... 205 Light ................................... 106

    Compact Spare Tire ...................... 298 Compartments

    Center Console

    Storage ................................. 81 Chains, Tire .............................. 292 Charging

    Storage ................................. 80 Compass .................................. 88 Connected Services

    Cupholders ................................81 Customer Assistance

    System Light ........................... 99 Wireless ................................ 89

    Offices ................................. 329 Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............ 329

    Page 348

    Connections ........................... 344 Diagnostics ............................ 346 Navigation ............................. 344

    Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator) ............................... 99

    Customer Information

    Publications Ordering Information ..... 335 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......... 327 Cybersecurity ............................ 337

    Connections

    Child Restraints Infants and Young Children ............. 64 Lower Anchors and Tethers for

    Connected Services .................... 344 Control

    Traction and Electronic Stability ....... 200 Control of a Vehicle ..................... 176 Controls

    Children ............................... 69 Older Children .......................... 63 Securing .............................75, 76 Systems ................................ 66

    ########## D

    Damage Repair, Collision ................. 333 Danger, Warning, and Caution ..............3 Dashboard ..................................5 Data Collection

    Steering Wheel ......................... 121 Convex Mirrors ............................32 Coolant

    Child Safety Locks .........................23 Circuit Breakers .......................... 270 Cleaning

    Infotainment System .................. 338 OnStar ................................. 338

    Engine Temperature Gauge ............. 96 Cooling ..............................167, 169 Cooling System .......................... 250 Courtesy Lamps ...........................116 Courtesy Transportation Program ........ 332 Coverage Explanations ....................142 Covers

    Exterior Care ........................... 305 Interior Care ........................... 309

    Data Recorders, Event ................... 337 Database Coverage Explanations ..........142 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ............114 Defensive Driving .........................175 Delayed Locking ...........................22 Destination ...............................135 Diagnostics

    Climate Control Systems ................. 167 Air Conditioning ....................... 167 Automatic ............................. 169 Heating ................................ 167

    Page 349

    Rear Compartment/Storage Panel....... 82 Winter ................................. 189

    Clock ..................................... 88 Cluster, Instrument ....................... 92 Collision Damage Repair ................. 333

    Connected Services .................... 346

    Driving (cont'd)

    Engine (cont'd)

    Disabled Vehicle

    Off-Road Recovery ......................177 Vehicle Load Limits ..................... 181 Wet Roads ............................. 178 Winter ................................. 179

    Cooling System ........................ 250 Drive Belt Routing ..................... 326 Exhaust ................................ 194 Heater ..................................191 Oil Life System ........................ 247 Oil Pressure Light ...................... 104 Overheating ........................... 254 Power Messages ....................... 110 Running While Parked ................. 194 Starting ................................ 187

    Transporting ........................... 301 Distracted Driving.........................175 Dome Lamps..............................116 Door

    Driving the Vehicle .........................3 E Electric

    Ajar Light .............................. 106 Delayed Locking ........................ 22 Locks ................................... 20 Power Locks ............................ 22

    Brake Boost ............................ 198 Parking Brake .......................... 198 Parking Brake Light .................... 101

    Drive Belt Routing, Engine ............... 326 Drive Systems

    Entry Lighting ............................117 Equipment, Towing ...................... 235 Event Data Recorders .................... 337 Exit Lighting ..............................117 Extended Parking ........................ 194 Extender, Seat Belt ........................51 Exterior

    All-Wheel Drive ................... 197, 258 Driver

    Electrical

    Equipment, Add-On .................... 237 System Overload ...................... 269

    Assistance Systems .................... 214 Behavior ............................... 174 Information Center (DIC) .......... 106, 108 Mode Control .......................... 202 Teen ................................... 156

    Page 350

    Electrical System

    Engine Compartment Fuse Block ........271 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............. 270 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........... 273 Rear Compartment Fuse Block ......... 275

    Lamp Controls .......................... 112 Lighting Battery Saver .................. 118

    Driving

    Assistance Systems .....................217 Better Fuel Economy................... 174 Characteristics and Towing Tips ........ 229 Defensive ...............................175 Environment ........................... 174 Hill and Mountain Roads .............. 178 If the Vehicle is Stuck ................. 180 Impaired ................................175 Loss of Control .........................177

    Emergency

    F Filter

    OnStar ................................. 340 Engine

    Air Cleaner/Filter ...................... 248 Air Filter Life System .................. 248 Check Light (Malfunction Indicator) ..... 99 Compartment Overview ................ 242 Coolant Temperature Gauge ............ 96

    Engine Air Cleaner ..................... 248 Flash-to-Pass ..............................114 Flashers, Hazard Warning .................115 Flat Tire ................................. 293

    Changing .............................. 294

    Fuel (cont'd)

    GM Mobility Reimbursement

    Floor Mats ................................312 Fluid

    Prohibited Fuels ....................... 226 Recommended ......................... 226 Top Tier ............................... 226

    Program ............................... 330 Guidance

    Automatic Transmission ............... 248 Brakes ................................. 256 Washer ................................ 255

    Problems with the Route ............... 141 H

    Page 351

    Fuses

    Engine Compartment Fuse Block ........271 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............. 270 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........... 273 Rear Compartment Fuse Block ......... 275 Where To Find Fuse Maps for Your

    Fog Lamp Light

    Halogen Bulbs ........................... 262 Hazard Warning Flashers .................115 HD Radio Technology .....................125 Head Restraints ............................37 Headlamps

    Front .................................. 105 Fog Lamps ................................115

    Bulb Replacement...................... 264 Folding Mirrors ............................32 Folding Seatback .......................... 42 Forward

    Vehicle ............................... 270

    Aiming ................................ 262 Automatic .............................. 114 Bulb Replacement...................... 262 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......... 114 Flash-to-Pass ............................ 114 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

    G Gas Strut(s) .............................. 261 Gauges

    Collision Alert (FCA) System ............217 Frequency Statement

    Radio .................................. 335 Front

    Engine Coolant Temperature ............ 96 Fuel..................................... 95 Odometer .............................. 95 Speedometer ........................... 95 Tachometer ............................. 95 Trip Odometer .......................... 95 Warning Lights and Indicators .......... 92

    Heated Seats ........................... 41 Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System ....... 220

    Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps .......................... 262, 263 High-Beam On Light ................... 105 High/Low Beam Changer ............... 113 Lamps On Reminder ................... 105

    Front Seats

    Adjustment ............................. 39 Fuel

    Additives .............................. 227 Economy, Driving for Better ........... 174 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....... 228 Filling the Tank ........................ 227 Foreign Countries ...................... 227 Gauge .................................. 95 Low Fuel Warning Light ............... 105

    General Information

    Page 352

    Heated

    Service and Maintenance .............. 314 Towing ................................ 228 Vehicle Care ........................... 239

    Front Seats ............................. 41 Mirrors ................................. 32 Steering Wheel ......................... 86

    Global Positioning System (GPS) ......... 140 Glove Box ................................ 80

    Heater Engine ..................................191

    Instrument Panel

    Lamps (cont'd) Malfunction Indicator (Check

    Heating ..............................167, 169 High-Beam On Light ..................... 105 Hill and Mountain Roads .................178 Hill Start Assist (HSA) ....................200 Hood ....................................240 Horn ...................................... 86 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly ......... 46 HVAC ................................167, 169

    Storage Area............................ 80 Instrument Panel Overview .................5 Interior Rearview Mirrors ..................32 Introduction ........................... 2, 119

    Engine) ............................... 99 On Reminder .......................... 105 Reading .................................116

    Lane

  • J Jack
  • Auxiliary ............................... 130 Jump

    Starting - North America ............... 299

  • K Keys .....................................7, 9
  • Remote ................................. 10 Remote Operation ................... 10, 13

  • L Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................... 278 Lamps
  • Change Alert (LCA) ..................... 222 Keep Assist (LKA) ...................... 224 Keep Assist Light ...................... 102

    Page 353

  • I If the System Needs Service ..............141 Ignition Positions ....................184, 186 Immobilizer ................................31 Indicator
  • Lap-Shoulder Belt ......................... 48 LATCH System

    Replacing Parts after a Crash ........... 74 LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tethers for

    Children ................................. 69 LED Lighting ............................. 262 Liftgate ................................... 24 Lighting

    Pedestrian Ahead ...................... 103 Vehicle Ahead ......................... 102

    Indicators

    Warning Lights and Gauges............. 92 Infants and Young Children, Restraints .... 64 Information

    Entry ................................... 117 Exit ..................................... 117 Illumination Control ....................116 LED .................................... 262

    Courtesy ................................116 Daytime Running (DRL) ................. 114 Dome ...................................116 Exterior Controls ........................ 112 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......... 118 Flash-to-Pass ............................ 114 Fog ..................................... 115 High/Low Beam Changer ............... 113

    Publication Ordering ................... 335 Infotainment

    Lights

    Using the System ....................... 121 Infotainment System .................... 338 Inspection

    Airbag Readiness ....................... 97 All-Wheel-Drive ........................ 102 Antilock Brake System (ABS)

    Multi-Point Vehicle .....................317 Instrument Cluster ........................ 92

    Warning ............................. 101 Brake System Warning ................ 100 Charging System ....................... 99

    Loss of Control ...........................177 Low Fuel Warning Light ................. 105 Lower Anchors and Tethers for

    Mirrors (cont'd)

    Page 354

    Lights (cont'd) Check Engine (Malfunction

    Heated ................................. 32 Interior Rearview ....................... 32 Manual Rearview ....................... 33 Power .................................. 32

    Indicator) ............................. 99 Cruise Control Light .................... 106 Door Ajar .............................. 106 Electric Parking Brake .................. 101 Engine Oil Pressure .................... 104 Front Fog Lamp ........................ 105 Gauges and Indicators .................. 92 High-Beam On ......................... 105 Lane Keep Assist ....................... 102 Low Fuel Warning ..................... 105 Seat Belt Reminders .................... 97 Security................................ 105 Service Electric Parking Brake .......... 101 Sport Mode ............................ 102 StabiliTrak OFF ......................... 103 Tire Pressure ........................... 104 Traction Control System

    Children (LATCH System) ................ 69 Lumbar Adjustment ........................41

    Mode

    Front Seats ............................. 41

    Driver Control ......................... 202 Monitor System, Tire Pressure ........... 283 Multi-band Antenna ......................127 Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) .....317

    M Maintenance

    Records ................................ 322 Maintenance Schedule ....................315

  • N Navigation
  • Connected Services .................... 344 Destination ............................ 135 Symbols ............................... 134 Using the System ....................... 131

    New Vehicle Break-In .................... 184

  • O Odometer ................................ 95
  • Recommended Fluids and

    Lubricants ............................ 319 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 99 Manual

    Mode .................................. 196 Map Data Updates ........................142 Maps .....................................134 Media

    Avoiding Untrusted Devices .............127 Messages

    (TCS)/StabiliTrak ..................... 103 Traction Off ............................ 103

    Page 355

    Trip ..................................... 95 Off-Road

    Engine Power .......................... 110 Vehicle ................................ 110 Vehicle Speed ........................... 111

    Locks

    Recovery ................................177 Oil

    Automatic Door ......................... 23 Delayed Locking ........................ 22 Door .................................... 20 Lockout Protection ...................... 23 Power Door ............................. 22 Safety .................................. 23

    Mirrors

    Engine ................................. 245 Engine Oil Life System ................. 247 Pressure Light ......................... 104

    Automatic Dimming Rearview .......... 33 Convex ................................. 32 Folding ................................. 32

    Older Children, Restraints ................. 63

    Proposition 65 Warning, California .......299 Publication Ordering Information ........ 335

    Pedestrian Ahead Indicator .............. 103 Perchlorate Materials Requirements,

    Online Account .......................... 329 OnStar ................................... 338

    California .............................. 239 Phone

    Additional Information ................. 341 Overview .............................. 339

    R Radiator ................................. 250 Radio

    Apple CarPlay and Android Auto ........ 151 Bluetooth .......................... 147, 148

    OnStar Emergency .......................340 OnStar Security ..........................340 Outlets

    AM-FM Radio .......................... 124 Data System (RDS)..................... 126 Frequency Statement .................. 335 HD Radio Technology .................. 125 Reception ...............................127 Satellite................................ 126

    Page 356

    Port

    USB .....................................127 Positioning

    Power .................................. 88 Overheating, Engine ..................... 254 Overview ................................ 120

    Vehicle ................................. 141 Power

    Instrument Panel ........................ 5

    Door Locks .............................. 22 Mirrors ................................. 32 Outlets ................................. 88 Protection, Battery ...................... 118 Retained Accessory (RAP) .............. 192 Seat Adjustment ........................ 39 Windows ............................... 33

  • P Park
  • Reading Lamps ...........................116 Rear

    Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) System .......217 Seat Armrest ........................... 45 Seats ................................... 43 Vision Camera (RVC) ................... 215 Window Washer/Wiper ................. 87

    Assist .............................. 215, 216 Shifting Into ........................... 192 Shifting Out of ........................ 193

    Parking Brake and P (Park) Mechanism

    Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .............. 50 Privacy

    Rear Compartment/Storage Panel

    Check ................................ 259 Extended .............................. 194 Over Things That Burn ................. 194

    Cover ................................... 82 Rearview Mirrors ..........................33

    Vehicle Data Recording ................ 336 Problems with Route Guidance ...........141 Program

    Automatic Dimming .................... 33 Reclining Seatbacks ....................... 40 Recognition

    Page 357

    Parking or Backing

    Assistance Systems .................... 215 Passenger

    Courtesy Transportation ............... 332 Prohibited Fuels ......................... 226 Proposition 65 Warning

    Voice .................................. 142 Recommended

    Airbag Status Indicator ................. 98 Compartment Air Filter .................172 Sensing System ......................... 58

    California ................................. 1

    Fuel.................................... 226

    Roof

    Seats (cont'd)

    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ..... 319 Records

    Head Restraints ......................... 37 Heated Front ........................... 41 Lumbar Adjustment, Front .............. 41 Power Adjustment, Front ............... 39 Rear .................................... 43 Reclining Seatbacks ..................... 40

    Rack System ............................ 83 Sunroof ................................. 35

    Maintenance ........................... 322 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............. 302 Reimbursement Program, GM

    Rotation, Tires ........................... 287 Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............... 326 Running the Vehicle While Parked ....... 194

    Mobility ............................... 330 Remote

    S Safety

    Securing Child Restraints ...............75, 76 Security

    Key ..................................... 10 Key Operation ....................... 10, 13 Vehicle Start ............................ 19

    Page 358

    Locks ................................... 23 Safety Defects Reporting

    Light ................................... 105 OnStar ................................. 340 Vehicle ................................. 30 Vehicle Alarm ........................... 30

    Replacement Parts

    Canadian Government ................. 336 General Motors ........................ 336 U.S. Government....................... 335

    Airbags ................................. 62 Maintenance ........................... 320

    Service ....................................172 Accessories and Modifications ......... 239 Climate Control System ................ 167 Doing Your Own Work ................. 240 Electric Parking Brake Light ............ 101 Maintenance Records .................. 322 Maintenance, General Information ..... 314 Parts Identification ..................... 323 Scheduling Appointments .............. 332

    Replacing

    Safety System Check ......................51 Satellite Radio ........................... 126 Scheduling Appointments ................ 332 Seat Belts ................................. 45

    Airbag System .......................... 62 LATCH System Parts After a Crash ...... 74 Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash.... 52

    Reporting Safety Defects

    Care .....................................51 Extender .................................51 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly ....... 46 Lap-Shoulder Belt ....................... 48 Reminders .............................. 97 Replacing after a Crash ................. 52 Use During Pregnancy .................. 50

    Canadian Government ................. 336 General Motors ........................ 336 U.S. Government....................... 335

    Restraints

    Services

    Where to Put ........................... 68 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ......... 192 Roads

    Special Application ..................... 318 Servicing System .........................141 Servicing the Airbag .......................61 Settings...................................153

    Seats

    Driving, Wet ........................... 178 Roadside Assistance Program ............ 330

    Page 359

    Adjustment, Front ...................... 39 Folding Seatback ........................ 42

    System (cont'd)

    Stop/Start System ....................... 189 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps

    Shift Lock Control Function Check,

    Rear Cross Traffic Alert .................217 Roof Rack ............................... 83

    Automatic Transmission ................ 259 Shifting

    Bulb Replacement................. 264, 267 Storage

    Into Park .............................. 192 Out of Park ............................ 193

    T Tachometer ............................... 95 Taillamps

    Center Console ......................... 81 Compartments .......................... 80 Cupholders ............................. 81 Glove Box .............................. 80 Instrument Panel Areas ................. 80 Rear Compartment/Storage Panel

    Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) ............. 222 Sidemarker

    Bulb Replacement................. 264, 267 Teen Driver .............................. 156 Text Telephone (TTY) Users .............. 329 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................31

    Bulb Replacement................. 264, 267 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change ............115 Software Updates .........................123 Spare Tire

    Cover ................................. 82

    Immobilizer ..............................31 Time ...................................... 88 Tires ..................................... 276

    Roof Rack System....................... 83 Storage Areas

    Compact ............................... 298 Special Application Services ...............318 Specifications and Capacities ............. 324 Speedometer ............................. 95 Sport Mode Light ........................ 102 StabiliTrak

    Cargo Management System ............ 83 Struts

    Page 360

    All-Season ............................. 277 Buying New Tires ...................... 289 Chains ................................. 292 Changing .............................. 294 Compact Spare ........................ 298 Designations ........................... 279 Different Size .......................... 290 If a Tire Goes Flat ..................... 293 Inspection ............................. 287 Pressure ............................... 282 Pressure Light ......................... 104 Pressure Monitor Operation ........... 284 Pressure Monitor System .............. 283 Rotation ............................... 287

    Gas .................................... 261 Stuck Vehicle ............................ 180 Sun Visors ................................ 34 Sunroof ....................................35 Symbols ....................................3

    OFF Light .............................. 103 Start Assist, Hill..........................200 Start Vehicle, Remote ......................19 Starter Switch Check ..................... 259 Starting the Engine .......................187 Steering ................................. 176

    Navigation ............................. 134 System

    Airbag .................................. 52 Driver Assistance ...................... 214 Engine Air Filter Life ................... 248 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) ............217 Global Positioning ..................... 140 Infotainment........................... 338

    Heated Wheel .......................... 86 Wheel Adjustment ...................... 86 Wheel Controls ......................... 121

    Transporting

    Vehicle (cont'd)

    Tires (cont'd)

    Load Limits ............................. 181 Messages .............................. 110 Positioning ............................. 141 Remote Start ........................... 19 Security................................. 30 Speed Messages ........................ 111 Symbols ................................. 3

    Sidewall Labeling ...................... 278 Terminology and Definitions ........... 280 Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......... 290 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .... 292 Wheel Replacement.................... 292 When It Is Time for New Tires ......... 288 Winter ................................. 277

    a Disabled Vehicle ..................... 301 Trip Odometer ............................ 95 TTY Users

    Customer Assistance ................... 329 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ............115 Turn Signal

    Bulb Replacement................. 264, 267

    Vehicle Care

    Top Tier Fuel ............................ 226 Towing

  • U Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............290 Updates
  • Map Data .............................. 142 Software ............................... 123

    USB Port ..................................127 Using

    Infotainment System ................... 121 Navigation System ...................... 131 This Manual ............................. 2

  • V Vehicle
  • Tire Pressure ........................... 282 Ventilation, Air ...........................172 Visors ..................................... 34 Voice Recognition .........................142

    Driving Characteristics ................. 229 Equipment ............................. 235 General Information ................... 228 Recreational Vehicle ................... 302 Trailer ................................. 232

    W Warning

    Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak

    Brake System Light .................... 100 Caution and Danger ..................... 3 Hazard Flashers ......................... 115 Lights, Gauges, and Indicators .......... 92

    Light ................................. 103 Control/Electronic Stability Control .... 200 Off Light ............................... 103

    Washer Fluid ............................ 255 Wheels

    Trademarks and License Agreements..... 159 Trailer

    Ahead Indicator ........................ 102 Alarm System .......................... 30 Canadian Owners ........................ 2 Control ................................ 176 Data Recording and Privacy ............ 336 Design ................................. 174 Identification Number (VIN) ............ 323

    Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 292 Different Size .......................... 290 Replacement ........................... 292

    Towing ................................ 232 Transmission

    Automatic ............................. 195 Fluid, Automatic ....................... 248

    When It Is Time for New Tires ........... 288 Where to Put the Restraint ............... 68

    Transportation Program, Courtesy ....... 332

    Windows ..................................33

    Power .................................. 33 Windshield

    Replacement ........................... 261 Wiper/Washer .......................... 86

    Winter

    Cover .................................. 189 Driving ................................ 179 Tires ................................... 277

    Wiper

    Blade Replacement .................... 260 Rear Washer ............................ 87

    Wireless Charging ........................ 89

    ###### United States

    |![image 377](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile377.png)| |---|

    United States Customer Assistance 1-800-222-1020 Roadside Assistance 1-800-243-8872

    Scan to Access

  • • Owner’s Manuals
  • • Warranty Information
  • • Connected Services
  • • My Chevrolet Rewards
  • • myChevrolet Mobile App
  • • How-To Videos
  • • Vehicle Diagnostics
  • • Scheduled Maintenance
  • • Vehicle Features
  • • Many Additional Resources
  • United States and Canada Connected Services 1-888-4-ONSTAR

    ![image 378](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile378.png)

    84883545 A

    Canada

    |![image 379](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile379.png)| |---|

    ###### Canada

    Customer Assistance 1-800-263-3777

    Roadside Assistance 1-800-268-6800

    ![image 380](2023-trailblazer_images/imageFile380.png)

    More from Chevrolet

    Similar Unknown